Перевод: с греческого на английский

с английского на греческий

С английского на:
Греческий
С греческого на:
Английский

refers

Толкование Перевод

1 ὁ

ὁ, ὅ, ὅς, The uses are relative, demonstrative, articular: where ὁ is not followed by a particle, it is often impossible to decide whether the u<*>e is relative or demonstrative, cf. Des Places 35ff. A relative, cf. ὅς τε. (ὅ, ὅς, τοῦ, οὗ, τῷ, ᾧ, τόν, ὅν, τοί, οἵ, τῶν, ὧν, τοῖς（ι), οἷς, οἶσι（ν), τούς; ἅ, ἇς, τᾶς, ᾆ, τᾷ, ἅν, τάν, αἵ, ταί, τᾶν, αἷς（ι), ταῖσι; τοῦ, οὕνεκεν, ᾧ, τῷ, τό, τά, τῶν, ὧν, οἷσιν, τά.)

1 c. ind.

a preceded by an antecedent.
Ἱέρωνος θεμιστεῖον ὃς ἀμφέπει σκᾶπτον O. 1.12

Πέλοπος τοῦ μεγασθενὴς ἐράσσατο Γαιάοχος O. 1.25
ἕλεν ἄταν ὑπέροπλον ἅν τοι πατὴρ ὕπερ κρέμασε καρτερὸν αὐτῷ λίθον, τὸν αἰεὶ μενοινῶν κεφαλᾶς βαλεῖν εὐφροσύνας ἀλᾶται (Fennel: τάν οἱ codd.: ἅν οἱ Hermann, v. d. Mühll) O. 1.57—8. νέκταρ ἀμβροσίαν τε δῶκεν, οἷσιν ἄφθιτον θέν νιν ( οἷς νιν coni. Bergk) O. 1.63 [ ἃ τέκε (codd.: ἔτεκε Boehmer: τέκε τε byz.) O. 1.89]
πατέρων · καμόντες οἳ πολλὰ θυμῷ ἱερὸν ἔσχον οἴκημα O. 2.8

κούραις, ἔπαθον αἳ μεγάλα O. 2.23
ὕδωρ δ' ἄλλα (sc. ἄνθεμα)
φέρβει, ὅρμοισι τῶν χέρας ἀναπλέκοντι O. 2.74

Ῥαδαμάνθυος ὃν πατὴρ ἔχει μέγας ἑτοῖμον αὐτῷ πάρεδρον O. 2.76

Ἀχιλλέα ὃς Ἕκτορα σφᾶλε O. 2.81

κόσμον ἐλαίας, τάν ποτε Ἴστρου ἀπὸ σκιαρᾶν παγᾶν ἔνεικεν O. 3.13

Πίσα τᾶς ἄπο θεόμοροι νίσοντ' ἐπ ἀνθρώπους ἀοιδαί O. 3.9

ἔλαφον ἅν ποτε Ταυγέτα ἀντιθεῖσ' Ὀρθωσίας ἔγραψεν ἱεράν O. 3.29

δένδρεα · τῶν νιν γλυκὺς ἵμερος ἔσχεν O. 3.33

ἀλλὰ Κρόνου παῖ, ὃς Αἴτναν ἔχεις O. 4.6

Ψαύμιος ὃς ἐλαίᾳ στεφανωθεὶς Πισάτιδι κῦδος ὄρσαι σπεύδει Καμαρίνᾳ O. 4.11

Ψαύμιος · ὃς τὰν σὰν πόλιν αὔξων ἐγέραρεν O. 5.4

ὀχετούς, Ἵππαρις οἷσιν ἄρδει στρατὸν O. 5.12

αἶνος ὃν ἐν δίκᾳ φθέγξατ O. 6.12

Πιτάναν ἅ τοι Ποσειδάωνι μιχθεῖσα Κρονίῳ λέγεται O. 6.29

ἥρωι ὃς ἀνδρῶν Ἀρκάδων ἄνασσε O. 6.34

Ἑρμᾶν ὃς ἀγῶνας ἔχει O. 6.79
ἀκόνας, ἅ μ' ἐθέλοντα προσέρπει (but more prob. articular: cf. C. 2. d infra) O. 6.83 Μετώπα, πλάξιππον ἃ Θήβαν ἔτικτεν, τᾶς ἐρατεινὸν ὕδωρ πίομαι (bis) O. 6.85
Ὀρτυγίας, τὰν Ἱέρων καθαρῷ σκάπτῳ διέπων ἀμφέπει Δάματρα O. 6.93
[ὁ δ' ὄλβιος, ὃν φᾶμαι κατέχοντ ἀγαθαί (v. l. κατέχωντ) O. 7.10]
παῖδας, ὧν εἷς μὲν Κάμιρον πρεσβύτατόν τε Ἰάλυσον ἔτεκεν O. 7.73

Ζηνὶ ὃς σὲ μὲν Νεμέᾳ πρόφατον θῆκεν O. 8.16

Αἰακοῦ· τὸν καλέσαντο σύνεργον O. 8.31

Ἀλκιμέδων ὃς ἐν τέτρασιν παίδων ἀπεθήκατο γυίοις νόστον O. 8.67

Βλεψιάδαις ἕκτος οἷς ἤδη στέφανος περίκειται O. 8.76

κόσμον Ὀλυμπίᾳ, ὅν σφι Ζεὺς γένει ὤπασεν O. 8.83

ἀκρωτήριον Ἄλιδος τὸ δή ποτε Λυδὸς ἥρως Πέλοψ ἐξάρατο O. 9.10

υἱόν, ἃν Θέμις θυγάτηρ τέ οἱ σώτειρα λέλογχεν O. 9.15

ῥάβδον, βρότεα σώμαθ' ᾇ κατάγει O. 9.34

Μενοίτιον· τοῦ παῖς ἔστα σὺν Ἀχιλλεῖ O. 9.70

ἀγῶνα ὃν ἀρχαίῳ σάματι πὰρ Πέλοπος ἐκτίσσατο O. 10.24

μελέων, τὰ παρ' εὐκλέι Δίρκᾳ χρόνῳ μὲν φάνεν O. 10.85

Ἀρχεστράτου τὸν εἶδον κρατέοντα O. 10.100

ὥρᾳ τε κεκραμένον, ἅ ποτε ἀναιδέα Γανυμήδει θάνατον ἆλκε σὺν Κυπρογένει O. 10.104

ἐγκώμιον τεθμόν, τὸν ἄγει πεδίων ἐκ Πίσας O. 13.29

πατρὸς ὃς ἔπαθεν O. 13.63

φόρμιγξ τᾶς ἀκούει μὲν βάσις P. 1.2

Τυφὼς · τόν ποτε Κιλίκιον θρέψεν πολυώνυμον ἄντρον P. 1.16

Αἴτνα · τᾶς ἐρεύγονται μὲν ἀπλάτου πυρὸς ἁγνόταται ἐκ μυχῶν παγαί P. 1.21
Ζεῦ, ὃς τοῦτ' ἐφέπεις ὄρος, γαίας μέτωπον, τοῦ μὲν ἐπωνυμίαν κλεινὸς οἰκιστὴρ ἐκύδανεν πόλιν (bis) P. 1.30
Ποίαντος υἱὸν ὃς Πριάμοιο πόλιν πέρσεν P. 1.54

Αἴτνας βασιλεῖ·· τῷ πόλιν Ἱέρων ἔκτισσε P. 1.61

Τυνδαριδᾶν βαθύδοξοι γείτονες, ὧν κλέος ἄνθησεν αἰχμᾶς P. 1.66

Συρακοσίων ἀρχῷ ὠκυπόρων ἀπὸ ναῶν ὅ σφιν ἐν πόντῳ βάλεθ' ἁλικίαν P. 1.74

μαχᾶν, ταῖσι Μήδειοι κάμον P. 1.78
τετραορίας εὐάρματος Ἱέρων ἐν ᾇ
κρατέων ἀνέδησεν Ὀρτυγίαν P. 2.5

ὕμνον τὸν ἐδέξαντ' ἀμφ ἀρετᾷ P. 1.80
Ἀρτέμιδος, ἇς οὐκ ἄτερ ἐδάμασσε πώλους (Hermann: τᾶς codd.) P. 2.7
Κινύραν τὸν ὁ χρυσοχαῖτα προφρόνως ἐφίλησ' Ἀπόλλων P. 2.16

Ἥρας τὰν Διὸς εὐναὶ λάχον πολυγαθέες P. 2.27
γόνον τὸν ὀνύμαζε τράφοισα Κένταυρον, ὃς ἵπποισι Μαγνητίδεσσιν ἐμείγνυτ (bis) P. 2.44
θεός, ὃ καὶ πτερόεντ' αἰετὸν κίχε P. 2.50

θεός, ὃς ἀνέχει τότε μὲν τὰ κείνων P. 2.89

ξένον, ὃς Συρακόσσαισι νέμει βασιλεύς P. 3.70

στεφάνοις, τοὺς ἀριστεύων Φερένικος ἕλεν Κίρρᾳ ποτέ P. 3.74

Ματρί, τᾶν κοῦραι παρ' ἐμὸν πρόθυρον σὺν Πανὶ μέλπονται P. 3.78
( Πηλεύς τε καὶ Κάδμος)
λέγονται μὰν βροτῶν ὄλβον ὑπέρτατον οἳ σχεῖν P. 3.89
[ὅς (codd. contra metr.: σάος Schr.) P. 3.106]
τὸ Μηδείας ἔπος Αἰήτα τό ποτε ζαμενὴς παῖς ἀπέπνευσ P. 4.10
“ κεῖνος ὄρνις τόν ποτε δέξατ” P. 4.20 “Εὔφαμος, τόν ποτ' Εὐρώπα τίκτε” P. 4.46
μελίσσας Δελφίδος ἅ σε χαίρειν ἐστρὶς αὐδάσαισα ἄμφανεν P. 4.61
“τοκέων, τοί μ' κρύβδα πέμπον” P. 4.111 “ ἀγρούς τοὺς ἀπούρας ἁμετέρων τοκέων νέμεαι” P. 4.149 “θρόνος, ᾧ ποτε Κρηθείδας ἐγκαθίζων εὔθυνε” P. 4.152 “ δέρμα τε κριοῦ τῷ ποτ' ἐκ πόντου σαώθη” P. 4.161
βόας, οἳ φλόγ' ἀπὸ ξανθᾶν γενύων πνέον P. 4.225
δράκοντος ὃς πάχει μάκει τε πεντηκόντερον ναῦν κράτει, τέλεσεν ἃν πλαγαὶ σιδάρου (bis) P. 4.245
Κάστορος· εὐδίαν ὃς μετὰ χειμέριον ὄμβρον τεὰν καταιθύσσει μάκαιραν ἑστίαν P. 5.10

Κάρρωτον ὃς Βαττιδᾶν ἀφίκετο δόμους P. 5.27

ἀνδριάντι Κρῆτες ὃν τοξοφόροι τέγει Παρνασσίῳ καθέσσαντο P. 5.41

Ἀπόλλων ὃ καὶ βαρειᾶν νόσων ἀκέσματ' νέμει P. 5.63
μυχόν τ' ἀμφέπει μαντήιον. τῷ Λακεδαίμονι ἐν Ἄργει τε καὶ ζαθέᾳ Πύλῳ ἔνασσεν ἀλκάεντας Ἡρακλέος ἐκγόνους (ᾧ, τῷ χρησμῷ Σ.) P. 5.69
πόλιν. ἔχοντι τὰν χαλκοχάρμαι ξένοι Τρῶες P. 5.82
ἄνδρες τοὺς
Ἀριστοτέλης ἄγαγε P. 5.87

Ἀρκεσίλᾳ· τὸν ἐν ἀοιδᾷ νέων πρέπει χρυσάορα Φοῖβον ἀπύειν P. 5.103

ὕμνων θησαυρὸς. τὸν οὔτε χειμέριος ὄμβρος οὔτ' ἄνεμος ἐς μυχοὺς ἁλὸς ἄξοισι P. 6.10

Ἀντίλοχος ὃς ὑπερέφθιτο πατρός P. 6.30

Ἐλέλιχθον, ἄρχεις ὃς ἱππιᾶν ἐσόδων P. 6.50

ἀστῶν οἳ τεὸν δόμον Πυθῶνι δίᾳ θαητὸν ἔτευξαν P. 7.10
τὺ (= Ἡσυχία) —
τὰν οὐδὲ Πορφυρίων μάθεν παρ' αἶσαν ἐξερεθίζων P. 8.12

Ἀπόλλωνος· ὃς εὐμενεῖ νόῳ λτ;γτ;ενάρκειον ἔδεκτο υἱὸν P. 8.18

σωμάτεσσι τοῖς οὔτε νόστος ὁμῶς ἔπαλπνος ἐν Πυθιάδι κρίθη P. 8.83

Κυράνας, τὰν Λατοίδας ἅρπασ P. 9.5

Ὑψέος ὃς Λαπιθᾶν ὑπερόπλων τουτάκις ἦν βασιλεύς P. 9.14

ὅν ποτε Κρέοισ' ἔτικτεν P. 9.15

σέ, τὸν οὐ θεμιτὸν ψεύδει θιγεῖν P. 9.42
“ὦ ἄνα, κύριον ὃς πάντων τέλος οἶσθα” P. 9.44 “ παῖδα ὃν κλυτὸς Ἑρμᾶς οἴσει” P. 9.59
Κυράναν, ἅ νιν εὔφρων δέξεται P. 9.73

Ἰόλαον. τόν κρύψαν ἔνερθ' ὑπὸ γᾶν P. 9.80
κῶφος ἀνήρ τις, ὃς Ἡρακλεῖ στόμα μὴ περιβάλλει, μηδὲ Διρκαίων ὑδάτων ἀὲ μέμναται, τά νιν θρέψαντο καὶ Ἰφικλέα, τοῖσι τέλειον ἐπ' εὐχᾷ κωμάσομαί τι παθὼν ἐσλόν (ter) P. 9.87—9.
κούραν, τὰν μάλα πολλοὶ ἀριστῆες ἀνδρῶν αἴτεον P. 9.107

Ὑπερβορέων. παρ' οἶς ποτε Περσεὺς ἐδαίσατο λαγέτας P. 10.31

ὧν θαλίαις ἔμπεδον εὐφαμίαις τε μάλιστ' Ἀπόλλων χαίρει P. 10.34

θησαυρόν, ὃν περίαλλ' ἐτίμασε Λοξίας P. 11.5

ἀγῶνι ἐν τῷ Θρασυδᾷος ἔμνασεν ἑστίαν P. 11.13

Ὀρέστα· τὸν δὴ ἐκ δόλου τροφὸς ἄνελε δυσπενθέος P. 11.17

Πυθονίκῳ ἢ Θρασυδᾴῳ, τῶν εὐφροσύνα τε καὶ δόξ' ἐπιφλέγει P. 11.45

τέχνᾳ, τάν ποτε Παλλὰς ἐφεῦρε P. 12.6

θρῆνον. τὸν ἄιε λειβόμενον P. 12.9

υἱὸς Δανάας· τὸν ἀπὸ χρυσοῦ φαμὲν αὐτορύτου ἔμμεναι P. 12.17

δονάκων, τοὶ παρὰ καλλιχόρῳ ναίοισι πόλι Χαρίτων P. 12.26

ἀλλ' ἔσται χρόνος οὖτος, ὃ καὶ τὸ μὲν δώσει P. 12.31
νάσω, τὰν Ζεὺς ἔδωκεν
Φερσεφόνᾳ N. 1.13

ἀοιδὰν. τᾶς ἀφθονίαν ὄπαζε μήτιος ἁμᾶς ἄπο N. 3.9

Μυρμιδόνες ὧν παλαίφατον ἀγορὰν οὐκ ἐλεγχέεσσιν ἐμίανε N. 3.14

κιόνων ὕπερ Ἡρακλέος ἥρως θεὸς ἃς ἔθηκε ναυτιλίας ἐσχάτας μάρτυρας κλυτούς N. 3.22

Πηλεὺς ὃς καὶ Ἰαολκὸν εἶλε N. 3.34

Ἀσκλαπιόν, τὸν φαρμάκων δίδαξε μαλακόχειρα νόμον N. 3.55

σέο δ' ἀγών, τὸν ὕμνος ἔβαλεν ὄπι νέων ἐπιχώριον χάρμα κελαδέων N. 3.65

Ἀριστοκλείδᾳ ὃς τάνδε νᾶσον εὐκλέι προσέθηκε λόγῳ N. 3.68

αἰετὸς ὃς ἔλαβεν αἶψα N. 3.81

Ἡρακλέος. σὺν ᾧ ποτε Τροίαν κραταιὸς Τελαμὼν πόρθησε N. 4.25
ἕδραν, τὰν οὐρανοῦ βασιλῆες πόντου τ' ἐφεζόμενοι δῶρα καὶ κράτος ἐξέφαναν (Herwerden: τᾶς codd.) N. 4.67 ( κεῖνος) τὸν Εὐφάνης ἐθέλων γεραιὸς προπάτωρ σὸς ἄεισέν ποτε, παῖ (Σ assume Kallikles to be antecedent, others refer to ἀγῶνι or Ὀρσοτριαίνα, cf. N. 2.24) N. 4.89
ἄρουραν· τάν ποτ' εὔανδρόν τε καὶ ναυσικλυτὰν θέσσαντο N. 5.9

Ποσειδάωνα ὃς Αἰγᾶθεν ποτὶ κλειτὰν θαμὰ νίσεται Ἰσθμὸν Δωρίαν N. 5.37

μείς τ' ἐπιχώριος, ὃν φίλησ Ἀπόλλων N. 5.44

παῖς ἐναγώνιος, ὃς ταύταν μεθέπων Διόθεν αἶσαν νῦν πέφανται οὐκ ἄμμορος N. 6.13

Σαοκλείδἀ, ὃς ὑπέρτατος Ἁγησιμάχοἰ ὑέων γένετο N. 3.21

ἀγώνων ἄπο, τοὺς ἐνέποισιν ἱερούς N. 6.59

Αἴας, ὃν πόρευσαν N. 7.27
[ βοαθοῶν τοι. v.
τοι N. 7.33
]
πόλιν. τᾷ καὶ Δαναοὶ πόνησαν N. 7.35

γλῶσσαν, ὃς ἐξέπεμψεν παλαισμάτων αὐχένα καὶ σθένος ἀδίαντον N. 7.72

τίν Γίγαντας ὃς ἐδάμασας N. 7.90
[ γέρας τό περ νῦν. v. ὁ, C. N. 7.101]
ἡρώων ἄωτοι οἵ τε κρανααῖς ἐν Ἀθάναισιν ἅρμοζον στρατόν, οἵ τ' ἀνὰ Σπάρταν Πελοπηιάδαι N. 8.11

πάρφασις ἃ τὸ μὲν λαμπρὸν βιᾶται, τῶν δ' ἀφάντων κῦδος ἀντείνει σαθρόν N. 8.34

ῥεέθροις, ὧν ἐγὼ μνασθεὶς ἐπασκήσω κλυταῖς ἥρωα τιμαῖς· ὅς τότε ἄμφαινε κυδαίνων πόλιν N. 9.9
—11.
αἰδὼς ἃ φέρει δόξαν N. 9.34
φιάλαι-
σι ἅς ποθ' ἵπποι κτησάμεναι Χρομίῳ πέμψαν N. 9.52

Ἡρακλέος οὗ κατ' Ὄλυμπον ἄλοχος Ἥβα ἔστι N. 10.17

ἑταίρους οἵ σε γεραίροντες ὀρθὰν φυλάσσοισιν Τένεδον N. 11.5

Δᾶλος, ἐν ᾇ κέχυμαι I. 1.4
πατρίδι ἐν ᾇ καὶ τὸν ἀδείμαντον Ἀλκμήνα τέκεν παῖδα, θρασεῖαι τόν ποτε Γηρυόνα φρίξαν κύνες (bis) I. 1.12—3.
ἄρουραν, ἅ νιν ἐν κρυοέσσᾳ δέξατο συντυχίᾳ I. 1.36
φῶτες, οἳ χρυσαμπύκων ἐς δίφρον Μοισᾶν ἔβαινον ( οἳ Σ: ὅσοι codd.) I. 2.1 τὠργείου χρήματα χρήματ' ἀνήρ ὃς φᾶ (others view ὅς as dem.) I. 2.11
νίκαν, τὰν λτ;γτ;ενοκράτει Ποσειδάων ὀπάσαις στεφάνωμα κόμᾳ πέμπεν I. 2.14

χεῖρα τὰν Νικόμαχος κατὰ καιρὸν νεῖμ I. 2.22

γαῖαν τὰν δὴ καλέοισιν Ὀλυμπίου Διὸς ἄλσος I. 2.27

ἀρετὰς. αἷσι Κλεωνυμίδαι θάλλοντες αἰεὶ διέρχονται I. 4.4

Ἄἴαντος ἀλκάν, φοίνιον τὰν ὀψίᾳ ἐν νυκτὶ ταμὼν μομφὰν ἔχει I. 4.35

Ὅμηρος ὃς αὐτοῦ πᾶσαν ὀρθώσαις ἀρετὰν κατὰ ῥάβδον ἔφρασεν I. 4.37

υἱὸς Ἀλκμήνας· ὃς Οὔλυμπόνδ' ἔβα I. 4.55

θανόντων· τοὺς Μεγάρα τέκε οἱ Κρεοντὶς υἱούς· τοῖσιν ἐν δυθμαῖσιν αὐγᾶν φλὸξ παννυχίζει I. 4.64
—5.
Αἰακοῦ παίδων τε. τοὶ καὶ σὺν μάχαις δὶς πόλιν Τρώων ἔπραθον I. 5.35

πατρός. τὸν χαλκοχάρμαν ἐς πόλεμον ἆγε I. 6.27
“θηρός, ὃν πάμπρωτον ἀέθλων κτεῖνά ποτ' ἐν Νεμέᾳ” I. 6.48 “ἔσσεταί τοι παῖς, ὃν αἰτεῖς” I. 6.52
ὕδωρ, τὸ ἀνέτειλαν I. 6.74

θάλος, χάλος, χάλκασπις ᾧ πότμον μὲν Ἄρης ἔμειξεν I. 7.25

Ζηνί ὃ τὰν μὲν ᾤκισσεν ἁγεμόνα I. 8.19

Αἰακὸν. ὃ καὶ δαιμόνεσσι δίκας ἐπείραινε I. 8.23

Ἀχιλέος. ὃ καὶ Μύσιον ἀμπελόεν αἵμαξε I. 8.49

θεόν, ὃς κεραυνοῦ τε κρέσσον ἄλλο βέλος διώξει χερί I. 8.34

ἶνας ἐκταμὼν δορί, ταί μιν ῥύοντό ποτε I. 8.52

ἀριστέας οἶς δῶμα Φερσεφόνας μανύων Ἀχιλεύς πρόφαινεν I. 8.55

μιν ὃς ἔλαχεν σελίνων I. 8.63
( Ζεύς), ὃς καὶ τυπεὶς ἁγνῷ πελέκει τέκετο ξανθὰν Ἀθάναν fr. 34. Εὐξαντίου [Κρητ]ῶν μαιομένων
ὃς ἀνα[ίνετο] αὐταρχεῖν Pae. 4.36

Διὸς Ἐννοσίδαν τε. χθόνα τοί ποτε καὶ στρατὸν ἀθρόον πέμψαν κεραυνῷ τριόδοντί τε ἐς τὸν βαθὺν Τάρταρον Pae. 4.42

]ὃν ἔμβα[λ Pae. 6.78

Νεοπτόλεμον. ὃς διέπερσεν Ἰλίου πόλιν Pae. 6.104

χρηστήριον[ ]ἐν ᾧ Τήνερον ἔτεκ[εν Pae. 9.41
τί ἔλπεαι σοφίαν ἔμμεν, ἃν ὀλίγον τοι ἀνὴρ ὑπὲρ ἀνδρὸς ἴσχει; (cod. unus Stobaei in marg., ᾇ cett.: om. Clem. Alex.: ᾆ τ Boeckh) fr. 61. 1. θεοί, πολύβατον οἵ τ' ἄστεος ὀμφαλὸν θυόεντ οἰχνεῖτε πανδαίδαλόν τ εὐκλἔ ἀγοράν fr. 75. 3. ἐπὶ τὸν κισσοδαῆ θεόν, τὸν Βρόμιον τὸν Ἐριβόαν τε βροτοὶ καλέομεν ( ὃν ὃν v. l.: τε om. codd. nonnulli: docti unum vel alterum τὸν del.) fr. 75. 10. Ἀλαλά, ᾆ θύεται ἄνδρες fr. 78. 2. ἀνδρὸς δ' οὔτε γυναικός, ὧν θάλεσσιν ἔγκειμαι Παρθ. 2. 3. νίκαις, αἷς ἐν ἀιόνεσσιν Ὀγχη[στοῦ κλυ]τᾶς, ταῖς δὲ ναὸν Ἰτωνίας χαίταν στεφάνοις ἐκόσμηθεν Παρθ. 2.. θυγάτηρ, Ἀνδαισιστρότᾰ ἃν ἐπάσκησε Παρθ. 2.. Ὑμέναιον, ὃν λάβεν (ὃν supp. Hermann: om. cod.) Θρ. 3.. ψυχὰς ἐκ τᾶν βασιλῆες ἀγαυοὶ αὔξοντ fr. 133. 3. ἑορτὰ ἐν ᾇ πρῶτον εὐνάσθην fr. 193. Ἐλπίς, ἃ μάλιστα κυβερνᾷ fr. 214. 3.

b where the antecedent follows the rel. cl. [ ταί τε ναίετε (Bergk: αἵ τε codd.) O. 14.2]
ὅσσα δὲ μὴ πεφίληκε Ζεύς, ἀτύζονται βοὰν Πιερίδων ἀίοντα ὅς τ' ἐν αἰνᾷ Ταρτάρῳ κεῖται, θεῶν πολέμιος, Τυφώς P. 1.15

ὃς δὲ διδάκτ' ἔχει, ψεφεννὸς ἀνὴρ N. 3.41
οἶσι δὲ Φερσεφόνα ποινὰν παλαιοῦ πένθεος δέξεται, ἐς τὸν ὕπερθεν ἅλιον κείνων ἐνάτῳ ἔτει ἀνδιδοῖ ψυχὰς πάλιν fr. 133. 1. ὁ χοροιτύπος, ὃν Μαλέας ὄρος ἔθρεψε, Ναίδος ἀκοίτας Σιληνός fr. 156.

c with interior antecedent. “ἀρχαίαν κομίζων πατρὸς ἐμοῦτάν ποτε Ζεὺς ὤπασεν λαγέτᾳ Αἰόλῳ καὶ παισὶ τιμάν ( ἀρχὰν ἀγκομίζων Chaeris) P. 4.107
μακάριος, ὃς ἔχεις καὶ πεδὰ μέγαν κάματον λόγων φέρτατων μναμήἰ P. 5.46

d

I ἐξ οὗ, from then on
ἐξ οὗ πολύκλειτον καθ' Ἕλλανας γένος Ἰαμιδᾶν O. 6.71

ἐξ οὗ Θέτιος γόνος οὐλίῳ μιν ἐν Ἄρει παραγορεῖτο μή ποτε σφετέρας ἄτερθε ταξιοῦσθαι αἰχμᾶς O. 9.76

II v. οὕνεκεν.

e where the antecedent is omitted

I being demonstrative in same case as rel. ἀντεβόλησεν τῶν ἀνὴρ θνατὸς οὔπω τις πρότερον ( τοιούτων ὧν) O. 13.31 ὧν ἔραται, καιρὸν διδούς ( τούτων ὧν) P. 1.57 τῶν δ' ἕκαστος ὀρούει, τυχών κεν ἁρπαλέαν σχέθοι φροντίδα τὰν πὰρ ποδός ( τούτων ὧν) P. 10.61 πράσσει γὰρ ἔργῳ μὲν σθένος, βουλαῖσι δὲ φρήν, ἐσσόμενον προιδεῖν συγγενὲς οἷς ἕπεται ( τούτοις οἷς) N. 1.28 σύνες ὅ τοι λέγω ( τοῦτο ὅ) fr. 105. 1. ἀλᾶται στρατῶν, ὃς ἀμαξοφόρητον οἶκον οὐ πέπαται ( ἐκεῖνος ὅστις) fr. 105b. 2. τὰς δὲ Θεοξένου ἀκτῖνας πρὸς ὄσσων μαρμαρυζοίσας δρακεὶς ὃς μὴ πόθῳ κυμαίνεται fr. 123. 4. ὃς μὲν ἀχρήμων, ἀφνεὸς τότε fr. 124. 8.

II being assimilated to the case of the rel. τιμὰ δὲ γίνεται, ὧν θεὸς ἁβρὸν αὔξει λόγον τεθνακότων (τούτοις, ὧν) N. 7.32 Ζεῦ πάτερ, τῶν μὰν ἔραται φρενί, σιγᾷ οἱ στόμα ( ταῦτα ὧν) N. 10.29 ὀρνιχολόχῳ τε καὶ ὃν πόντος τράφει ( ἐκείνῳ ὃν) I. 1.48

f where antecedent does not correspond to rel. in gender or number. ὀρθὰν ἄγεις ἐφημοσύναν, τά ποτ' ἐν οὔρεσι φαντὶ μεγαλοσθενεῖ Φιλύρας υἱὸν ὀρφανιζομένῳ Πηλείδᾳ παραινεῖν (Er. Schmid: τὰν codd.) P. 6.21

2 c. subj.

a preceded by definite antecedent.

I μῶμος ἐξ ἄλλων κρέμαται φθονεόντων τοῖς, οἷς ποτε πρώτοις αἰδοία ποτιστάξῃ Χάρις εὐκλέα μορφάν (v. l. ποτιστάξει, -άζει) O. 6.75 ὁ δ' ὄλβιος ὃν φᾶμαι κατέχωντ ἀγαθαί ( κατέχοντ v. l.) O. 7.10
ἐκ πόνων δ, οἳ σὺν νεότατι γένωνται σύν τε δίκᾳ N. 9.44

II add. κε/
ἄν. ἀμφοτέροισι δ' ἀνήρ, ὃς ἂν ἐγκύρσῃ καὶ ἕλῃ, στέφανον ὕψιστον δέδεκται P. 1.100
“γένος, οἵ κεν τάνδε νᾶσον ἐλθόντες τέκωνται φῶτα” P. 4.51
ὑμνητὸς οὗτος ἀνὴρ γίνεται σοφοῖς, ὃς ἂν τὰ μέγιστ' ἀέθλων ἕλῃ P. 10.23
, cf. P. 5.65 infra.

b where the antecedent is omitted

I being demonstrative in same case as rel.
δίδωσί τε Μοῖσαν οἷς ἂν ἐθέλῃ P. 5.65

ὃς δ' ἀμφ ἀέθλοις ἄρηται κῦδος ἁβρόν, εὐαγορηθείς κέρδος ὕψιστον δέκεται I. 1.50

II where the rel. is assimilated to the case of the antecedent. ἐν δὲ πείρᾳ τέλος διαφαίνεται ὧν τις ἐξοχώτερος γένηται ( τούτων ἅ) N. 3.71 τὰ δ' αὐτὸς ἀντιτύχῃ, ἔλπεταί τις ἕκαστος ἐξοχώτατα φάσθαι ( ταῦτα ὧν: ἄν τις τύχῃ codd., corr. Mingarelli) N. 4.91

c where the antecedent does not correspond with the rel. in gender or number, v. P. 4.51 supra

a

II

3 c. opt.

a with definite antecedent. ἅπαντας ἐν οἴκῳ εἴρετο παῖδα, τὸν Εὐάδνα τέκοι (v. Goodwin, M & T, § 700) O. 6.49

b add. κε/ἄν, v. P. 9.119 infra c.

c antecedent omitted, being demonstrative assimilated to the case of the rel. θανεῖν δ' οἷσιν ἀνάγκα, τά κέ τις ἀνώνυμον γῆρας ἕψοι μάταν; (byz.: οἷς codd.) O. 1.82 εἶπε δ' ἐν μέσσοις ἀπάγεσθαι, ὃς ἂν πρῶτος θορὼν ἀμφί οἱ ψαύσειε πέπλοις (The oratio recta would be ὃς ἂν ψαύσῃ,” Gildersleeve) P. 9.119

4 f. s. dat. pro adv., =
ὡς. ζεῦξον ἤδη μοι σθένος ἡμιόνων ᾇ τάχος O. 6.23
ἐνυπνίῳ δ' ᾇ τάχιστα πιθέσθαι κελήσατο μιν (Kayser: δ' ἇ, δαί, δέ codd.) O. 13.79

5 exx. where rel. conj. is postponed within rel cl. as second word, O. 1.12, O. 1.82, O. 2.8, O. 2.23, O. 2.74, O. 6.85, O. 8.76, P. 4.10, P. 4.246, P. 5.10, P. 5.41, P. 5.82, P. 6.50, P. 9.44, I. 1.13, I. 7.25, fr. 12, Πα.., Παρθ. 2. 71: as third word, O. 5.12, O. 9.34, P. 2.5, N. 3.22,
Κρητ]ῶν μαιομένων ὃς ἀνα[ίνετο] αὐταρχεῖν Pae. 4.36
as fourth word, or more,
ὠκυπόρων ἀπὸ ναῶν ὅ σφιν ἐν πόντῳ βάλεθ' ἁλικίαν P. 1.74
λέγονται μὰν βροτῶν ὄλβον
ὑπέρτατον οἳ σχεῖν P. 3.89

ἐσσόμενον προιδεῖν συγγενὲς οἷς ἕπεται N. 1.28
τὰς δὲ Θεοξένου ἀκτῖνας πρὸς ὄσσων μαρμαρυζοίσας δρακεὶς ὃς μὴ πόθῳ κυμαίνεται fr. 123. 4.

6 in crasis, v. οὕνεκεν.

7 fragg. ]
νοιον ἃ σοὶ σε[ Πα.. 1 ]οῦν οἳ Ζην[ Pae. 6.154

]υἱὸν ἔτι τέξει· τὸν απ[ Pae. 10.21
ἐγχώριαι, [ἀγ]λαὸς ἃς ἐν' ἑρκε[ (ἆς = ἕως Wil.)
Πα. 12. 2. τόν ποτε[ Pae. 22.9
]τοὶ πρόιδ[ο]ν αἶσαν α[ (καί]τοι Schr.) fr. 140a. 49 (23) ]αδις, οὕς οἱ[ (οἱ encl. post vocalem P. ponere solet, nott. Snell) fr. 169, 51. ὃς Δολόπων ἄγαγε θρασὺν ὅμιλον fr. 183. B demonstrative (ὁ, τοῦ, [τοῖο coni.], τῷ, τόν, τοί, οἱ, τῶν, τοῖς, τοῖσι（ν), τούς; ἁ, τᾶς coni., τᾷ, τάν, ταί, αἱ, ταῖς, τάς; τό, τοῦ, τό, τά, τῶν, τά: ὅς, I. 2.11, v. A. 1. a. supra.)

1 combined with various particles

a
μέν... δέ. ἀλλὁ μὲν Πυθῶνάδ' ᾤχετ ἰὼν. ἁ δὲ τίκτε θεόφρονα κοῦρον O. 6.37
—9. [ τὸ μὲν τὸ δὲ, v. infra 5a, O. 7.23]
ἐδόκησαν τάμνειν τέλος, τοὶ μὲν γένει φίλῳ σὺν Ἀτρέος Ἑλέναν κομίζοντες, οἱ δ' ἀπὸ πάμπαν εἴργοντες O. 13.58
—9. [ τὰ μὲν τὰ δὲ. v. infra 5b, P. 2.65]
Ἀσκλαπιόν. τὸν μὲν εὐίππου Φλεγύα θυγάτηρ πρὶν τελέσαι, κατέβα. ἁ δ' ἄλλον αἴνησεν γάμον P. 3.8
—12.
τοὺς μὲν ὦν λύσαις ἄλλον ἀλλοίων ἀχέων ἔξαγεν τοὺς δὲ τομαῖς ἔστασεν ὀρθούς P. 3.47
—53.
τοὺς μὲν μαλακαῖς ἐπαοιδαῖς ἀμφέπων, τοὺς δὲ προσανέα πίνοντας P. 3.51
—2.
ἐν δ' αὖτε χρόνῳ τὸν μὲν ὀξείαισι θύγατρες ἐρήμωσαν πάθαις εὐφροσύνας μέρος αἱ τρεῖς τοῦ δὲ παῖς P. 3.97
—100. [διδύμους υἱοὺς τὸν μὲν Ἐχίονα, κεχλάδοντας ἥβᾳ, τὸν δ' Ἔρυτον (v. C. 1. a infra) P. 4.179] [ τὸ μὲν τὸ δ. v. 5. a infra P. 11.63—4.]
τὸ μὲν δώσει, τὸ δ' οὔπω P. 12.32

δράκοντας. τοὶ μὲν ἐς θαλάμου μυχὸν εὐρὺν ἔβαν. ὁ δ' ὀρθὸν μὲν ἄντεινεν κάρα N. 1.41
—3. φυᾷ δ' ἕκαστος διαφέρομεν βιο-
τὰν λαχόντες, ὁ μὲν τά, τὰ δ' ἄλλοι N. 7.55

μεταμειβόμενοι δ' ἐναλλὰξ ἁμέραν τὰν μὲν παρὰ πατρὶ φίλῳ Δὶ νέμονται, τὰν δ ὑπὸ κεύθεσι γαίας ἐν γυάλοις Θεράπνας N. 10.55
—6.
ἀλλὰ βροτῶν τὸν μὲν κενεόφρονες αὖχαι ἐξ ἀγαθῶν ἔβαλον· τὸν δ' αὖ καταμεμφθέντ ἄγαν ἰσχὺν οἰκείων παρέσφαλεν καλῶν θυμός N. 11.29
—30. ]ναόν· τὸν μὲν Ὑπερβορ[έοις] ἄνεμος ζαμενὴς ἔμειξ[ ], ὦ Μοῖσαι· τοῦ δὲ παντέχ[νοις] Ἁφαίστου παλάμαις καὶ Ἀθά[νας] τίς ὁ ῥυθμὸς ἐφαίνετο; ( τοῦ coni. Hunt: τον Π.) Πα... ἁ μὲν ἀχέταν Λίνον αἴλινον ὕμνει, ἁ δὲ Ὑμέναιον. ἁ δ' Ἰάλεμον Θρ. 3.. καὶ τοὶ μὲν ἵπποις γυμνασίοισι λτ;τεγτ;, τοὶ δὲ πεσσοῖς, τοὶ δὲ φορμίγγεσσι τέρπονται Θρ. 7. 6.

b with μέν only

I in μέν... δέ construction.
ἄνθεμα δὲ χρυσοῦ φλέγει, τὰ μὲν χερσόθεν ἀπ' ἀγλαῶν δενδρέων, ὕδωρ δ ἄλλα φέρβει O. 2.73

τὰ μὲν ἁμετέρα γλῶσσα ποιμαίνειν ἐθέλει, ἐκ θεοῦ δ' ἀνὴρ σοφαῖς ἀνθεῖ πραπίδεσσιν ὁμοίως O. 11.8

τῷ μὲν Ἀπόλλων ἅ τε Πυθὼ κῦδος ἐξ ἀμφικτιόνων ἔπορεν ἱπποδρομίας. ἀπὸ δ' αὐτὸν ἐγώ P. 4.66

τὸν μὲν οὐ γίνωσκον· ὀπιζομένων δ' ἔμπας τις εἶπεν καὶ τόδε P. 4.86

τοὶ μὲν ἀλλάλοισι ἀμειβόμενοι γάρυον τοιαῦτ. ἀνὰ δ P. 4.93
[ τὸ μὲν ὅτι μάκαρ δὲ καὶ νῦν ὅτι v. 5. a. infra. P. 5.15]
τὰ μὲν παρίκει· τῶν νῦν δὲ P. 6.44
[ὡς τὸ μὲν οὐδέν, ὁ δὲ χάλκεος ἀσφαλὲς αἰὲν ἕδος μένει οὐρανός v. 5. a infra N. 6.3]
τὸν μὲν ἡμέροις ἀνάγκας χερσὶ βαστάζεις ἕτερον δ' ἑτέραις N. 8.3
τοὶ μὲν ὦν Θήβαισι τιμάεντες ἀρχᾶθεν λέγονται ὅσσα δ ( τοί refers to Kleonymidai, v. 4) I. 4.7 “παῖδα τὸν μὲν ἄρρηκτον φυάν, θυμὸς δ' ἑπέσθω” anacoluthon I. 6.47
τὰν μὲν πόλιος ᾤκισσεν ἁγεμόνα. σὲ δ I. 8.19
“ἀλλὰ τὰ μὲν παύσατε. βροτέων δὲ λεχέων τύχοισα υἱὸν εἰσιδέτω θανόντ” I. 8.35
καὶ τὸ μὲν διδότω θεός. [ὁ δ] ἐχθρὰ νοήσαις ἤδη φθόνος οἴχεται Pae. 2.53

b in μέν... τε construction. [ τὸ μὲν ὅτι ὅτι τε v. 5. a. infra P. 2.31] [dub. N. 11.46]
ἕλκεα ῥῆξαν τὰ μὲν ἀμφ' Ἀχιλεῖ νεοκτόνῳ, ἄλλων τε μόχθων ἐν πολυφθόροις ἁμέραις N. 8.30
τὸ μὲν ἔλευσεν· ἴδον τ' ἄποπτα[ (τό = Medusa's head, Lobel: fort. adv.) *d. 4. 39.

g in μέν... ἀτάρ construction.
οἱ μὲν κρίθεν· ἀτὰρ Ἰάσων P. 4.168

c with δέ only

I in μέν... δέ construction.
παρὰ μὲν τιμίοις θεῶν οἵτινες ἔχαιρον εὐορκίαις ἄδακρυν νέμονται αἰῶνα, τοὶ δ' ἀπροσόρατον ὀκχέοντι πόνον O. 2.67

αἵ γε μὲν ἀνδρῶν πόλλ' ἄνω, τὰ δ αὖ κάτω κυλίνδοντ ἐλπίδες O. 12.6

πολλὰ δ' ἀνθρώποις παρὰ γνώμαν ἔπεσεν, ἔμπαλιν μὲν τέρψιος, οἱ δ ἀνιαραῖς ἀντικύρσαντες ζάλαις O. 12.11

πολλοῖσι μὲν γὰρ. τὰ δὲ καὶ ἀνδράσιν ἐμπρέπει P. 8.28

θάνεν μὲν αὐτὸς ἥρως Ἀτρείδας, ὁ δ' ἄρα γέροντα ξένον Στροφίον ἐξίκετο P. 11.34

πολλὰ μὲν γὰρ ἐν κονίᾳ χέρσῳ, τὰ δὲ γείτονι πόντῳ φάσομαι N. 9.43
ὃς μὲν ἀχρήμων, ἀφνεὸς τότε, τοὶ δ' αὖ πλουτέοντες fr. 124. 8. ἄλλαν μὲν σκέλος, ἄλλαν δὲ πᾶχ[υν], τὰν δὲ αὐχένα φέροισαν fr. 169. 31. ἀελλοπόδων μέν τιν' εὐφραίνοισιν ἵππων τιμαὶ καὶ στέφανοι, τοὺς δ ἐν πολυχρύσοις θαλάμοις βιοτά fr. 221. 3.

II
ὁ δέ... ὁ δέ. ἀφίκοντο δέ οἱ ξένοι ἔκ τ Ἄργεος ἔκ τε Θηβᾶν, οἱ δ Ἄρκαδες, οἱ δὲ καὶ Πισᾶται O. 9.67
—8.

III
ἄλλος δέ... ὁ δέ. ἄλλαι δὲ δὔἐν Κορίνθου πύλαις ἐγένοντ ἔπειτα χάρμαι, ταὶ δὲ καὶ Νεμέας Ἐφαρμόστῳ κατὰ κόλπον O. 9.87

IV where a μέν antithesis is suppressed.
διασωπάσομαι οἱ μόρον ἐγώ· τὸν δ' ἐν Οὐλύμπῳ φάτναι Ζηνὸς ἀρχαῖαι δέκονται O. 13.92
ὁπόθ' Ἁρμονίαν γᾶμεν βοῶπιν, ὁ δὲ Νηρέος εὐβούλου Θέτιν παῖδα κλυτάν ( ὁ μὲν Κάδμος suppressed) P. 3.92
Νεστόρειον γὰρ ἵππος ἅρμ' ἐπέδα. ὁ δ ἔφεπεν κραταιὸν ἔγχος P. 6.33

νέᾳ δ' εὐπραγίᾳ χαίρω τι· τὸ δ ἄχνυμαι, φθόνον ἀμειβόμενον τὰ καλὰ ἔργα P. 7.18

Ἀγρέα καὶ Νόμιον, τοῖς δ' Ἀρισταῖον καλεῖν P. 9.65
πολλὰ γάρ μιν παντὶ θυμῷ παρφαμένα λιτάνευεν. τοῖο δ' ὀργὰν κνίζον αἰπεινοὶ λόγοι (Hermann: τοῦ δὲ codd.: τοῖο refers to μιν) N. 5.32
αὐτίκα γὰρ ἦλθε Λήδας παῖς διώκων. τοὶ δ' ἐναντίον στάθεν N. 10.66

ἄραντο γὰρ νίκας ἀπὸ παγκρατίου τρεῖς ἀπ' Ἰσθμοῦ, τὰς δ ἀπ εὐφύλλου Νεμέας I. 6.61
ἐλάφῳ· τὰν δ' ἐπ αὐχένι στρέφοισαν κάρα *fr. 107a. 6*. irregularly coordinated with rel., νίκαις, αἷς ἐν ἀιόνεσσιν Ὀγχη[στοῦ κλυ]τᾶς ταῖς δὲ ναὸν Ἰτωνίας α[ ]α χαίταν στεφάνοις ἐκόσμηθεν Παρθ. 2. 47. esp. after a speech, cf. Führer, Formproblem, 41—4,
ὣς ἄρα μάνυε· τοὶ δ' οὔτ ὦν ἀκοῦσαι O. 6.52
τὸν δὲ θαρσήσαις ἀγανοῖσι λόγοις ὧδ' ἀμείφθη ( ὣς μὲν ἔφα suppressed) P. 4.101
τὸν δὲ Κένταυρος ζαμενὴς εὐθὺς ἀμείβετο P. 9.38

τὸ δ' ἐναντίον ἔσκεν N. 5.31

ὣς φάτο· τοὶ δ' ἐπὶ γλεφάροις νεῦσαν ἀθανάτοισιν I. 8.45

d followed by progressive μέν, emphasising esp. subject of preceding sentence.
τῷ μὲν ειλτ;γτ;πε O. 1.73

τὸν μὲν ἀγάλλων θεὸς ἔδωκεν O. 1.86

τᾷ μὲν ὁ Χρυσοκόμας πραύμητίν τ' Ἐλείθυιαν παρέστασ O. 6.41

τὸν μὲν κνιζομένα λεῖπε χαμαί O. 6.44

τῷ μὲν ὁ Χρυσοκόμας πλόον εἶπε O. 7.32

τοῖσι μὲν ἐξεύχετ O. 13.60

τῷ μὲν διδύμας χάριτας εἰ κατέβαν ἄγων P. 3.72
ἓν παρ' ἐσλὸν πήματα σύνδυο δαίονται βροτοῖς ἀθάνατοι. τὰ μὲν ὦν οὐ δύνανται νήπιοι κόσμῳ φέρειν (but perhaps τά refers to the general distribution of good and ill) P. 3.82 “φῶτα. τὸν μὲν Φοῖβος ἀμνάσει” P. 4.53
ὣς φάτο· τὸν μὲν ἐσελθόντ' ἔγνον ὀφθαλμοὶ πατρός P. 4.120
“ἀλλὰ καὶ σκᾶπτον μόναρχον καὶ θρόνος, τὰ μὲν ἄνευ ξυνᾶς ἀνίας λῦσον” P. 4.154 τῶν μὲν κλέος ἐσλὸν Εὐφάμου τ' ἐκράνθη σόν τε, Περικλύμεν” P. 4.174
Κυράναν. ἁ μὲν οὔθ' ἱστῶν παλιμβάμους ἐφίλησεν ὁδούς P. 9.18
ὁ μέν που τεοῖς τε μήδεσι τοῦτ' ἔπραξεν, τὸ δὲ συγγενὲς ἐμβέβακεν ἴχνεσιν πατρὸς (Tricl.: τεοῖσί τε codd.: τε del. Calliergus sec. Σ: ὁ refers to αὐτόν v. 8: perhaps ὁ μέν τὸ δέ is the correct antithesis) P. 10.11 τῷ μὲν Ἀλεκτρᾶν ὕπερθεν δαῖτα
πορσύνοντες αὔξομεν I. 4.61

τὸν μὲν κελήσατο νεκταρέαις σπονδαῖσιν ἄρξαι καρτεραίχμαν Ἀμφιτρυωνιάδαν I. 6.37

τοῦ μὲν ἀντίθεοι ἀρίστευον υἱέες I. 8.24

τὸν μὲν οὐδὲ θανόντ' ἀοιδαὶ ἔλιπον I. 8.56

τὸν μὲν οὐ κατελέγχει κριτοῦ γενεὰ πατραδελφεοῦ I. 8.65
adv. τὰ μέν, v. P. 11.46, N. 3.43, 5. b infra.

e followed by progressive δέ, emphasising some previous word(s) not normally subject of the preceding sentence.
Εὐρυτρίαιναν· ὁ δ' αὐτῷ πὰρ ποδὶ σχεδὸν φάνη O. 1.73

ἐπί οἱ νεφέλαν ἀγκύλῳ κρατὶ κατέχευας· ὁ δὲ κνώσσων ὑγρὸν νῶτον αἰωρεῖ P. 1.8
( θεραπόντεσσιν.) “ τῶν δ' ἐλάθοντο φρένες” P. 4.41 ( συγγενέσιν.)
οἱ δ' ἐπέσποντ P. 4.133
τῶν δ' ἀκούσαις αὐτὸς ὑπαντίασεν (where τῶν refers to the subject of the preceding sentence) P. 4.135 τὰ δ' οὐκ ἐπ ἀνδράσι κεῖται (where τά refers to ἐσλά v. 73) P. 8.76
ὁ δὲ τὰν εὐώλενον θρέψατο παῖδα Κυράναν P. 9.17
( ὥραισι καὶ Γαίᾳ.)
ταὶ δ' νέκταρ ἐν χείλεσσιν καὶ ἀμβροσίαν στάξοισι P. 9.62
ἢ ἑτέρῳ λέχει δαμαζομέναν ἔννυχοι πάραγον κοῖται; τὸ δὲ νέαις ἀλόχοις ἔχθιστον ἀμπλάκιον (τὸ = τοῦτο, summing up the previous sentence) P. 11.25 ( Τειρεσίαν.)
ὁ δέ οἱ φράζε καὶ παντὶ στρατῷ N. 1.61
( Μοισᾶν.)
αἱ δὲ πρώτιστον μὲν ὕμνησαν N. 5.25
( Νεοπτόλεμος.)
ὁ δ' ἀποπλέων Σκύρου μὲν ἅμαρτε N. 7.36
θρέψε δ' αἰχμὰν Ἀμφιτρύωνος. ὁ δ ὄλβῳ φέρτατος ἵκετ ἐς κείνου γενεάν (ὁ is referred variously to Zeus and Amphitryon) N. 10.13 ἄνδωκε δ' αὐτῷ Τελαμών, ὀ δ ἀνατείναις οὐρανῷ χεῖρας ἀμάχους αὔδασε (ὁ refers to αὐτῷ) I. 6.41 ( Θέμιν.) ἁ δὲ τίκτεν ἀλαθέας ὥρας (but perhaps δὲ balances μέν v. 1) fr. 30. 6. ὁ δὲ κηλεῖται Δ. 2. 21. ἁ δ' ἔργμασι[ Παρθ. 2.. ὁ δ ἄφ[αρ π]λεκτόν τε χαλκὸν ὑπερη[ (i. e. ?Herakles, who is the subject of the verb in v. 21) fr. 169. 26. τοὶ δ' αὐτ[ ?fr. 338. 9.

f exx. with μέν... δέ, where the connection is obscured by lacuna. τοὶ δ' ἐπίμπλαν ἐσσύμενοι πίθους (? μέν suppressed) *fr. 104b. 3* δελφῖνος, τὸν μὲν ἀκύμονος ἐν πόντου πελάγει αὐλῶν ἐκίνησ' ἐρατὸν μέλος (?rel.) fr. 140b. 16. οἱ μὲν κατωκάρα δεσμοῖσι δέδενται fr. 161.

g combined with γάρ. ( παισὶ Λήδας.)
τοῖς γὰρ ἐπέτραπεν Οὔλυμπόνδ' ἰὼν θαητὸν ἀγῶνα νέμειν O. 3.36
( Κόρινθον.)
ἐν τᾷ γὰρ Εὐνομία ναίει O. 13.6
( Κάστορος.)
τὸν γὰρ Ἴδας ἔτρωσεν N. 10.60
αἰῶνος εἴδωλον (nom.). τὸ γάρ ἐστι ἐκ θεῶν fr. 131b. 2.

h combined with καί. εὐναὶ δὲ παράτροποι ἐς κακότατ' ἀθρόαν ἔβαλον· ποτὶ καὶ τὸν ἵκοντ ( ποτὶ τὸν καὶ coni. Mommsen) P. 2.36 esp. with general reference to preceding, τὸ καὶ ἀνδρὶ κώμου δεσπότᾳ πάρεστι Συρακοσίῳ (i. e. τὸ ἐπὶ Ἀμφιαράου ῥηθέν Σ.) O. 6.17
ἰατὰ δ' ἐστὶ βροτοῖς σύν γ ἐλευθερίᾳ καὶ τά I. 8.15

ἔδοξ' ἦρα καὶ ἀθανάτοις, ἐσλόν γε φῶτα καὶ φθίμενον ὕμνοις θεᾶν διδόμεν. τὸ καὶ νῦν φέρει λόγον I. 8.61
cf. O. 6.56

i combined with
καί... γάρ. καὶ τοὶ γὰρ αἰθοίσας ἔχοντες σπέρμ' ἀνέβαν φλογὸς οὔ O. 7.48

j followed by
γε. περὶ δὲ πάξαις Ἄλτιν μὲν ὅγ' ἐν καθαρῷ διέκρινε O. 10.45

τὸν δὲ τετράκναμον ἔπραξε δεσμὸν ἑὸν ὄλεθρον ὅγ P. 2.41
[ τό γ' ἐπαρκέσαι (codd.: ὅ, τέ, σέ coni. edd.) N. 6.60]

k followed by ῥα. ( βάρβιτος). τόν ῥα Τέρπανδρός ποθ' ὁ Λέσβιος εὗρεν πρῶτος fr. 125. 1.

2 without particle.
Πηλεύς τε καὶ Κάδμος ἐν τοῖσιν ἀλέγονται O. 2.78

τὰν μεθέπων ἴδε καὶ κείναν χθόνα O. 3.31

ἐθελήσω τοῖσιν ἐξ ἀρχᾶς ἀπὸ Τλαπολέμου ξυνὸν ἀγγέλλων διορθῶσαι λόγον O. 7.20

ἀέθλοις. τῶν ἄνθεσι Διαγόρας ἐστεφανώσατο δίς O. 7.80

τοὺς ἀγαγὼν ζεύγλᾳ πέλασσεν μοῦνος P. 4.227

Διὸς ἀγῶνι. τόν, ὦ πολῖται, κωμάξατε Τιμοδήμῳ σὺν εὐκλέι νόστῳ N. 2.24
τὸν ἐθάμβεον Ἄρτεμίς τε καὶ θρασεἶ Ἀθάνα ( τόν = Jason, subj. of preceding sentence) N. 3.50 ( ῥῆμα.) τό μοι θέμεν —
ὕμνου προκώμιον εἴη N. 4.9
ἐλᾷ δὲ καὶ τέσσαρας ἀρετὰς ὁ θνατὸς αἰών, φρονεῖν δ' ἐνέπει τὸ παρκείμενον. τῶν οὐκ ἄπεσσι ( τῶν is referred by Σ, edd. to ἀρετάς, but should be considered as neuter) N. 3.76 Τηλεβόας ἔναρεν· τῷ ὄψιν ἐειδόμενος ἀθανάτων βασιλεὺς αὐλὰν ἐσῆλθεν (Mingarelli: ἔνα（ι）ρε（ν）· τί οἱ codd.: τῷ = Amphitryon) N. 10.15
οὐ γὰρ ἦν πενταέθλιον, ἀλλ' ἐφ ἑκάστῳ ἔργματι κεῖτο τέλος. τῶν ἀθρόοις ἀνδησάμενοι θαμάκις ἔρνεσιν χαίταις ῥεέθροισί τε Δίρκας ἔφανεν I. 1.28

λέγε, τίνες Κύκνον, τίνες Ἕκτορα πέφνον ; τοῖσιν Αἴγιναν προφέρει στόμα πάτραν I. 5.43
( νιν).
τὸν αἰνεῖν ἀγαθῷ παρέχει I. 8.69
( τοκεῦσιν.)
τοὶ σὺν πολέμῳ κτησάμενοι χθόνα πολύδωρον ὄλβον ἐγκατέθηκαν Pae. 2.59
πεφόρητο δ' ἐπ Αἰγαῖον θαμά (sc. Ἀστερία）· τᾶς ὁ κράτιστος ἐράσσατο. (ἇς = ἕως coni. G-H.) Πα. 7B. 50. ( Ἀφροδίτας.) ἀλλ' ἐγὼ τᾶς ἕκατι τάκομαι (Wil.: τᾶσδ Hermann: δεκατιτας codd.) fr. 123. 10. τοῖσι λάμπει μὲν μένος ἀελίου Θρ. 7. 1. with crasis, τοὔνεκα προῆκαν υἱὸν ἀθάνατοί οἱ πάλιν therefore O. 1.65

3 prospective, referring to a following rel. cl.
μῶμος ἐξ ἄλλων κρέμαται φθονεόντων τοῖς, οἷς ποτε O. 6.75

ὁ δ' ὄλβιος, ὃν φᾶμαι κατέχωντ ἀγαθαί O. 7.10

τοὺς μὲν ὦν, ὅσσοι μόλον, λύσαις ἄλλον ἀλλοίων ἀχέων ἔξαγεν P. 3.47
cf. P. 7.18 λόγον φέρεις, τὸν ὅνπερ ποτ' Ὀικλέος παῖς ἐν ἑπταπύλοις ἰδὼν υἱοὺς Θήβαις αἰνίξατο (cf. C. 6. infra) P. 8.39

4 τὰ καὶ τά, simm. ὁ μὰν πλοῦτος ἀρεταῖς δεδαιδαλμένος φέρει τῶν τε καὶ τῶν καιρὸν (τά τε ἀγαθὰ καὶ τὰ κακά Σ.) O. 2.53 ὁ Βάττου δ' ἕπεται παλαιὸς ὄλβος ἔμπαν τὰ καὶ τὰ νέμων ( τουτέστι τὰ ἀγαθὰ καὶ τὰ κακά Σ, but perhaps varied blessings is meant) P. 5.55 φαντί γε μὰν οὕτω κ' ἀνδρὶ παρμονίμαν θάλλοισαν εὐδαιμονίαν τὰ καὶ τὰ φέρεσθαι (ἀντὶ τοῦ ἀγαθὰ καὶ κακά Σ.) P. 7.22 σέο δ' ἀμφὶ τρόπῳ τῶν τε καὶ τῶν χρήσιες ( καὶ λόγων καὶ ἔργων Σ.) N. 1.30 ἔστιν δ' ἀφάνεια τύχας καὶ μαρναμένων, πρὶν τέλος ἄκρον ἱκέσθαι. τῶν τε γὰρ καὶ τῶν διδοῖ (ἄλλα γὰρ ἄλλοις ἡ τύχη δίδωσι Σ.) I. 4.33 Ζεὺς τά τε καὶ τὰ νέμει (καὶ τὰ ἀγαθὰ καὶ τὰ φαῦλα Σ.) I. 5.52
ὁ πάντα τοι τά τε καὶ τὰ τεύχων σόν ἐγγυάλιξεν ὄλβον εὐρύοπα Κρόνου παῖς Pae. 6.132

5 adverbial usages.

a τό. ἴων ἀκτῖσι βεβρεγμένος ἁβρὸν σῶμα· τὸ καὶ κατεφάμιξε καλεῖσθαί νιν χρόνῳ σύμπαντι μάτηρ τοῦτ' ὄνυμ ἀθάνατον wherefore O. 6.56 τὸ μὲν γὰρ πατρόθεν ἐκ Διὸς εὔχονται. τὸ δ' Ἀμυντορίδαι ματρόθεν Ἀστυδαμείας on the one side... on the other O. 7.23
αἱ δύο δ' ἀμπλακίαι φερέπονοι τελέθοντι· τὸ μὲν ἥρως ὅτι, ὅτι τε P. 2.31
τὸ μὲν, ὅτι βασιλεὺς ἐσσί. μάκαρ δὲ καὶ νῦν, ὅτι in the first place P. 5.15 τό σφ' ἔχει κυπαρίσσινον μέλαθρον ἀμφ ἀνδριάντι σχεδόν ( wherefore: others interpret τό as rel.) P. 5.39 υἱοὶ θεῶν, τὸ μὲν παρ' ἆμαρ ἕδραισι Θεράπνας, τὸ δ οἰκέοντας ἔνδον Ὀλύμπου at one time... at another P. 11.63—4.
ὡς τὸ μὲν οὐδέν, ὁ δὲ χάλκεος ἀσφαλὲς αἰὲν ἕδος μένει οὐρανός N. 6.3
[ τὸ μὲν. v. B. 1. b. β, Δ.. 3.] τὸ δὲ κοι[ Θρ. 3. 4.

b τά. τὰ δὲ Παρρασίῳ στρατῷ θαυμαστὸς ἐὼν φάνη then again O. 9.95 τὰ δὲ καί ποτ' ἐν ἀλκᾷ πρὸ Δαρδάνου τειχέων ἐδόκησαν then again O. 13.55 ὅθεν φαμὶ καὶ σὲ τὰν ἀπείρονα δόξαν εὑρεῖν τὰ μὲν ἐν ἱπποσόαισιν ἄνδρεσσι μαρνάμενον, τὰ δ' ἐν πεζομάχαισι sometimes... sometimes P. 2.65 τὰ δὲ καὶ ἀνδράσιν ἐμπρέπει then again P. 8.28 τὰ μὲν ἐν ἅρμασι καλλίνικοι πάλαι on the one hand i. e. as opp. to their exploits in athletics P. 11.46 Ἀχιλεὺς τὰ μὲν μένων Φιλύρας ἐν δόμοις at first N. 3.43 ἐν βάσσαισιν Ἰσθμοῦ δεξαμένῳ στεφάνους, τὰ δὲ κοίλᾳ λέοντος ἐν βαθυστέρνου νάπᾳ κάρυξε Θήβαν ἱπποδρομίᾳ κρατέων ( and further, μὲν being suppressed) I. 2.11

c τῶ, v. τῶ.

6 fragg.
τοὶ τα[ Pae. 6.70

ὁ δ' ἀντίον ἀνὰ κάρα τ ἄειρ[ε Pae. 20.10
ὁ δ ἐπραυν[ε fr. 215b. 4. οἱ δ' ἄφνει πεποίθασιν ( ὁ δ' πέποιθεν v. l.) fr. 219. C articular. (ὁ, τοῦ, τόν, οἱ, τῶν; ἁ, τᾶς, τᾷ, τάν, αἱ, ταί, τᾶν, ταῖς, τάς; τό nom., acc.; τά, τῶν, τά: in crasis O. 1.45, O. 13.38, N. 7.104; O. 10.70, I. 2.10)

1 c. subs. prop.

a
τᾶν Ὀλυμπιάδων O. 1.94

ἅ τε Πίσα O. 3.9

τᾶν κλεινᾶν Συρακοσσᾶν O. 6.6

ὁ Χρυσοκόμας O. 6.41
, O. 7.32
ὅ τ' ἐξελέγχων μόνος ἀλάθειαν ἐτήτυμον Χρόνος O. 10.53

τὰν ὀλβίαν Κόρινθον O. 13.4

τὰν πατρὸς ἀντία Μήδειαν θεμέναν γάμον αὐτᾷ O. 13.53

τᾶς ὀφιώδεος υἱόν ποτε Γοργόνος O. 13.64

ὁ καρτερὸς Βελλεροφόντας O. 13.84

ἅ τ' Ἐλευσίς, ἅ τ Εὔβοια O. 13.110

ἁ Μινύεια O. 14.19

τᾶν λιπαρᾶν ἀπὸ Θηβᾶν P. 2.3

ὅ τ' ἐναγώνιος Ἑρμᾶς P. 2.10

ὁ χρυσοχαῖτα Ἀπόλλων P. 2.16

τὸ Καστόρειον P. 2.69

ὁ δὲ Ῥαδάμανθυς P. 2.73

ἅ τε Πυθώ P. 4.66
τὸν μὲν Ἐχίονα τὸν δ' Ἔρυτον (contra Des Places, 44) P. 4.179
τᾶς εὐδαίμονος ἀμφὶ Κυράνας P. 4.276

αἱ μεγαλοπόλιες Ἀθᾶναι P. 7.1

ὁ χαιτάεις Λατοίδας P. 9.5

τὸ Πελινναῖον ἀπύει P. 10.4

τὸν Ἱπποκλέαν P. 10.57

τὸν Ἰφικλείδαν Ἰόλαον P. 11.59

ταῖς μεγάλαις Ἀθάναις N. 2.8

ἁ Σαλαμίς γε N. 2.13

τὸν μέγαν πολεμιστὰν Ἀλκυονῆ N. 4.27

ἁ Νεμέα μὲν ἄραρεν N. 5.44

διὰ τὸν ἁδυεπῆ γενέσθ' Ὅμηρον N. 7.21

ὁ καρτερὸς Αἴας N. 7.26

τὰν νεοκτίσταν ἐς Αἴτναν N. 9.2

ἐκ τᾶς ἱερᾶς Σικυῶνος N. 9.53

ὁ Τυνδαρίδας N. 10.73

τὸν ἀκερσεκόμαν Φοῖβον I. 1.7

ἁ Μοῖσα γὰρ I. 2.6

ταῖς λιπαραῖς ἐν Ἀθάναις I. 2.20

τὰν πυροφόρον Λιβύαν I. 4.54
τὰν κυανάμπυκα Θήβαν fr. 29. 3. ἁ Κοιογενὴς fr. 33d. 3.
ὁ παντελὴς Ἐνιαυτὸς Pae. 1.5

ἀλλ' ὅ γε Μέλαμπος Pae. 6.28

ἐς τὸν βαθὺν Τάρταρον Pae. 4.44

ὁ πόντιος Ὀρσιτρίαινα Pae. 9.47
ἐν ταῖς ἱεραῖς Ἀθάναις fr. 75. 4. ὦ ταὶ λιπαραὶ καὶ ἰοστέφανοι καὶ ἀοίδιμοι, Ἑλλάδος ἔρεισμα, κλειναὶ Ἀθᾶναι fr. 76. 1. τὰν λιπαρὰν μὲν Αἴγυπτον ἀγχίκρημνον fr. 82. ὁ [Λοξ]ίας Παρθ. 2. 3. ὁ Μοισαγέτας με καλεῖ χορεῦσαι Ἀπόλλων fr. 94c. 1. ἀπὸ τᾶς ἀγλαοκάρπου Σικελίας ( τᾶς del. Schr.) fr. 106. 6. τῶ[ν..Λο]κρῶν τις (supp. Wil.) fr. 140b. 4.

b c. subs., in apposition to subs. prop.
Χρόνος, ὁ πάντων πατήρ O. 2.17

Μήδειαν τὰν Πελίαο φονόν P. 4.250

Ζεὺς ὁ θεῶν σκοπὸς Pae. 6.94

Νηρεὺς δ' ὁ γέρων Pae. 15.4
Νόμος ὁ πάντων βασιλεύς fr. 169. 1.

c c. gen., sc.
υἱός. τὸν Αἰνησιδάμου O. 2.46
Σᾶμος ὁ Ἁλιροθίου (Boeckh: om. codd.) O. 10.70
βία Φώκου κρέοντος, ὁ τᾶς θεοῦ N. 5.13

d c. gen., in apposition.
πόσις ὁ πάντων Ῥέας ὑπέρτατον ἐχοίσας θρόνον O. 2.77

παῖς ὁ Λατοῦς O. 8.31

παῖς ὁ Λικυμνίου Οἰωνός O. 10.65

παῖς ὁ Θεαρίωνος Σωγένης N. 7.7

2 c. subs.

a
ὁ δὲ χρυσὸς O. 1.1

τὸ δὲ κλέος O. 1.93

ὁ μὰν πλοῦτος O. 2.53

τῶν δὲ μόχθων O. 8.7

ὁ δὲ λόγος P. 1.35

τὸν εὐεργέταν P. 2.24

ἁ δ' ἀρετὰ P. 3.114

ὁ γὰρ καιρὸς P. 4.286

ὁ πλοῦτος P. 5.1

τὸν εὐεργέταν P. 5.44

ὁ χρυσὸς N. 4.82

τᾶς θεοῦ N. 5.13
εἰ γὰρ ἦν ἓ τὰν ἀλάθειαν ἰδέμεν (Boeckh: ἑὰν, ἐὰν codd., Σ.) N. 7.25
ὁ μάρτυς N. 7.49

ἁ κέλευθος I. 2.33

ὁ κινητὴρ δὲ γᾶς I. 4.19

τίς ὁ ῥυθμὸς ἐφαίνετο; Pae. 8.67
τὰν παῖδα δε[ Πα. 22.i. 2. ἕρπε τὸ σὰν κίβδηλον Δ. 2. 2. τὸ δ' ὄργανον (acc.) *fr. 107b. 2* Διὸς παῖς ὁ χρυσός fr. 222. 1. ἁ μὲν πόλις Αἰακιδᾶν fr. 242.

b with intervening adj.
ὁ πολύφατος ὕμνος O. 1.8

ὁ μέγας δὲ κίνδυνος O. 1.81

τὸν ἀλαθῆ λόγον O. 1.28

τὸν εὐνομώτατον ἐς ἔρανον O. 1.37

τὸ δ' αἰεὶ παράμερον ἐσλὸν O. 1.99

τὸν ὅλον ἀμφὶ χρόνον O. 2.30

τὸν εὔφρονα πότμον O. 2.36

τὰν σὰν πόλιν O. 5.4

τὰν νέοικον ἕδραν O. 5.8

τὰν ποντίαν ὑμνέων παῖδ' Ἀφροδίτας O. 7.13

ὁ δ' ἐπαντέλλων χρόνος O. 8.28

ὁ μέλλων χρόνος O. 10.7

τὸν ἐγκώμιον ἀμφὶ τρόπον O. 10.77

τὸ συγγενὲς ἦθος O. 13.13

τὰ πολλὰ βέλεα O. 13.95
τὸν αἰχματὰν
κεραυνὸν P. 1.5

ὁ πᾶς χρόνος P. 1.46

τὸν προσέρποντα χρόνον P. 1.56

ὁ Φοίνιξ ὁ Τυρσανῶν τ' ἀλαλατὸς P. 1.72

τὰν εὔυδρον ἀκτὰν P. 1.79

αἱ δύο δ' ἀμπλακίαι P. 2.30

τὸν δὲ τετράκναμον δεσμὸν P. 2.40

τὰν πολύκοινον ἀγγελίαν P. 2.41

τὰν ἀπείρονα δόξαν P. 2.64

ὁ λάβρος στρατός P. 2.87

τὰν δ' ἔμπρακτον ἄντλει μαχανάν P. 3.62

ὁ μέγας πότμος P. 3.86
τὸ πάγχρυσον νάκος acc. P. 4.68
τὸν δὲ παμπειθῆ γλυκὺν πόθον P. 4.184

τὰν ἀκίνδυνον αἰῶνα P. 4.186
τὸ κλεεννότατον μέγαρον (nom.) P. 4.280
τὰν θεόσδοτον δύναμιν P. 5.13

αὐτοῦ μένων δ' ὁ θεῖος ἀνὴρ P. 6.38

τὰ καλὰ ἔργα P. 7.19

ὁ Παρνάσσιος μυχὸς P. 10.8

ὁ χάλκεος οὐρανὸς P. 10.27
τό τ' ἀναγκαῖον λέχος acc. P. 12.15 [ τὸν ἐχθρότατον μόρον codd. N. 1.65]
τὸν ἅπαντα χρόνον N. 1.69
ὁ θνατὸς αἰών (ὁ om. codd.: supp. Tricl.) N. 3.75
αἱ δὲ σοφαὶ Μοισᾶν θύγατρες N. 4.2

τῶν ἀγαθῶν ἐργμάτων N. 4.83

Μοισᾶν ὁ κάλλιστος χορός N. 5.23

τὰ καλά σφιν ἔργ' ἐκόμισαν N. 6.30

ταὶ μεγάλαι γὰρ ἀλκαὶ N. 7.12
τὰ τέρπν' ἄνθἐ Ἀφροδίσια acc. N. 7.53
τῶν ἀρειόνων ἐρώτων N. 8.5

τὸ κρατήσιππον γὰρ ἐς ἅρμ' ἀναβαίνων N. 9.4

τὰν βαθύστερνον χθόνα N. 9.25

Ἥρας τὸν εὐάνορα λαὸν N. 10.36
τὸ θαητὸν δέμας acc. N. 11.12
τὸν μόρσιμον αἰῶνα I. 7.41
τὸ πάντολμον σθένος acc. fr. 29. 4.
τὸν εὐρυφαρέτραν ἑκαβόλον Pae. 6.111

τὰν θεμίξενον ἀρετάν Pae. 6.131
ὁ παγκρατὴς κεραυνὸς Δ. 2. 1. τᾶν τ' ἐαριδρόπων ἀοιδᾶν fr. 75. 6. ἐπὶ τὸν κισσοδαῆ θεόν ( τὸν om. unus cod., fort. recte) fr. 75. 9. τὸν ἱρόθυτον θάνατον (verba secl. Sternbach) fr. 78. 3. τὸ σὸν αὐτοῦ μέλι γλάζεις (Wil.: τὸ σαυτου, τὸ σαυτα μέλος codd.) fr. 97. τὸ φαιδρὸν φάος acc. fr. 109. 2. τᾶς χλωρᾶς λιβάνου (Tittmann: τὰν, τὰς codd.) fr. 122. 3. τὸν λοιπὸν χρόνον fr. 133. 5. ταῖς ἱεραῖσι μελίσσαις fr. 158. τὸν ἀχρεῖον λόγον fr. 180. 1. ὁ κρατιστεύων λόγος fr. 180. 3.

c with intervening phrase, e. g. gen.
μετὰ τὸ ταχύποτμον ἀνέρων ἔθνος O. 1.66

μνᾶμα τῶν Οὐλυμπίᾳ κάλλιστον ἀέθλων O. 3.15
“ παρὰ τὸν ἁλικίας ἐοικότα χρόνον” O. 4.27
αἱ δὲ φρενῶν ταραχαὶ O. 7.30

ὀξειᾶν ὁ γενέθλιος ἀκτίνων πατὴρ O. 7.70

ὅ τ' ἐν Ἄργει χαλκὸς ἔγνω μιν O. 7.83
[ τὰν δ' ἔπειτ ἀνδρῶν μάχαν (codd.: μάχας Schr.) O. 8.58]
τὸ μὲν Ἀρχιλόχου μέλος O. 9.1

τὸν Ὀλυμπιονίκαν Ἀρχεστράτου παῖδα O. 10.1

ὁ δ' ἄῤ ἐν Πίσᾳ ἔλσαις ὅλον τε στρατὸν λᾴαν τε πᾶσαν Διὸς ἄλκιμος υἱὸς O. 10.43

τὸ δὲ κύκλῳ πέδον O. 10.46

τὰν πολέμοιο δόσιν O. 10.56

τὰν παρ' ὅρκον καὶ παρὰ ἐλπίδα κτίσιν O. 13.83

ταί θ' ὑπ Αἴτνας ὑψιλόφου καλλίπλουτοι πόλιες O. 13.111

ταί θ' ὑπὲρ Κύμας ἁλιερκέες ὄχθαι P. 1.18

τὰν Φιλοκτήταο δίκαν P. 1.50

ὁ Φοίνιξ ὁ Τυρσανῶν τ' ἀλαλατὸς P. 1.72
τᾶν πρὸ Κιθαιρῶνος μαχᾶν (Wil.: τὰν μάχαν codd.) P. 1.77
τὸν δὲ ταύρῳ χαλκέῳ καυτῆρα νηλέα νόον Φάλαριν P. 1.95

τὸν δ' ἀμφέποντ αἰεὶ δαίμον P. 3.108

τὸ Μηδείας ἔπος P. 4.9
“ τᾶν ἐν δυνατῷ φιλοτάτων” P. 4.92
τὰν Οἰδιπόδα σοφίαν P. 4.263

οὐ τὰν Ἐπιμηθέος ἄγων ὀψινόου θυγατέρα Πρόφασιν P. 5.27

τὸ καλλίνικον λυτήριον δαπανᾶν μέλος χαρίεν P. 5.106

ἁ δικαιόπολις ἀρεταῖς κλειναῖσιν Αἰακιδᾶν θιγοῖσα νᾶσος P. 8.22

τὸν δὲ σύγκοιτον γλυκὺν παῦρον ἐπὶ γλεφάροις ὕπνον ἀναλίσκοισα P. 9.23

τᾷ Δαιδάλου δὲ μαχαίρᾳ N. 4.59

ὁ δὲ λοιπὸς εὔφρων ποτὶ χρόνος ἕρποι N. 7.67

τὸ δ' ἐμὸν οὔ ποτε φάσει κέαρ N. 7.102

οἵ τ' ἀνὰ Σπάρταν Πελοπηιάδαι N. 8.12

ταῖς Ἐπάφου παλάμαις N. 10.5

καὶ τὸν Ἰσθμοῖ καὶ Νεμέᾳ στέφανον N. 10.25
τὸ δὲ Πεισάνδρου πάλαι αἷμ acc. N. 9.33 τὸ τεόν, χρύσασπι Θήβα, πρᾶγμα acc. I. 1.1
τὰν ἁλιερκέα Ἰσθμοῦ δειράδ I. 1.9

τεύχων τὸ μὲν ἅρματι τεθρίππῳ γέρας. τὰν Ἀσωποδώρου πατρὸς αἶσαν I. 1.34

τὸν Μινύα τε μυχόν I. 1.56
τὸ Δάματρος κλυτὸν ἄλσος Ἐλευσῖνα acc. I. 1.57
Πρωτεσίλα, τὸ τεὸν δ' ἀνδρῶν Ἀχαιῶν ἐν Φυλάκᾳ τέμενος συμβάλλομαι I. 1.58

οἱ μὲν πάλαι, ὦ Θρασύβουλε, φῶτες I. 2.1
νῦν δ' ἐφίητι λτ;τὸγτ; τὠργείου φυλάξαι ῥῆμ (supp. Heyne: om. codd.) I. 2.9
τὸ δ' ἐμὸν οὐκ ἄτερ Αἰακιδᾶν κέαρ ὕμνων γεύεται I. 5.19

ὁ Κλεονίκου παῖς I. 6.16

καὶ τὸν βουβόταν οὔρει ἴσον Φλέγραισιν εὑρὼν Ἀλκυονῆ I. 6.32

τὸν Ἀργείων τρόπον I. 6.58

τὰν Ψαλυχιδᾶν τε πάτραν I. 6.63

τόν δὲ Θεμιστίου ὀρθώσαντες οἶκον I. 6.65

τίνι τῶν πάρος, ὦ μάκαιρα Θήβα, καλῶν ἐπιχωρίων I. 7.1

ὅ τοι πτερόεις ἔρριψε Πάγασος I. 7.44

τὸν ὑπὲρ κεφαλᾶς γε Ταντάλου λίθον I. 8.9
τὰν Ἀγαμήδει Τρεφωνίῳ θ' ἑκαταβόλου συμβουλίαν λαβών fr. 2. 2. τὰν Διωνύσου πολυγαθέα τιμὰν fr. 29. 5. ἄνακτα τὸν πάντων ὑπερβάλλοντα Χρόνον μακάρων fr. 33. τὸ μηδὲν ἄγαν ἔπος acc. fr. 35b. τὸν τρικάρανον Πτωίου κευθμῶνα κατέσχεθε fr. 51b.
τὰν δὲ λαῶν γενεὰν Pae. 1.9

[ὁ δ] ἐχθρὰ νοήσαις ἤδη φθόνος Pae. 2.54
τὸ δὲ οἴκοθεν ἄστυ nom. Πα.. 32. τὰ θεῶν βουλεύματ acc. fr. 61. 3. τὰς δὲ Θεοξένου ἀκτῖνας fr. 123. 2. τὰν ἐνθάδε νύκτα Θρ.. 2. τὸν ἄπειρον ἐρεύγονται σκότον fr. 130 ad Θρ.. τὸν ὕπερθεν ἅλιον fr. 133. 2. τὸν Ἰάσονος εὔδοξον πλόον fr. 172. 6. ταὶ δὲ Χίρωνος ἐντολαί (Hermann: αἱ codd.) fr. 177c. ὁ γὰρ ἐξ οἴκου ποτὶ μῶμον ἔπαινος κίρναται *fr. 181* ἁ Μειδύλου δ' αὐτῷ γενεά fr. 190.

d where a sentence or major part thereof intervenes between article and noun, so that the usage is almost demonstrative.
τῶν γὰρ πεπραγμένων ἔργων τέλος O. 2.15
ἅ μ' ἐθέλοντα προσέρπει ματρομάτωρ ἐμὰ (but v. A. 1. a supra) O. 6.83
τὸ γὰρ ἐμφυὲς ἦθος O. 11.19

αἵ γε μὲν ἀνδρῶν ἐλπίδες O. 12.5

ταὶ Διωνύσου χάριτες O. 13.18

ὁ δ' ἦρα χρόνῳ ἵκετ ἀνὴρ ἔκπαγλος P. 4.78
[ τάν ποτε Καλλίσταν ἀπῴκησαν χρόνῳ νᾶσον (Boeckh: ἂν codd.: ἔν Chaeris) P. 4.258]
ὁ Βάττου δ' ἕπεται παλαιὸς ὄλβος P. 5.55
τὸ δ' ἐμὸν γαρύει ἀπὸ Σπάρτας ἐπήρατον κλέος (v. γαρύω) P. 5.72
τὸ δ' ἐν ποσί μοι τράχον ἴτω τεὸν χρέος P. 8.32
“ φυᾷ τὸ γενναῖον ἐπιπρέπει ἐκ πατέρων παισὶ λῆμα” P. 8.44 “ ὁ δὲ καμὼν προτέρᾳ πάθᾳἌδραστος ἥρως” P. 8.48
ὁ δὲ τὰν εὐώλενον θρέψατο παῖδα Κυράναν P. 9.17

ἤτοι τό τε θεσπέσιον Φόρκοἰ ἀμαύρωσεν γένος P. 12.13

ὄφρα τὸν Εὐρυάλας γόον P. 12.20

τὰν πολυξέναν νᾶσον Αἴγιναν N. 3.2

ὁ δ' εὖ φράσθη Ζεὺς N. 5.34

ὁ δὲ χάλκεος οὐρανός N. 6.3

ὁ δ' Ζεὺς N. 9.24

ἐν ᾇ καὶ τὸν ἀδείμαντον Ἀλκμήνα τέκεν παῖδα I. 1.12
[cf.
τὸν μὲν κτἑ I. 6.37
]
ὁ δ' ἀθανάτων μὴ θρασσέτω φθόνος I. 7.39

τὸ δὲ πρὸ ποδὸς ἄρειον ἀεὶ βλέπειν χρῆμα πάν I. 8.12
ἁ δὲ τὰς τίκτεν ἀλαθέας ὥρας fr. 30. 6.
ὁ πάντα τοι τά τε καὶ τὰ τεύχων σὸν ἐγγυάλιξεν ὄλβον εὐρύοπα Κρόνου παῖς Pae. 6.132
τὸν ἀοιδότατον τρέφον κάλαμον fr. 70. 1. ὁ δὲ Καινεὺς Θρ. 6. 7. repeated, ὁ ζαμενὴς δ' ὁ χοροιτύπος ὃν Μαλέας ὄρος ἔθρεψε, Ναίδος ἀκοίτας Σιληνός fr. 156. cf.
πρὶν γενέσθαι τὰν Ἀδράστου τάν τε Καδμείων ἔριν N. 8.51

e in apposition, with phrase following.
στέφανων ἄωτον γλυκὺν τῶν Οὐλυμπίᾳ O. 5.2
ἐρέω ταύταν χάριν, τὰν δ' ἔπειτ ἀνδρῶν μάχας ἐκ παγκρατίου (Schr.: μάχαν codd.) O. 8.58
ὕβριν ἰδὼν τὰν πρὸ Κύμας P. 1.72

τῶν δ' Ὁμήρου καὶ τόδε συνθέμενος ῥῆμα πόρσυν P. 4.277

φροντίδα τὰν πὰρ ποδός P. 10.62

βοτάνα τέ νίν ποθ' ἁ λέοντος νικάσαντ ἤρεφε N. 6.42
παίδων τε παῖδες ἔχοιεν αἰεὶ γέρας τό περ νῦν καὶ ἄρειον ὄπιθεν (fort. rel.?) N. 7.101
κρέσσων δὲ καππαύει δίκαν τὰν πρόσθεν ἀνήρ N. 9.15
† ἱπποτρόφον ἄστυ τὸ Προίτοιο θάλησεν† N. 10.41

3 c. adj., part.

a adj.
ἅπαντα τὰ μείλιχα O. 1.30

τὸ δ' ἔσχατον O. 1.113

τὰ δ' ἐν τᾷδε Διὸς ἀρχᾷ ἀλιτρὰ O. 2.58

ἐς δὲ τὸ πὰν ἑρμανέων χατίζει O. 2.85

οἱ δύο O. 8.38

τὰ τέρπν O. 9.28

τὰ τοιαῦτ O. 9.40

τὸ δὲ σαφανὲς O. 10.55

τά τε τερπνὰ καὶ τὰ γλυκέα O. 14.5

οἱ σοφοὶ P. 2.88

τοῖς ἀγαθοῖς P. 2.96

τὰ καλὰ τρέψαντες ἔξω P. 3.83

τὸν μονοκρήπιδα P. 4.75

τοῖς ἀγαθοῖς P. 4.285

ὁ δ' ἀρχαγέτας ἔδωκ Ἀπόλλων P. 5.60
[ τὸ δ' ἐμὸν (v. γαρύω) P. 5.72] τὸ λοιπὸν (adv.) P. 5.118 τὸ μαλθακὸν acc. P. 8.6
τὸ μὲν μέγιστον τόθι χαρμάτων ὤπασας P. 8.64
τὸ τερπνὸν nom. P. 8.93
τὸν ἐχθρὸν P. 9.95
τὸ δὲ συγγενὲς nom. P. 10.12
τῶν δ' ἐν Ἑλλάδι τερπνῶν P. 10.19
τὰ μέγιστ acc. P. 10.24 Μοῖσα, τὸ δὲ τεόν nom. P. 11.41
τὰ μέσα P. 11.52

τὸ δὲ μόρσιμον οὐ παρφυκτὸν P. 12.30

τὸ γὰρ οἰκεῖον πιέζει N. 1.53

τὸ καλλίνικον N. 3.18

τὰ μακρὰ N. 4.33

τὸ μόρσιμον N. 4.61
, N. 7.44
τὸ συγγενὲς N. 6.8

τὸ τερπνὸν N. 7.74

τὸ μὲν λαμπρὸν τῶν δ' ἀφάντων N. 8.34

τὸ τὠργείου φυλάξαι ῥῆμ I. 2.9

τὸν ἐσλόν I. 2.7

τῶν ἀπειράτων I. 4.30

τὸν ἐχθρόν I. 4.48

τὸν φέρτατον θεῶν I. 7.5

τὰ μακρὰ I. 7.43

τὸ δὲ πὰρ δίκαν γλυκὺ I. 7.47

τὸ μὲν ἐμόν I. 8.38
ὁ κράτιστος Πα. 7B. 50.
τὸ πάντων ἔργων ἱερώτ[ατον] Pae. 8.74
τὸ δὲ μὴ Δὶ φίλτερον fr. 81 ad Δ. 2. τὸ κοινόν fr. 109. τὸ πάν fr. 140d. τὸ βιαιότατον fr. 169. 3.

b in apposition.
παῖς ὁ κισσοφόρος O. 2.27

ἄλσος ἁγνὸν τὸ τεὸν O. 5.12

θεῶν βασιλεὺς ὁ μέγας O. 7.34

καλλίνικος ὁ τριπλόος κεχλαδὼς O. 9.2

πλοῦτος ὁ λαχὼν ποιμένα O. 10.88

Χίρωνα τὸν ἀποιχόμενον P. 3.3

θύγατρες αἱ τρεῖς P. 3.97
“ Ζεὺς ὁ γενέθλιος ἀμφοτέροις” P. 4.167 καί τινα σὺν πλαγίῳ ἀνδρῶν κόρῳ στείχοντα τὸν ἐχθρότατον φᾶσέ νιν δώσειν μόρῳ (Boeckh: μόρον codd.: τῷ ἐχθροτάτῳ μόρῳ Beck: alii alia) N. 1.65
ὁ Τελαμωνιάδας N. 4.47

λόγον Αἰακοῦ παίδων τὸν ἅπαντα N. 4.72
[ προπάτωρ ὁ σὸς (codd.: ὁ del. Boeckh) N. 4.89] ὅμιλος ἀνδρῶν ὁ πλεῖστος N.7.24.
ὡς παισὶ κλέος μὴ τὸ δύσφαμον προσάψω N. 8.37

ζωᾶς ἄωτον τὸν ἄλπνιστον I. 5.12

κόμπον τὸν ἐοικότ I. 5.24

Ζεὺς ὁ πάντων κύριος I. 5.53

λόγον τὸν ἐθέλοντα γενέσθαι Pae. 2.79

Ἀπόλλων ὁ χρυσοκόμας Pae. 5.41
Τέρπανδρός ποθ' ὁ Λέσβιος fr. 125. 1. θεὸς ὁ πάντα τεύχων βροτοῖς fr. 141. ἐσθὰς δ' ἀμφοτέρα μιν ἔχεν, ἅ τε Μαγνήτων ἐπιχώριος ἁρμόζοισα θαητοῖσι γυίοις, ἀμφὶ δὲ (where the τε δέ connection is irregular) P. 4.80

c c. part.
ὁ νικῶν O. 1.97

τὸ μέλλον O. 2.56

σοφὸς ὁ πολλὰ εἰδὼς φυᾷ O. 2.86

ὁ δὲ πάλᾳ κυδαίνων Ἔχεμος Τεγέαν O. 10.66

τῶν δὲ μελλόντων O. 12.9

τά τ' ἐσσόμενα O. 13.103

τῶν ἀπεόντων P. 3.20

τὰ ἐοικότα P. 3.59

ὁ δὲ καλόν τι νέον λαχών P. 8.88

τό γ' ἐν ξυνῷ πεποναμένον εὖ P. 9.93

ὁ δὲ χαμηλὰ πνέων P. 11.30

τὸ παρκείμενον N. 3.75

λόγον ὁ μὴ συνιείς N. 4.31

τὸ δὲ πὰρ ποδὶ ναὸς ἑλισσόμενον αἰεὶ κυμάτων N. 6.55

ὁ πονήσαις δὲ νόῳ I. 1.40

τὸ σεσωπαμένον I. 1.63

τῶν τότ' ἐόντων I. 4.27
ὁ δ' ἐθέλων τε καὶ δυνάμενος ἁβρὰ πάσχειν fr. 2. 1. τιν' ἄνδρα τῶν θανόντων fr. 4. τῷ παρέοντι fr. 43. 4.
τῶν γὰρ ἀντομένων Pae. 2.42

τὸ δ' εὐβουλίᾳ τε καὶ αἰδοῖ ἐγκείμενον Pae. 2.52

ὁ δὲ καλόν τι πονήσαις Pae. 2.66

τά τ ἐόντα τε κα[ὶ ] πρόσθεν γεγενημένα Pae. 8.83
ὁ δὲ μηδὲν ἔχων Παρθ. 1.. τὸ πεπρωμένον fr. 232.

4 c. inf., pro subs.
τὸ δὲ τυχεῖν O. 2.51

τὸ λαλαγῆσαι O. 2.97

τὸ διδάξασθαι O. 8.59

τὸ μὴ προμαθεῖν O. 8.60

τό γε λοιδορῆσαι O. 9.37

τὸ καυχᾶσθαι O. 9.38

τὸ δὲ παθεῖν P. 1.99

τὸ πλουτεῖν δὲ P. 2.56

καὶ τὸ σιγᾶν N. 5.18

ὦ Μέγα, τὸ δ' αὖτις τεὰν ψυχὰν κομίξαι οὔ μοι δυνατόν N. 8.44
τὸ δὲ φυγεῖν Δ... τὸ γὰρ πρὶν γενέ[σθαι (G-H, sed alia possis) Παρθ. 1. 20.

5 c. adv.

a pro subs.
τῶν γε νῦν O. 1.105

τὸ πόρσω δ' ἐστὶ σοφοῖς ἄβατον κἀσόφοις O. 3.44

νεότατος τὸ πάλιν ἤδη O. 10.87

τῶν πάροιθε P. 2.60

τὰ πόρσω P. 3.22

τῶν πάλαι P. 6.40

τῶν νῦν δὲ P. 6.43
ὁ δ' ἐχθρὰ νοήσαις ἤδη φθόνος οἴχεται τῶν πάλαι προθανόντων ( τῶν προθανόντων?) P. 2.56

b pro adv.
τὸ πολλάκις O. 1.32

ἀμφοτέροις ὁμοῖοι τοκεῦσι, τὰ ματρόθεν μὲν κάτω τὰ δ' ὕπερθε πατρός P. 2.48

εἶδον γὰρ τὰ πόλλ' ἐν ἀμαχανίᾳ ψογερὸν Ἀρχίλοχον P. 2.54

τὸ νῦν τε καὶ τὸ λοιπὸν P. 5.117
“ τὸ δὲ οἴκοθεν ἀντία πράξει” P. 8.51 “ τὸ πρῶτον” P. 9.41
τὸ πρίν P. 11.39

τό γέ νυν P. 11.44

τὰ πόλλ N. 2.2

τὸ πρῶτον N. 3.49

τὸ λοιπὸν N. 7.45
τὸ πάροιθε fr. 33d. 1. τίμαθεν γὰρ τὰ πάλαι τὰ νῦν τ' Παρθ. 2. 42.

6 c. subs. phrase.
τὸ δὲ φυᾷ κράτιστον ἅπαν O. 9.100

Ἰσθμοῖ τά τ' ἐν Νεμέᾳ O. 13.98

τὰ δ' Ὀλυμπίᾳ O. 13.101

τὰ δ' ὑπ ὀφρύι Παρνασσίᾳ O. 13.106

ἀνέχει τότε μὲν τὰ κείνων P. 2.89

τὸ πὰρ ποδός P. 3.60

τὰ δ' εἰς ἐνιαυτὸν P. 10.63

τῶν γὰρ ἀνὰ πόλιν εὑρίσκων τὰ μέσα μακροτέρῳ ὄλβῳ τεθαλότα P. 11.52

τὰ δ' οἴκοι μάσσον ἀριθμοῦ N. 2.23

Γαδείρων τὸ πρὸς ζόφον οὐ περατόν N. 4.69

τὰ μὲν ἀμφὶ πόνοις ὑπερώτατα N. 8.42

τὰ δ' ἄλλαις ἁμέραις πολλὰ μὲν ἐν κονίᾳ χέρσῳ, τὰ δὲ γείτονι πόντῳ φάσομαι N. 9.42

μακρὰ μὲν τὰ Περσέος ἀμφὶ Μεδοίσας Γοργόνος N. 10.4
τὸ δ' ἐκ Διὸς ἀνθρώποις σαφὲς οὐχ ἕπεται τέκμαρ as for what comes from Zeus N. 11.43 but cf. 2d supra.

7 ὁ αὐτός, the same
τωὔτ' ἐπὶ χρέος O. 1.45

μηνός τε τωὐτοῦ O. 13.38
ταὐτὰ δὲ τρὶς τετράκι τ' ἀμφιπολεῖν ἀπορία τελέθει (Σ: ταῦτα codd.) N. 7.104

8 fragg. ]
ογοι τῶν γε δε[ Pae. 6.176
ὁ μέγιστ[ος Πα. 7. a. 3.
τῷ δ[ Pae. 10.22
πολ]λὰ μὲν τὰ πάροιθ' τὰ δ α[ Παρθ. 2. 31. τὸ δ ἀλαθε[ ] κατέστα φάος[ ?fr. 337. 9.

Lexicon to Pindar > ὁ
2 ὅ

ὁ, ὅ, ὅς, The uses are relative, demonstrative, articular: where ὁ is not followed by a particle, it is often impossible to decide whether the u<*>e is relative or demonstrative, cf. Des Places 35ff. A relative, cf. ὅς τε. (ὅ, ὅς, τοῦ, οὗ, τῷ, ᾧ, τόν, ὅν, τοί, οἵ, τῶν, ὧν, τοῖς（ι), οἷς, οἶσι（ν), τούς; ἅ, ἇς, τᾶς, ᾆ, τᾷ, ἅν, τάν, αἵ, ταί, τᾶν, αἷς（ι), ταῖσι; τοῦ, οὕνεκεν, ᾧ, τῷ, τό, τά, τῶν, ὧν, οἷσιν, τά.)

1 c. ind.

a preceded by an antecedent.
Ἱέρωνος θεμιστεῖον ὃς ἀμφέπει σκᾶπτον O. 1.12

Πέλοπος τοῦ μεγασθενὴς ἐράσσατο Γαιάοχος O. 1.25
ἕλεν ἄταν ὑπέροπλον ἅν τοι πατὴρ ὕπερ κρέμασε καρτερὸν αὐτῷ λίθον, τὸν αἰεὶ μενοινῶν κεφαλᾶς βαλεῖν εὐφροσύνας ἀλᾶται (Fennel: τάν οἱ codd.: ἅν οἱ Hermann, v. d. Mühll) O. 1.57—8. νέκταρ ἀμβροσίαν τε δῶκεν, οἷσιν ἄφθιτον θέν νιν ( οἷς νιν coni. Bergk) O. 1.63 [ ἃ τέκε (codd.: ἔτεκε Boehmer: τέκε τε byz.) O. 1.89]
πατέρων · καμόντες οἳ πολλὰ θυμῷ ἱερὸν ἔσχον οἴκημα O. 2.8

κούραις, ἔπαθον αἳ μεγάλα O. 2.23
ὕδωρ δ' ἄλλα (sc. ἄνθεμα)
φέρβει, ὅρμοισι τῶν χέρας ἀναπλέκοντι O. 2.74

Ῥαδαμάνθυος ὃν πατὴρ ἔχει μέγας ἑτοῖμον αὐτῷ πάρεδρον O. 2.76

Ἀχιλλέα ὃς Ἕκτορα σφᾶλε O. 2.81

κόσμον ἐλαίας, τάν ποτε Ἴστρου ἀπὸ σκιαρᾶν παγᾶν ἔνεικεν O. 3.13

Πίσα τᾶς ἄπο θεόμοροι νίσοντ' ἐπ ἀνθρώπους ἀοιδαί O. 3.9

ἔλαφον ἅν ποτε Ταυγέτα ἀντιθεῖσ' Ὀρθωσίας ἔγραψεν ἱεράν O. 3.29

δένδρεα · τῶν νιν γλυκὺς ἵμερος ἔσχεν O. 3.33

ἀλλὰ Κρόνου παῖ, ὃς Αἴτναν ἔχεις O. 4.6

Ψαύμιος ὃς ἐλαίᾳ στεφανωθεὶς Πισάτιδι κῦδος ὄρσαι σπεύδει Καμαρίνᾳ O. 4.11

Ψαύμιος · ὃς τὰν σὰν πόλιν αὔξων ἐγέραρεν O. 5.4

ὀχετούς, Ἵππαρις οἷσιν ἄρδει στρατὸν O. 5.12

αἶνος ὃν ἐν δίκᾳ φθέγξατ O. 6.12

Πιτάναν ἅ τοι Ποσειδάωνι μιχθεῖσα Κρονίῳ λέγεται O. 6.29

ἥρωι ὃς ἀνδρῶν Ἀρκάδων ἄνασσε O. 6.34

Ἑρμᾶν ὃς ἀγῶνας ἔχει O. 6.79
ἀκόνας, ἅ μ' ἐθέλοντα προσέρπει (but more prob. articular: cf. C. 2. d infra) O. 6.83 Μετώπα, πλάξιππον ἃ Θήβαν ἔτικτεν, τᾶς ἐρατεινὸν ὕδωρ πίομαι (bis) O. 6.85
Ὀρτυγίας, τὰν Ἱέρων καθαρῷ σκάπτῳ διέπων ἀμφέπει Δάματρα O. 6.93
[ὁ δ' ὄλβιος, ὃν φᾶμαι κατέχοντ ἀγαθαί (v. l. κατέχωντ) O. 7.10]
παῖδας, ὧν εἷς μὲν Κάμιρον πρεσβύτατόν τε Ἰάλυσον ἔτεκεν O. 7.73

Ζηνὶ ὃς σὲ μὲν Νεμέᾳ πρόφατον θῆκεν O. 8.16

Αἰακοῦ· τὸν καλέσαντο σύνεργον O. 8.31

Ἀλκιμέδων ὃς ἐν τέτρασιν παίδων ἀπεθήκατο γυίοις νόστον O. 8.67

Βλεψιάδαις ἕκτος οἷς ἤδη στέφανος περίκειται O. 8.76

κόσμον Ὀλυμπίᾳ, ὅν σφι Ζεὺς γένει ὤπασεν O. 8.83

ἀκρωτήριον Ἄλιδος τὸ δή ποτε Λυδὸς ἥρως Πέλοψ ἐξάρατο O. 9.10

υἱόν, ἃν Θέμις θυγάτηρ τέ οἱ σώτειρα λέλογχεν O. 9.15

ῥάβδον, βρότεα σώμαθ' ᾇ κατάγει O. 9.34

Μενοίτιον· τοῦ παῖς ἔστα σὺν Ἀχιλλεῖ O. 9.70

ἀγῶνα ὃν ἀρχαίῳ σάματι πὰρ Πέλοπος ἐκτίσσατο O. 10.24

μελέων, τὰ παρ' εὐκλέι Δίρκᾳ χρόνῳ μὲν φάνεν O. 10.85

Ἀρχεστράτου τὸν εἶδον κρατέοντα O. 10.100

ὥρᾳ τε κεκραμένον, ἅ ποτε ἀναιδέα Γανυμήδει θάνατον ἆλκε σὺν Κυπρογένει O. 10.104

ἐγκώμιον τεθμόν, τὸν ἄγει πεδίων ἐκ Πίσας O. 13.29

πατρὸς ὃς ἔπαθεν O. 13.63

φόρμιγξ τᾶς ἀκούει μὲν βάσις P. 1.2

Τυφὼς · τόν ποτε Κιλίκιον θρέψεν πολυώνυμον ἄντρον P. 1.16

Αἴτνα · τᾶς ἐρεύγονται μὲν ἀπλάτου πυρὸς ἁγνόταται ἐκ μυχῶν παγαί P. 1.21
Ζεῦ, ὃς τοῦτ' ἐφέπεις ὄρος, γαίας μέτωπον, τοῦ μὲν ἐπωνυμίαν κλεινὸς οἰκιστὴρ ἐκύδανεν πόλιν (bis) P. 1.30
Ποίαντος υἱὸν ὃς Πριάμοιο πόλιν πέρσεν P. 1.54

Αἴτνας βασιλεῖ·· τῷ πόλιν Ἱέρων ἔκτισσε P. 1.61

Τυνδαριδᾶν βαθύδοξοι γείτονες, ὧν κλέος ἄνθησεν αἰχμᾶς P. 1.66

Συρακοσίων ἀρχῷ ὠκυπόρων ἀπὸ ναῶν ὅ σφιν ἐν πόντῳ βάλεθ' ἁλικίαν P. 1.74

μαχᾶν, ταῖσι Μήδειοι κάμον P. 1.78
τετραορίας εὐάρματος Ἱέρων ἐν ᾇ
κρατέων ἀνέδησεν Ὀρτυγίαν P. 2.5

ὕμνον τὸν ἐδέξαντ' ἀμφ ἀρετᾷ P. 1.80
Ἀρτέμιδος, ἇς οὐκ ἄτερ ἐδάμασσε πώλους (Hermann: τᾶς codd.) P. 2.7
Κινύραν τὸν ὁ χρυσοχαῖτα προφρόνως ἐφίλησ' Ἀπόλλων P. 2.16

Ἥρας τὰν Διὸς εὐναὶ λάχον πολυγαθέες P. 2.27
γόνον τὸν ὀνύμαζε τράφοισα Κένταυρον, ὃς ἵπποισι Μαγνητίδεσσιν ἐμείγνυτ (bis) P. 2.44
θεός, ὃ καὶ πτερόεντ' αἰετὸν κίχε P. 2.50

θεός, ὃς ἀνέχει τότε μὲν τὰ κείνων P. 2.89

ξένον, ὃς Συρακόσσαισι νέμει βασιλεύς P. 3.70

στεφάνοις, τοὺς ἀριστεύων Φερένικος ἕλεν Κίρρᾳ ποτέ P. 3.74

Ματρί, τᾶν κοῦραι παρ' ἐμὸν πρόθυρον σὺν Πανὶ μέλπονται P. 3.78
( Πηλεύς τε καὶ Κάδμος)
λέγονται μὰν βροτῶν ὄλβον ὑπέρτατον οἳ σχεῖν P. 3.89
[ὅς (codd. contra metr.: σάος Schr.) P. 3.106]
τὸ Μηδείας ἔπος Αἰήτα τό ποτε ζαμενὴς παῖς ἀπέπνευσ P. 4.10
“ κεῖνος ὄρνις τόν ποτε δέξατ” P. 4.20 “Εὔφαμος, τόν ποτ' Εὐρώπα τίκτε” P. 4.46
μελίσσας Δελφίδος ἅ σε χαίρειν ἐστρὶς αὐδάσαισα ἄμφανεν P. 4.61
“τοκέων, τοί μ' κρύβδα πέμπον” P. 4.111 “ ἀγρούς τοὺς ἀπούρας ἁμετέρων τοκέων νέμεαι” P. 4.149 “θρόνος, ᾧ ποτε Κρηθείδας ἐγκαθίζων εὔθυνε” P. 4.152 “ δέρμα τε κριοῦ τῷ ποτ' ἐκ πόντου σαώθη” P. 4.161
βόας, οἳ φλόγ' ἀπὸ ξανθᾶν γενύων πνέον P. 4.225
δράκοντος ὃς πάχει μάκει τε πεντηκόντερον ναῦν κράτει, τέλεσεν ἃν πλαγαὶ σιδάρου (bis) P. 4.245
Κάστορος· εὐδίαν ὃς μετὰ χειμέριον ὄμβρον τεὰν καταιθύσσει μάκαιραν ἑστίαν P. 5.10

Κάρρωτον ὃς Βαττιδᾶν ἀφίκετο δόμους P. 5.27

ἀνδριάντι Κρῆτες ὃν τοξοφόροι τέγει Παρνασσίῳ καθέσσαντο P. 5.41

Ἀπόλλων ὃ καὶ βαρειᾶν νόσων ἀκέσματ' νέμει P. 5.63
μυχόν τ' ἀμφέπει μαντήιον. τῷ Λακεδαίμονι ἐν Ἄργει τε καὶ ζαθέᾳ Πύλῳ ἔνασσεν ἀλκάεντας Ἡρακλέος ἐκγόνους (ᾧ, τῷ χρησμῷ Σ.) P. 5.69
πόλιν. ἔχοντι τὰν χαλκοχάρμαι ξένοι Τρῶες P. 5.82
ἄνδρες τοὺς
Ἀριστοτέλης ἄγαγε P. 5.87

Ἀρκεσίλᾳ· τὸν ἐν ἀοιδᾷ νέων πρέπει χρυσάορα Φοῖβον ἀπύειν P. 5.103

ὕμνων θησαυρὸς. τὸν οὔτε χειμέριος ὄμβρος οὔτ' ἄνεμος ἐς μυχοὺς ἁλὸς ἄξοισι P. 6.10

Ἀντίλοχος ὃς ὑπερέφθιτο πατρός P. 6.30

Ἐλέλιχθον, ἄρχεις ὃς ἱππιᾶν ἐσόδων P. 6.50

ἀστῶν οἳ τεὸν δόμον Πυθῶνι δίᾳ θαητὸν ἔτευξαν P. 7.10
τὺ (= Ἡσυχία) —
τὰν οὐδὲ Πορφυρίων μάθεν παρ' αἶσαν ἐξερεθίζων P. 8.12

Ἀπόλλωνος· ὃς εὐμενεῖ νόῳ λτ;γτ;ενάρκειον ἔδεκτο υἱὸν P. 8.18

σωμάτεσσι τοῖς οὔτε νόστος ὁμῶς ἔπαλπνος ἐν Πυθιάδι κρίθη P. 8.83

Κυράνας, τὰν Λατοίδας ἅρπασ P. 9.5

Ὑψέος ὃς Λαπιθᾶν ὑπερόπλων τουτάκις ἦν βασιλεύς P. 9.14

ὅν ποτε Κρέοισ' ἔτικτεν P. 9.15

σέ, τὸν οὐ θεμιτὸν ψεύδει θιγεῖν P. 9.42
“ὦ ἄνα, κύριον ὃς πάντων τέλος οἶσθα” P. 9.44 “ παῖδα ὃν κλυτὸς Ἑρμᾶς οἴσει” P. 9.59
Κυράναν, ἅ νιν εὔφρων δέξεται P. 9.73

Ἰόλαον. τόν κρύψαν ἔνερθ' ὑπὸ γᾶν P. 9.80
κῶφος ἀνήρ τις, ὃς Ἡρακλεῖ στόμα μὴ περιβάλλει, μηδὲ Διρκαίων ὑδάτων ἀὲ μέμναται, τά νιν θρέψαντο καὶ Ἰφικλέα, τοῖσι τέλειον ἐπ' εὐχᾷ κωμάσομαί τι παθὼν ἐσλόν (ter) P. 9.87—9.
κούραν, τὰν μάλα πολλοὶ ἀριστῆες ἀνδρῶν αἴτεον P. 9.107

Ὑπερβορέων. παρ' οἶς ποτε Περσεὺς ἐδαίσατο λαγέτας P. 10.31

ὧν θαλίαις ἔμπεδον εὐφαμίαις τε μάλιστ' Ἀπόλλων χαίρει P. 10.34

θησαυρόν, ὃν περίαλλ' ἐτίμασε Λοξίας P. 11.5

ἀγῶνι ἐν τῷ Θρασυδᾷος ἔμνασεν ἑστίαν P. 11.13

Ὀρέστα· τὸν δὴ ἐκ δόλου τροφὸς ἄνελε δυσπενθέος P. 11.17

Πυθονίκῳ ἢ Θρασυδᾴῳ, τῶν εὐφροσύνα τε καὶ δόξ' ἐπιφλέγει P. 11.45

τέχνᾳ, τάν ποτε Παλλὰς ἐφεῦρε P. 12.6

θρῆνον. τὸν ἄιε λειβόμενον P. 12.9

υἱὸς Δανάας· τὸν ἀπὸ χρυσοῦ φαμὲν αὐτορύτου ἔμμεναι P. 12.17

δονάκων, τοὶ παρὰ καλλιχόρῳ ναίοισι πόλι Χαρίτων P. 12.26

ἀλλ' ἔσται χρόνος οὖτος, ὃ καὶ τὸ μὲν δώσει P. 12.31
νάσω, τὰν Ζεὺς ἔδωκεν
Φερσεφόνᾳ N. 1.13

ἀοιδὰν. τᾶς ἀφθονίαν ὄπαζε μήτιος ἁμᾶς ἄπο N. 3.9

Μυρμιδόνες ὧν παλαίφατον ἀγορὰν οὐκ ἐλεγχέεσσιν ἐμίανε N. 3.14

κιόνων ὕπερ Ἡρακλέος ἥρως θεὸς ἃς ἔθηκε ναυτιλίας ἐσχάτας μάρτυρας κλυτούς N. 3.22

Πηλεὺς ὃς καὶ Ἰαολκὸν εἶλε N. 3.34

Ἀσκλαπιόν, τὸν φαρμάκων δίδαξε μαλακόχειρα νόμον N. 3.55

σέο δ' ἀγών, τὸν ὕμνος ἔβαλεν ὄπι νέων ἐπιχώριον χάρμα κελαδέων N. 3.65

Ἀριστοκλείδᾳ ὃς τάνδε νᾶσον εὐκλέι προσέθηκε λόγῳ N. 3.68

αἰετὸς ὃς ἔλαβεν αἶψα N. 3.81

Ἡρακλέος. σὺν ᾧ ποτε Τροίαν κραταιὸς Τελαμὼν πόρθησε N. 4.25
ἕδραν, τὰν οὐρανοῦ βασιλῆες πόντου τ' ἐφεζόμενοι δῶρα καὶ κράτος ἐξέφαναν (Herwerden: τᾶς codd.) N. 4.67 ( κεῖνος) τὸν Εὐφάνης ἐθέλων γεραιὸς προπάτωρ σὸς ἄεισέν ποτε, παῖ (Σ assume Kallikles to be antecedent, others refer to ἀγῶνι or Ὀρσοτριαίνα, cf. N. 2.24) N. 4.89
ἄρουραν· τάν ποτ' εὔανδρόν τε καὶ ναυσικλυτὰν θέσσαντο N. 5.9

Ποσειδάωνα ὃς Αἰγᾶθεν ποτὶ κλειτὰν θαμὰ νίσεται Ἰσθμὸν Δωρίαν N. 5.37

μείς τ' ἐπιχώριος, ὃν φίλησ Ἀπόλλων N. 5.44

παῖς ἐναγώνιος, ὃς ταύταν μεθέπων Διόθεν αἶσαν νῦν πέφανται οὐκ ἄμμορος N. 6.13

Σαοκλείδἀ, ὃς ὑπέρτατος Ἁγησιμάχοἰ ὑέων γένετο N. 3.21

ἀγώνων ἄπο, τοὺς ἐνέποισιν ἱερούς N. 6.59

Αἴας, ὃν πόρευσαν N. 7.27
[ βοαθοῶν τοι. v.
τοι N. 7.33
]
πόλιν. τᾷ καὶ Δαναοὶ πόνησαν N. 7.35

γλῶσσαν, ὃς ἐξέπεμψεν παλαισμάτων αὐχένα καὶ σθένος ἀδίαντον N. 7.72

τίν Γίγαντας ὃς ἐδάμασας N. 7.90
[ γέρας τό περ νῦν. v. ὁ, C. N. 7.101]
ἡρώων ἄωτοι οἵ τε κρανααῖς ἐν Ἀθάναισιν ἅρμοζον στρατόν, οἵ τ' ἀνὰ Σπάρταν Πελοπηιάδαι N. 8.11

πάρφασις ἃ τὸ μὲν λαμπρὸν βιᾶται, τῶν δ' ἀφάντων κῦδος ἀντείνει σαθρόν N. 8.34

ῥεέθροις, ὧν ἐγὼ μνασθεὶς ἐπασκήσω κλυταῖς ἥρωα τιμαῖς· ὅς τότε ἄμφαινε κυδαίνων πόλιν N. 9.9
—11.
αἰδὼς ἃ φέρει δόξαν N. 9.34
φιάλαι-
σι ἅς ποθ' ἵπποι κτησάμεναι Χρομίῳ πέμψαν N. 9.52

Ἡρακλέος οὗ κατ' Ὄλυμπον ἄλοχος Ἥβα ἔστι N. 10.17

ἑταίρους οἵ σε γεραίροντες ὀρθὰν φυλάσσοισιν Τένεδον N. 11.5

Δᾶλος, ἐν ᾇ κέχυμαι I. 1.4
πατρίδι ἐν ᾇ καὶ τὸν ἀδείμαντον Ἀλκμήνα τέκεν παῖδα, θρασεῖαι τόν ποτε Γηρυόνα φρίξαν κύνες (bis) I. 1.12—3.
ἄρουραν, ἅ νιν ἐν κρυοέσσᾳ δέξατο συντυχίᾳ I. 1.36
φῶτες, οἳ χρυσαμπύκων ἐς δίφρον Μοισᾶν ἔβαινον ( οἳ Σ: ὅσοι codd.) I. 2.1 τὠργείου χρήματα χρήματ' ἀνήρ ὃς φᾶ (others view ὅς as dem.) I. 2.11
νίκαν, τὰν λτ;γτ;ενοκράτει Ποσειδάων ὀπάσαις στεφάνωμα κόμᾳ πέμπεν I. 2.14

χεῖρα τὰν Νικόμαχος κατὰ καιρὸν νεῖμ I. 2.22

γαῖαν τὰν δὴ καλέοισιν Ὀλυμπίου Διὸς ἄλσος I. 2.27

ἀρετὰς. αἷσι Κλεωνυμίδαι θάλλοντες αἰεὶ διέρχονται I. 4.4

Ἄἴαντος ἀλκάν, φοίνιον τὰν ὀψίᾳ ἐν νυκτὶ ταμὼν μομφὰν ἔχει I. 4.35

Ὅμηρος ὃς αὐτοῦ πᾶσαν ὀρθώσαις ἀρετὰν κατὰ ῥάβδον ἔφρασεν I. 4.37

υἱὸς Ἀλκμήνας· ὃς Οὔλυμπόνδ' ἔβα I. 4.55

θανόντων· τοὺς Μεγάρα τέκε οἱ Κρεοντὶς υἱούς· τοῖσιν ἐν δυθμαῖσιν αὐγᾶν φλὸξ παννυχίζει I. 4.64
—5.
Αἰακοῦ παίδων τε. τοὶ καὶ σὺν μάχαις δὶς πόλιν Τρώων ἔπραθον I. 5.35

πατρός. τὸν χαλκοχάρμαν ἐς πόλεμον ἆγε I. 6.27
“θηρός, ὃν πάμπρωτον ἀέθλων κτεῖνά ποτ' ἐν Νεμέᾳ” I. 6.48 “ἔσσεταί τοι παῖς, ὃν αἰτεῖς” I. 6.52
ὕδωρ, τὸ ἀνέτειλαν I. 6.74

θάλος, χάλος, χάλκασπις ᾧ πότμον μὲν Ἄρης ἔμειξεν I. 7.25

Ζηνί ὃ τὰν μὲν ᾤκισσεν ἁγεμόνα I. 8.19

Αἰακὸν. ὃ καὶ δαιμόνεσσι δίκας ἐπείραινε I. 8.23

Ἀχιλέος. ὃ καὶ Μύσιον ἀμπελόεν αἵμαξε I. 8.49

θεόν, ὃς κεραυνοῦ τε κρέσσον ἄλλο βέλος διώξει χερί I. 8.34

ἶνας ἐκταμὼν δορί, ταί μιν ῥύοντό ποτε I. 8.52

ἀριστέας οἶς δῶμα Φερσεφόνας μανύων Ἀχιλεύς πρόφαινεν I. 8.55

μιν ὃς ἔλαχεν σελίνων I. 8.63
( Ζεύς), ὃς καὶ τυπεὶς ἁγνῷ πελέκει τέκετο ξανθὰν Ἀθάναν fr. 34. Εὐξαντίου [Κρητ]ῶν μαιομένων
ὃς ἀνα[ίνετο] αὐταρχεῖν Pae. 4.36

Διὸς Ἐννοσίδαν τε. χθόνα τοί ποτε καὶ στρατὸν ἀθρόον πέμψαν κεραυνῷ τριόδοντί τε ἐς τὸν βαθὺν Τάρταρον Pae. 4.42

]ὃν ἔμβα[λ Pae. 6.78

Νεοπτόλεμον. ὃς διέπερσεν Ἰλίου πόλιν Pae. 6.104

χρηστήριον[ ]ἐν ᾧ Τήνερον ἔτεκ[εν Pae. 9.41
τί ἔλπεαι σοφίαν ἔμμεν, ἃν ὀλίγον τοι ἀνὴρ ὑπὲρ ἀνδρὸς ἴσχει; (cod. unus Stobaei in marg., ᾇ cett.: om. Clem. Alex.: ᾆ τ Boeckh) fr. 61. 1. θεοί, πολύβατον οἵ τ' ἄστεος ὀμφαλὸν θυόεντ οἰχνεῖτε πανδαίδαλόν τ εὐκλἔ ἀγοράν fr. 75. 3. ἐπὶ τὸν κισσοδαῆ θεόν, τὸν Βρόμιον τὸν Ἐριβόαν τε βροτοὶ καλέομεν ( ὃν ὃν v. l.: τε om. codd. nonnulli: docti unum vel alterum τὸν del.) fr. 75. 10. Ἀλαλά, ᾆ θύεται ἄνδρες fr. 78. 2. ἀνδρὸς δ' οὔτε γυναικός, ὧν θάλεσσιν ἔγκειμαι Παρθ. 2. 3. νίκαις, αἷς ἐν ἀιόνεσσιν Ὀγχη[στοῦ κλυ]τᾶς, ταῖς δὲ ναὸν Ἰτωνίας χαίταν στεφάνοις ἐκόσμηθεν Παρθ. 2.. θυγάτηρ, Ἀνδαισιστρότᾰ ἃν ἐπάσκησε Παρθ. 2.. Ὑμέναιον, ὃν λάβεν (ὃν supp. Hermann: om. cod.) Θρ. 3.. ψυχὰς ἐκ τᾶν βασιλῆες ἀγαυοὶ αὔξοντ fr. 133. 3. ἑορτὰ ἐν ᾇ πρῶτον εὐνάσθην fr. 193. Ἐλπίς, ἃ μάλιστα κυβερνᾷ fr. 214. 3.

b where the antecedent follows the rel. cl. [ ταί τε ναίετε (Bergk: αἵ τε codd.) O. 14.2]
ὅσσα δὲ μὴ πεφίληκε Ζεύς, ἀτύζονται βοὰν Πιερίδων ἀίοντα ὅς τ' ἐν αἰνᾷ Ταρτάρῳ κεῖται, θεῶν πολέμιος, Τυφώς P. 1.15

ὃς δὲ διδάκτ' ἔχει, ψεφεννὸς ἀνὴρ N. 3.41
οἶσι δὲ Φερσεφόνα ποινὰν παλαιοῦ πένθεος δέξεται, ἐς τὸν ὕπερθεν ἅλιον κείνων ἐνάτῳ ἔτει ἀνδιδοῖ ψυχὰς πάλιν fr. 133. 1. ὁ χοροιτύπος, ὃν Μαλέας ὄρος ἔθρεψε, Ναίδος ἀκοίτας Σιληνός fr. 156.

c with interior antecedent. “ἀρχαίαν κομίζων πατρὸς ἐμοῦτάν ποτε Ζεὺς ὤπασεν λαγέτᾳ Αἰόλῳ καὶ παισὶ τιμάν ( ἀρχὰν ἀγκομίζων Chaeris) P. 4.107
μακάριος, ὃς ἔχεις καὶ πεδὰ μέγαν κάματον λόγων φέρτατων μναμήἰ P. 5.46

d

I ἐξ οὗ, from then on
ἐξ οὗ πολύκλειτον καθ' Ἕλλανας γένος Ἰαμιδᾶν O. 6.71

ἐξ οὗ Θέτιος γόνος οὐλίῳ μιν ἐν Ἄρει παραγορεῖτο μή ποτε σφετέρας ἄτερθε ταξιοῦσθαι αἰχμᾶς O. 9.76

II v. οὕνεκεν.

e where the antecedent is omitted

I being demonstrative in same case as rel. ἀντεβόλησεν τῶν ἀνὴρ θνατὸς οὔπω τις πρότερον ( τοιούτων ὧν) O. 13.31 ὧν ἔραται, καιρὸν διδούς ( τούτων ὧν) P. 1.57 τῶν δ' ἕκαστος ὀρούει, τυχών κεν ἁρπαλέαν σχέθοι φροντίδα τὰν πὰρ ποδός ( τούτων ὧν) P. 10.61 πράσσει γὰρ ἔργῳ μὲν σθένος, βουλαῖσι δὲ φρήν, ἐσσόμενον προιδεῖν συγγενὲς οἷς ἕπεται ( τούτοις οἷς) N. 1.28 σύνες ὅ τοι λέγω ( τοῦτο ὅ) fr. 105. 1. ἀλᾶται στρατῶν, ὃς ἀμαξοφόρητον οἶκον οὐ πέπαται ( ἐκεῖνος ὅστις) fr. 105b. 2. τὰς δὲ Θεοξένου ἀκτῖνας πρὸς ὄσσων μαρμαρυζοίσας δρακεὶς ὃς μὴ πόθῳ κυμαίνεται fr. 123. 4. ὃς μὲν ἀχρήμων, ἀφνεὸς τότε fr. 124. 8.

II being assimilated to the case of the rel. τιμὰ δὲ γίνεται, ὧν θεὸς ἁβρὸν αὔξει λόγον τεθνακότων (τούτοις, ὧν) N. 7.32 Ζεῦ πάτερ, τῶν μὰν ἔραται φρενί, σιγᾷ οἱ στόμα ( ταῦτα ὧν) N. 10.29 ὀρνιχολόχῳ τε καὶ ὃν πόντος τράφει ( ἐκείνῳ ὃν) I. 1.48

f where antecedent does not correspond to rel. in gender or number. ὀρθὰν ἄγεις ἐφημοσύναν, τά ποτ' ἐν οὔρεσι φαντὶ μεγαλοσθενεῖ Φιλύρας υἱὸν ὀρφανιζομένῳ Πηλείδᾳ παραινεῖν (Er. Schmid: τὰν codd.) P. 6.21

2 c. subj.

a preceded by definite antecedent.

I μῶμος ἐξ ἄλλων κρέμαται φθονεόντων τοῖς, οἷς ποτε πρώτοις αἰδοία ποτιστάξῃ Χάρις εὐκλέα μορφάν (v. l. ποτιστάξει, -άζει) O. 6.75 ὁ δ' ὄλβιος ὃν φᾶμαι κατέχωντ ἀγαθαί ( κατέχοντ v. l.) O. 7.10
ἐκ πόνων δ, οἳ σὺν νεότατι γένωνται σύν τε δίκᾳ N. 9.44

II add. κε/
ἄν. ἀμφοτέροισι δ' ἀνήρ, ὃς ἂν ἐγκύρσῃ καὶ ἕλῃ, στέφανον ὕψιστον δέδεκται P. 1.100
“γένος, οἵ κεν τάνδε νᾶσον ἐλθόντες τέκωνται φῶτα” P. 4.51
ὑμνητὸς οὗτος ἀνὴρ γίνεται σοφοῖς, ὃς ἂν τὰ μέγιστ' ἀέθλων ἕλῃ P. 10.23
, cf. P. 5.65 infra.

b where the antecedent is omitted

I being demonstrative in same case as rel.
δίδωσί τε Μοῖσαν οἷς ἂν ἐθέλῃ P. 5.65

ὃς δ' ἀμφ ἀέθλοις ἄρηται κῦδος ἁβρόν, εὐαγορηθείς κέρδος ὕψιστον δέκεται I. 1.50

II where the rel. is assimilated to the case of the antecedent. ἐν δὲ πείρᾳ τέλος διαφαίνεται ὧν τις ἐξοχώτερος γένηται ( τούτων ἅ) N. 3.71 τὰ δ' αὐτὸς ἀντιτύχῃ, ἔλπεταί τις ἕκαστος ἐξοχώτατα φάσθαι ( ταῦτα ὧν: ἄν τις τύχῃ codd., corr. Mingarelli) N. 4.91

c where the antecedent does not correspond with the rel. in gender or number, v. P. 4.51 supra

a

II

3 c. opt.

a with definite antecedent. ἅπαντας ἐν οἴκῳ εἴρετο παῖδα, τὸν Εὐάδνα τέκοι (v. Goodwin, M & T, § 700) O. 6.49

b add. κε/ἄν, v. P. 9.119 infra c.

c antecedent omitted, being demonstrative assimilated to the case of the rel. θανεῖν δ' οἷσιν ἀνάγκα, τά κέ τις ἀνώνυμον γῆρας ἕψοι μάταν; (byz.: οἷς codd.) O. 1.82 εἶπε δ' ἐν μέσσοις ἀπάγεσθαι, ὃς ἂν πρῶτος θορὼν ἀμφί οἱ ψαύσειε πέπλοις (The oratio recta would be ὃς ἂν ψαύσῃ,” Gildersleeve) P. 9.119

4 f. s. dat. pro adv., =
ὡς. ζεῦξον ἤδη μοι σθένος ἡμιόνων ᾇ τάχος O. 6.23
ἐνυπνίῳ δ' ᾇ τάχιστα πιθέσθαι κελήσατο μιν (Kayser: δ' ἇ, δαί, δέ codd.) O. 13.79

5 exx. where rel. conj. is postponed within rel cl. as second word, O. 1.12, O. 1.82, O. 2.8, O. 2.23, O. 2.74, O. 6.85, O. 8.76, P. 4.10, P. 4.246, P. 5.10, P. 5.41, P. 5.82, P. 6.50, P. 9.44, I. 1.13, I. 7.25, fr. 12, Πα.., Παρθ. 2. 71: as third word, O. 5.12, O. 9.34, P. 2.5, N. 3.22,
Κρητ]ῶν μαιομένων ὃς ἀνα[ίνετο] αὐταρχεῖν Pae. 4.36
as fourth word, or more,
ὠκυπόρων ἀπὸ ναῶν ὅ σφιν ἐν πόντῳ βάλεθ' ἁλικίαν P. 1.74
λέγονται μὰν βροτῶν ὄλβον
ὑπέρτατον οἳ σχεῖν P. 3.89

ἐσσόμενον προιδεῖν συγγενὲς οἷς ἕπεται N. 1.28
τὰς δὲ Θεοξένου ἀκτῖνας πρὸς ὄσσων μαρμαρυζοίσας δρακεὶς ὃς μὴ πόθῳ κυμαίνεται fr. 123. 4.

6 in crasis, v. οὕνεκεν.

7 fragg. ]
νοιον ἃ σοὶ σε[ Πα.. 1 ]οῦν οἳ Ζην[ Pae. 6.154

]υἱὸν ἔτι τέξει· τὸν απ[ Pae. 10.21
ἐγχώριαι, [ἀγ]λαὸς ἃς ἐν' ἑρκε[ (ἆς = ἕως Wil.)
Πα. 12. 2. τόν ποτε[ Pae. 22.9
]τοὶ πρόιδ[ο]ν αἶσαν α[ (καί]τοι Schr.) fr. 140a. 49 (23) ]αδις, οὕς οἱ[ (οἱ encl. post vocalem P. ponere solet, nott. Snell) fr. 169, 51. ὃς Δολόπων ἄγαγε θρασὺν ὅμιλον fr. 183. B demonstrative (ὁ, τοῦ, [τοῖο coni.], τῷ, τόν, τοί, οἱ, τῶν, τοῖς, τοῖσι（ν), τούς; ἁ, τᾶς coni., τᾷ, τάν, ταί, αἱ, ταῖς, τάς; τό, τοῦ, τό, τά, τῶν, τά: ὅς, I. 2.11, v. A. 1. a. supra.)

1 combined with various particles

a
μέν... δέ. ἀλλὁ μὲν Πυθῶνάδ' ᾤχετ ἰὼν. ἁ δὲ τίκτε θεόφρονα κοῦρον O. 6.37
—9. [ τὸ μὲν τὸ δὲ, v. infra 5a, O. 7.23]
ἐδόκησαν τάμνειν τέλος, τοὶ μὲν γένει φίλῳ σὺν Ἀτρέος Ἑλέναν κομίζοντες, οἱ δ' ἀπὸ πάμπαν εἴργοντες O. 13.58
—9. [ τὰ μὲν τὰ δὲ. v. infra 5b, P. 2.65]
Ἀσκλαπιόν. τὸν μὲν εὐίππου Φλεγύα θυγάτηρ πρὶν τελέσαι, κατέβα. ἁ δ' ἄλλον αἴνησεν γάμον P. 3.8
—12.
τοὺς μὲν ὦν λύσαις ἄλλον ἀλλοίων ἀχέων ἔξαγεν τοὺς δὲ τομαῖς ἔστασεν ὀρθούς P. 3.47
—53.
τοὺς μὲν μαλακαῖς ἐπαοιδαῖς ἀμφέπων, τοὺς δὲ προσανέα πίνοντας P. 3.51
—2.
ἐν δ' αὖτε χρόνῳ τὸν μὲν ὀξείαισι θύγατρες ἐρήμωσαν πάθαις εὐφροσύνας μέρος αἱ τρεῖς τοῦ δὲ παῖς P. 3.97
—100. [διδύμους υἱοὺς τὸν μὲν Ἐχίονα, κεχλάδοντας ἥβᾳ, τὸν δ' Ἔρυτον (v. C. 1. a infra) P. 4.179] [ τὸ μὲν τὸ δ. v. 5. a infra P. 11.63—4.]
τὸ μὲν δώσει, τὸ δ' οὔπω P. 12.32

δράκοντας. τοὶ μὲν ἐς θαλάμου μυχὸν εὐρὺν ἔβαν. ὁ δ' ὀρθὸν μὲν ἄντεινεν κάρα N. 1.41
—3. φυᾷ δ' ἕκαστος διαφέρομεν βιο-
τὰν λαχόντες, ὁ μὲν τά, τὰ δ' ἄλλοι N. 7.55

μεταμειβόμενοι δ' ἐναλλὰξ ἁμέραν τὰν μὲν παρὰ πατρὶ φίλῳ Δὶ νέμονται, τὰν δ ὑπὸ κεύθεσι γαίας ἐν γυάλοις Θεράπνας N. 10.55
—6.
ἀλλὰ βροτῶν τὸν μὲν κενεόφρονες αὖχαι ἐξ ἀγαθῶν ἔβαλον· τὸν δ' αὖ καταμεμφθέντ ἄγαν ἰσχὺν οἰκείων παρέσφαλεν καλῶν θυμός N. 11.29
—30. ]ναόν· τὸν μὲν Ὑπερβορ[έοις] ἄνεμος ζαμενὴς ἔμειξ[ ], ὦ Μοῖσαι· τοῦ δὲ παντέχ[νοις] Ἁφαίστου παλάμαις καὶ Ἀθά[νας] τίς ὁ ῥυθμὸς ἐφαίνετο; ( τοῦ coni. Hunt: τον Π.) Πα... ἁ μὲν ἀχέταν Λίνον αἴλινον ὕμνει, ἁ δὲ Ὑμέναιον. ἁ δ' Ἰάλεμον Θρ. 3.. καὶ τοὶ μὲν ἵπποις γυμνασίοισι λτ;τεγτ;, τοὶ δὲ πεσσοῖς, τοὶ δὲ φορμίγγεσσι τέρπονται Θρ. 7. 6.

b with μέν only

I in μέν... δέ construction.
ἄνθεμα δὲ χρυσοῦ φλέγει, τὰ μὲν χερσόθεν ἀπ' ἀγλαῶν δενδρέων, ὕδωρ δ ἄλλα φέρβει O. 2.73

τὰ μὲν ἁμετέρα γλῶσσα ποιμαίνειν ἐθέλει, ἐκ θεοῦ δ' ἀνὴρ σοφαῖς ἀνθεῖ πραπίδεσσιν ὁμοίως O. 11.8

τῷ μὲν Ἀπόλλων ἅ τε Πυθὼ κῦδος ἐξ ἀμφικτιόνων ἔπορεν ἱπποδρομίας. ἀπὸ δ' αὐτὸν ἐγώ P. 4.66

τὸν μὲν οὐ γίνωσκον· ὀπιζομένων δ' ἔμπας τις εἶπεν καὶ τόδε P. 4.86

τοὶ μὲν ἀλλάλοισι ἀμειβόμενοι γάρυον τοιαῦτ. ἀνὰ δ P. 4.93
[ τὸ μὲν ὅτι μάκαρ δὲ καὶ νῦν ὅτι v. 5. a. infra. P. 5.15]
τὰ μὲν παρίκει· τῶν νῦν δὲ P. 6.44
[ὡς τὸ μὲν οὐδέν, ὁ δὲ χάλκεος ἀσφαλὲς αἰὲν ἕδος μένει οὐρανός v. 5. a infra N. 6.3]
τὸν μὲν ἡμέροις ἀνάγκας χερσὶ βαστάζεις ἕτερον δ' ἑτέραις N. 8.3
τοὶ μὲν ὦν Θήβαισι τιμάεντες ἀρχᾶθεν λέγονται ὅσσα δ ( τοί refers to Kleonymidai, v. 4) I. 4.7 “παῖδα τὸν μὲν ἄρρηκτον φυάν, θυμὸς δ' ἑπέσθω” anacoluthon I. 6.47
τὰν μὲν πόλιος ᾤκισσεν ἁγεμόνα. σὲ δ I. 8.19
“ἀλλὰ τὰ μὲν παύσατε. βροτέων δὲ λεχέων τύχοισα υἱὸν εἰσιδέτω θανόντ” I. 8.35
καὶ τὸ μὲν διδότω θεός. [ὁ δ] ἐχθρὰ νοήσαις ἤδη φθόνος οἴχεται Pae. 2.53

b in μέν... τε construction. [ τὸ μὲν ὅτι ὅτι τε v. 5. a. infra P. 2.31] [dub. N. 11.46]
ἕλκεα ῥῆξαν τὰ μὲν ἀμφ' Ἀχιλεῖ νεοκτόνῳ, ἄλλων τε μόχθων ἐν πολυφθόροις ἁμέραις N. 8.30
τὸ μὲν ἔλευσεν· ἴδον τ' ἄποπτα[ (τό = Medusa's head, Lobel: fort. adv.) *d. 4. 39.

g in μέν... ἀτάρ construction.
οἱ μὲν κρίθεν· ἀτὰρ Ἰάσων P. 4.168

c with δέ only

I in μέν... δέ construction.
παρὰ μὲν τιμίοις θεῶν οἵτινες ἔχαιρον εὐορκίαις ἄδακρυν νέμονται αἰῶνα, τοὶ δ' ἀπροσόρατον ὀκχέοντι πόνον O. 2.67

αἵ γε μὲν ἀνδρῶν πόλλ' ἄνω, τὰ δ αὖ κάτω κυλίνδοντ ἐλπίδες O. 12.6

πολλὰ δ' ἀνθρώποις παρὰ γνώμαν ἔπεσεν, ἔμπαλιν μὲν τέρψιος, οἱ δ ἀνιαραῖς ἀντικύρσαντες ζάλαις O. 12.11

πολλοῖσι μὲν γὰρ. τὰ δὲ καὶ ἀνδράσιν ἐμπρέπει P. 8.28

θάνεν μὲν αὐτὸς ἥρως Ἀτρείδας, ὁ δ' ἄρα γέροντα ξένον Στροφίον ἐξίκετο P. 11.34

πολλὰ μὲν γὰρ ἐν κονίᾳ χέρσῳ, τὰ δὲ γείτονι πόντῳ φάσομαι N. 9.43
ὃς μὲν ἀχρήμων, ἀφνεὸς τότε, τοὶ δ' αὖ πλουτέοντες fr. 124. 8. ἄλλαν μὲν σκέλος, ἄλλαν δὲ πᾶχ[υν], τὰν δὲ αὐχένα φέροισαν fr. 169. 31. ἀελλοπόδων μέν τιν' εὐφραίνοισιν ἵππων τιμαὶ καὶ στέφανοι, τοὺς δ ἐν πολυχρύσοις θαλάμοις βιοτά fr. 221. 3.

II
ὁ δέ... ὁ δέ. ἀφίκοντο δέ οἱ ξένοι ἔκ τ Ἄργεος ἔκ τε Θηβᾶν, οἱ δ Ἄρκαδες, οἱ δὲ καὶ Πισᾶται O. 9.67
—8.

III
ἄλλος δέ... ὁ δέ. ἄλλαι δὲ δὔἐν Κορίνθου πύλαις ἐγένοντ ἔπειτα χάρμαι, ταὶ δὲ καὶ Νεμέας Ἐφαρμόστῳ κατὰ κόλπον O. 9.87

IV where a μέν antithesis is suppressed.
διασωπάσομαι οἱ μόρον ἐγώ· τὸν δ' ἐν Οὐλύμπῳ φάτναι Ζηνὸς ἀρχαῖαι δέκονται O. 13.92
ὁπόθ' Ἁρμονίαν γᾶμεν βοῶπιν, ὁ δὲ Νηρέος εὐβούλου Θέτιν παῖδα κλυτάν ( ὁ μὲν Κάδμος suppressed) P. 3.92
Νεστόρειον γὰρ ἵππος ἅρμ' ἐπέδα. ὁ δ ἔφεπεν κραταιὸν ἔγχος P. 6.33

νέᾳ δ' εὐπραγίᾳ χαίρω τι· τὸ δ ἄχνυμαι, φθόνον ἀμειβόμενον τὰ καλὰ ἔργα P. 7.18

Ἀγρέα καὶ Νόμιον, τοῖς δ' Ἀρισταῖον καλεῖν P. 9.65
πολλὰ γάρ μιν παντὶ θυμῷ παρφαμένα λιτάνευεν. τοῖο δ' ὀργὰν κνίζον αἰπεινοὶ λόγοι (Hermann: τοῦ δὲ codd.: τοῖο refers to μιν) N. 5.32
αὐτίκα γὰρ ἦλθε Λήδας παῖς διώκων. τοὶ δ' ἐναντίον στάθεν N. 10.66

ἄραντο γὰρ νίκας ἀπὸ παγκρατίου τρεῖς ἀπ' Ἰσθμοῦ, τὰς δ ἀπ εὐφύλλου Νεμέας I. 6.61
ἐλάφῳ· τὰν δ' ἐπ αὐχένι στρέφοισαν κάρα *fr. 107a. 6*. irregularly coordinated with rel., νίκαις, αἷς ἐν ἀιόνεσσιν Ὀγχη[στοῦ κλυ]τᾶς ταῖς δὲ ναὸν Ἰτωνίας α[ ]α χαίταν στεφάνοις ἐκόσμηθεν Παρθ. 2. 47. esp. after a speech, cf. Führer, Formproblem, 41—4,
ὣς ἄρα μάνυε· τοὶ δ' οὔτ ὦν ἀκοῦσαι O. 6.52
τὸν δὲ θαρσήσαις ἀγανοῖσι λόγοις ὧδ' ἀμείφθη ( ὣς μὲν ἔφα suppressed) P. 4.101
τὸν δὲ Κένταυρος ζαμενὴς εὐθὺς ἀμείβετο P. 9.38

τὸ δ' ἐναντίον ἔσκεν N. 5.31

ὣς φάτο· τοὶ δ' ἐπὶ γλεφάροις νεῦσαν ἀθανάτοισιν I. 8.45

d followed by progressive μέν, emphasising esp. subject of preceding sentence.
τῷ μὲν ειλτ;γτ;πε O. 1.73

τὸν μὲν ἀγάλλων θεὸς ἔδωκεν O. 1.86

τᾷ μὲν ὁ Χρυσοκόμας πραύμητίν τ' Ἐλείθυιαν παρέστασ O. 6.41

τὸν μὲν κνιζομένα λεῖπε χαμαί O. 6.44

τῷ μὲν ὁ Χρυσοκόμας πλόον εἶπε O. 7.32

τοῖσι μὲν ἐξεύχετ O. 13.60

τῷ μὲν διδύμας χάριτας εἰ κατέβαν ἄγων P. 3.72
ἓν παρ' ἐσλὸν πήματα σύνδυο δαίονται βροτοῖς ἀθάνατοι. τὰ μὲν ὦν οὐ δύνανται νήπιοι κόσμῳ φέρειν (but perhaps τά refers to the general distribution of good and ill) P. 3.82 “φῶτα. τὸν μὲν Φοῖβος ἀμνάσει” P. 4.53
ὣς φάτο· τὸν μὲν ἐσελθόντ' ἔγνον ὀφθαλμοὶ πατρός P. 4.120
“ἀλλὰ καὶ σκᾶπτον μόναρχον καὶ θρόνος, τὰ μὲν ἄνευ ξυνᾶς ἀνίας λῦσον” P. 4.154 τῶν μὲν κλέος ἐσλὸν Εὐφάμου τ' ἐκράνθη σόν τε, Περικλύμεν” P. 4.174
Κυράναν. ἁ μὲν οὔθ' ἱστῶν παλιμβάμους ἐφίλησεν ὁδούς P. 9.18
ὁ μέν που τεοῖς τε μήδεσι τοῦτ' ἔπραξεν, τὸ δὲ συγγενὲς ἐμβέβακεν ἴχνεσιν πατρὸς (Tricl.: τεοῖσί τε codd.: τε del. Calliergus sec. Σ: ὁ refers to αὐτόν v. 8: perhaps ὁ μέν τὸ δέ is the correct antithesis) P. 10.11 τῷ μὲν Ἀλεκτρᾶν ὕπερθεν δαῖτα
πορσύνοντες αὔξομεν I. 4.61

τὸν μὲν κελήσατο νεκταρέαις σπονδαῖσιν ἄρξαι καρτεραίχμαν Ἀμφιτρυωνιάδαν I. 6.37

τοῦ μὲν ἀντίθεοι ἀρίστευον υἱέες I. 8.24

τὸν μὲν οὐδὲ θανόντ' ἀοιδαὶ ἔλιπον I. 8.56

τὸν μὲν οὐ κατελέγχει κριτοῦ γενεὰ πατραδελφεοῦ I. 8.65
adv. τὰ μέν, v. P. 11.46, N. 3.43, 5. b infra.

e followed by progressive δέ, emphasising some previous word(s) not normally subject of the preceding sentence.
Εὐρυτρίαιναν· ὁ δ' αὐτῷ πὰρ ποδὶ σχεδὸν φάνη O. 1.73

ἐπί οἱ νεφέλαν ἀγκύλῳ κρατὶ κατέχευας· ὁ δὲ κνώσσων ὑγρὸν νῶτον αἰωρεῖ P. 1.8
( θεραπόντεσσιν.) “ τῶν δ' ἐλάθοντο φρένες” P. 4.41 ( συγγενέσιν.)
οἱ δ' ἐπέσποντ P. 4.133
τῶν δ' ἀκούσαις αὐτὸς ὑπαντίασεν (where τῶν refers to the subject of the preceding sentence) P. 4.135 τὰ δ' οὐκ ἐπ ἀνδράσι κεῖται (where τά refers to ἐσλά v. 73) P. 8.76
ὁ δὲ τὰν εὐώλενον θρέψατο παῖδα Κυράναν P. 9.17
( ὥραισι καὶ Γαίᾳ.)
ταὶ δ' νέκταρ ἐν χείλεσσιν καὶ ἀμβροσίαν στάξοισι P. 9.62
ἢ ἑτέρῳ λέχει δαμαζομέναν ἔννυχοι πάραγον κοῖται; τὸ δὲ νέαις ἀλόχοις ἔχθιστον ἀμπλάκιον (τὸ = τοῦτο, summing up the previous sentence) P. 11.25 ( Τειρεσίαν.)
ὁ δέ οἱ φράζε καὶ παντὶ στρατῷ N. 1.61
( Μοισᾶν.)
αἱ δὲ πρώτιστον μὲν ὕμνησαν N. 5.25
( Νεοπτόλεμος.)
ὁ δ' ἀποπλέων Σκύρου μὲν ἅμαρτε N. 7.36
θρέψε δ' αἰχμὰν Ἀμφιτρύωνος. ὁ δ ὄλβῳ φέρτατος ἵκετ ἐς κείνου γενεάν (ὁ is referred variously to Zeus and Amphitryon) N. 10.13 ἄνδωκε δ' αὐτῷ Τελαμών, ὀ δ ἀνατείναις οὐρανῷ χεῖρας ἀμάχους αὔδασε (ὁ refers to αὐτῷ) I. 6.41 ( Θέμιν.) ἁ δὲ τίκτεν ἀλαθέας ὥρας (but perhaps δὲ balances μέν v. 1) fr. 30. 6. ὁ δὲ κηλεῖται Δ. 2. 21. ἁ δ' ἔργμασι[ Παρθ. 2.. ὁ δ ἄφ[αρ π]λεκτόν τε χαλκὸν ὑπερη[ (i. e. ?Herakles, who is the subject of the verb in v. 21) fr. 169. 26. τοὶ δ' αὐτ[ ?fr. 338. 9.

f exx. with μέν... δέ, where the connection is obscured by lacuna. τοὶ δ' ἐπίμπλαν ἐσσύμενοι πίθους (? μέν suppressed) *fr. 104b. 3* δελφῖνος, τὸν μὲν ἀκύμονος ἐν πόντου πελάγει αὐλῶν ἐκίνησ' ἐρατὸν μέλος (?rel.) fr. 140b. 16. οἱ μὲν κατωκάρα δεσμοῖσι δέδενται fr. 161.

g combined with γάρ. ( παισὶ Λήδας.)
τοῖς γὰρ ἐπέτραπεν Οὔλυμπόνδ' ἰὼν θαητὸν ἀγῶνα νέμειν O. 3.36
( Κόρινθον.)
ἐν τᾷ γὰρ Εὐνομία ναίει O. 13.6
( Κάστορος.)
τὸν γὰρ Ἴδας ἔτρωσεν N. 10.60
αἰῶνος εἴδωλον (nom.). τὸ γάρ ἐστι ἐκ θεῶν fr. 131b. 2.

h combined with καί. εὐναὶ δὲ παράτροποι ἐς κακότατ' ἀθρόαν ἔβαλον· ποτὶ καὶ τὸν ἵκοντ ( ποτὶ τὸν καὶ coni. Mommsen) P. 2.36 esp. with general reference to preceding, τὸ καὶ ἀνδρὶ κώμου δεσπότᾳ πάρεστι Συρακοσίῳ (i. e. τὸ ἐπὶ Ἀμφιαράου ῥηθέν Σ.) O. 6.17
ἰατὰ δ' ἐστὶ βροτοῖς σύν γ ἐλευθερίᾳ καὶ τά I. 8.15

ἔδοξ' ἦρα καὶ ἀθανάτοις, ἐσλόν γε φῶτα καὶ φθίμενον ὕμνοις θεᾶν διδόμεν. τὸ καὶ νῦν φέρει λόγον I. 8.61
cf. O. 6.56

i combined with
καί... γάρ. καὶ τοὶ γὰρ αἰθοίσας ἔχοντες σπέρμ' ἀνέβαν φλογὸς οὔ O. 7.48

j followed by
γε. περὶ δὲ πάξαις Ἄλτιν μὲν ὅγ' ἐν καθαρῷ διέκρινε O. 10.45

τὸν δὲ τετράκναμον ἔπραξε δεσμὸν ἑὸν ὄλεθρον ὅγ P. 2.41
[ τό γ' ἐπαρκέσαι (codd.: ὅ, τέ, σέ coni. edd.) N. 6.60]

k followed by ῥα. ( βάρβιτος). τόν ῥα Τέρπανδρός ποθ' ὁ Λέσβιος εὗρεν πρῶτος fr. 125. 1.

2 without particle.
Πηλεύς τε καὶ Κάδμος ἐν τοῖσιν ἀλέγονται O. 2.78

τὰν μεθέπων ἴδε καὶ κείναν χθόνα O. 3.31

ἐθελήσω τοῖσιν ἐξ ἀρχᾶς ἀπὸ Τλαπολέμου ξυνὸν ἀγγέλλων διορθῶσαι λόγον O. 7.20

ἀέθλοις. τῶν ἄνθεσι Διαγόρας ἐστεφανώσατο δίς O. 7.80

τοὺς ἀγαγὼν ζεύγλᾳ πέλασσεν μοῦνος P. 4.227

Διὸς ἀγῶνι. τόν, ὦ πολῖται, κωμάξατε Τιμοδήμῳ σὺν εὐκλέι νόστῳ N. 2.24
τὸν ἐθάμβεον Ἄρτεμίς τε καὶ θρασεἶ Ἀθάνα ( τόν = Jason, subj. of preceding sentence) N. 3.50 ( ῥῆμα.) τό μοι θέμεν —
ὕμνου προκώμιον εἴη N. 4.9
ἐλᾷ δὲ καὶ τέσσαρας ἀρετὰς ὁ θνατὸς αἰών, φρονεῖν δ' ἐνέπει τὸ παρκείμενον. τῶν οὐκ ἄπεσσι ( τῶν is referred by Σ, edd. to ἀρετάς, but should be considered as neuter) N. 3.76 Τηλεβόας ἔναρεν· τῷ ὄψιν ἐειδόμενος ἀθανάτων βασιλεὺς αὐλὰν ἐσῆλθεν (Mingarelli: ἔνα（ι）ρε（ν）· τί οἱ codd.: τῷ = Amphitryon) N. 10.15
οὐ γὰρ ἦν πενταέθλιον, ἀλλ' ἐφ ἑκάστῳ ἔργματι κεῖτο τέλος. τῶν ἀθρόοις ἀνδησάμενοι θαμάκις ἔρνεσιν χαίταις ῥεέθροισί τε Δίρκας ἔφανεν I. 1.28

λέγε, τίνες Κύκνον, τίνες Ἕκτορα πέφνον ; τοῖσιν Αἴγιναν προφέρει στόμα πάτραν I. 5.43
( νιν).
τὸν αἰνεῖν ἀγαθῷ παρέχει I. 8.69
( τοκεῦσιν.)
τοὶ σὺν πολέμῳ κτησάμενοι χθόνα πολύδωρον ὄλβον ἐγκατέθηκαν Pae. 2.59
πεφόρητο δ' ἐπ Αἰγαῖον θαμά (sc. Ἀστερία）· τᾶς ὁ κράτιστος ἐράσσατο. (ἇς = ἕως coni. G-H.) Πα. 7B. 50. ( Ἀφροδίτας.) ἀλλ' ἐγὼ τᾶς ἕκατι τάκομαι (Wil.: τᾶσδ Hermann: δεκατιτας codd.) fr. 123. 10. τοῖσι λάμπει μὲν μένος ἀελίου Θρ. 7. 1. with crasis, τοὔνεκα προῆκαν υἱὸν ἀθάνατοί οἱ πάλιν therefore O. 1.65

3 prospective, referring to a following rel. cl.
μῶμος ἐξ ἄλλων κρέμαται φθονεόντων τοῖς, οἷς ποτε O. 6.75

ὁ δ' ὄλβιος, ὃν φᾶμαι κατέχωντ ἀγαθαί O. 7.10

τοὺς μὲν ὦν, ὅσσοι μόλον, λύσαις ἄλλον ἀλλοίων ἀχέων ἔξαγεν P. 3.47
cf. P. 7.18 λόγον φέρεις, τὸν ὅνπερ ποτ' Ὀικλέος παῖς ἐν ἑπταπύλοις ἰδὼν υἱοὺς Θήβαις αἰνίξατο (cf. C. 6. infra) P. 8.39

4 τὰ καὶ τά, simm. ὁ μὰν πλοῦτος ἀρεταῖς δεδαιδαλμένος φέρει τῶν τε καὶ τῶν καιρὸν (τά τε ἀγαθὰ καὶ τὰ κακά Σ.) O. 2.53 ὁ Βάττου δ' ἕπεται παλαιὸς ὄλβος ἔμπαν τὰ καὶ τὰ νέμων ( τουτέστι τὰ ἀγαθὰ καὶ τὰ κακά Σ, but perhaps varied blessings is meant) P. 5.55 φαντί γε μὰν οὕτω κ' ἀνδρὶ παρμονίμαν θάλλοισαν εὐδαιμονίαν τὰ καὶ τὰ φέρεσθαι (ἀντὶ τοῦ ἀγαθὰ καὶ κακά Σ.) P. 7.22 σέο δ' ἀμφὶ τρόπῳ τῶν τε καὶ τῶν χρήσιες ( καὶ λόγων καὶ ἔργων Σ.) N. 1.30 ἔστιν δ' ἀφάνεια τύχας καὶ μαρναμένων, πρὶν τέλος ἄκρον ἱκέσθαι. τῶν τε γὰρ καὶ τῶν διδοῖ (ἄλλα γὰρ ἄλλοις ἡ τύχη δίδωσι Σ.) I. 4.33 Ζεὺς τά τε καὶ τὰ νέμει (καὶ τὰ ἀγαθὰ καὶ τὰ φαῦλα Σ.) I. 5.52
ὁ πάντα τοι τά τε καὶ τὰ τεύχων σόν ἐγγυάλιξεν ὄλβον εὐρύοπα Κρόνου παῖς Pae. 6.132

5 adverbial usages.

a τό. ἴων ἀκτῖσι βεβρεγμένος ἁβρὸν σῶμα· τὸ καὶ κατεφάμιξε καλεῖσθαί νιν χρόνῳ σύμπαντι μάτηρ τοῦτ' ὄνυμ ἀθάνατον wherefore O. 6.56 τὸ μὲν γὰρ πατρόθεν ἐκ Διὸς εὔχονται. τὸ δ' Ἀμυντορίδαι ματρόθεν Ἀστυδαμείας on the one side... on the other O. 7.23
αἱ δύο δ' ἀμπλακίαι φερέπονοι τελέθοντι· τὸ μὲν ἥρως ὅτι, ὅτι τε P. 2.31
τὸ μὲν, ὅτι βασιλεὺς ἐσσί. μάκαρ δὲ καὶ νῦν, ὅτι in the first place P. 5.15 τό σφ' ἔχει κυπαρίσσινον μέλαθρον ἀμφ ἀνδριάντι σχεδόν ( wherefore: others interpret τό as rel.) P. 5.39 υἱοὶ θεῶν, τὸ μὲν παρ' ἆμαρ ἕδραισι Θεράπνας, τὸ δ οἰκέοντας ἔνδον Ὀλύμπου at one time... at another P. 11.63—4.
ὡς τὸ μὲν οὐδέν, ὁ δὲ χάλκεος ἀσφαλὲς αἰὲν ἕδος μένει οὐρανός N. 6.3
[ τὸ μὲν. v. B. 1. b. β, Δ.. 3.] τὸ δὲ κοι[ Θρ. 3. 4.

b τά. τὰ δὲ Παρρασίῳ στρατῷ θαυμαστὸς ἐὼν φάνη then again O. 9.95 τὰ δὲ καί ποτ' ἐν ἀλκᾷ πρὸ Δαρδάνου τειχέων ἐδόκησαν then again O. 13.55 ὅθεν φαμὶ καὶ σὲ τὰν ἀπείρονα δόξαν εὑρεῖν τὰ μὲν ἐν ἱπποσόαισιν ἄνδρεσσι μαρνάμενον, τὰ δ' ἐν πεζομάχαισι sometimes... sometimes P. 2.65 τὰ δὲ καὶ ἀνδράσιν ἐμπρέπει then again P. 8.28 τὰ μὲν ἐν ἅρμασι καλλίνικοι πάλαι on the one hand i. e. as opp. to their exploits in athletics P. 11.46 Ἀχιλεὺς τὰ μὲν μένων Φιλύρας ἐν δόμοις at first N. 3.43 ἐν βάσσαισιν Ἰσθμοῦ δεξαμένῳ στεφάνους, τὰ δὲ κοίλᾳ λέοντος ἐν βαθυστέρνου νάπᾳ κάρυξε Θήβαν ἱπποδρομίᾳ κρατέων ( and further, μὲν being suppressed) I. 2.11

c τῶ, v. τῶ.

6 fragg.
τοὶ τα[ Pae. 6.70

ὁ δ' ἀντίον ἀνὰ κάρα τ ἄειρ[ε Pae. 20.10
ὁ δ ἐπραυν[ε fr. 215b. 4. οἱ δ' ἄφνει πεποίθασιν ( ὁ δ' πέποιθεν v. l.) fr. 219. C articular. (ὁ, τοῦ, τόν, οἱ, τῶν; ἁ, τᾶς, τᾷ, τάν, αἱ, ταί, τᾶν, ταῖς, τάς; τό nom., acc.; τά, τῶν, τά: in crasis O. 1.45, O. 13.38, N. 7.104; O. 10.70, I. 2.10)

1 c. subs. prop.

a
τᾶν Ὀλυμπιάδων O. 1.94

ἅ τε Πίσα O. 3.9

τᾶν κλεινᾶν Συρακοσσᾶν O. 6.6

ὁ Χρυσοκόμας O. 6.41
, O. 7.32
ὅ τ' ἐξελέγχων μόνος ἀλάθειαν ἐτήτυμον Χρόνος O. 10.53

τὰν ὀλβίαν Κόρινθον O. 13.4

τὰν πατρὸς ἀντία Μήδειαν θεμέναν γάμον αὐτᾷ O. 13.53

τᾶς ὀφιώδεος υἱόν ποτε Γοργόνος O. 13.64

ὁ καρτερὸς Βελλεροφόντας O. 13.84

ἅ τ' Ἐλευσίς, ἅ τ Εὔβοια O. 13.110

ἁ Μινύεια O. 14.19

τᾶν λιπαρᾶν ἀπὸ Θηβᾶν P. 2.3

ὅ τ' ἐναγώνιος Ἑρμᾶς P. 2.10

ὁ χρυσοχαῖτα Ἀπόλλων P. 2.16

τὸ Καστόρειον P. 2.69

ὁ δὲ Ῥαδάμανθυς P. 2.73

ἅ τε Πυθώ P. 4.66
τὸν μὲν Ἐχίονα τὸν δ' Ἔρυτον (contra Des Places, 44) P. 4.179
τᾶς εὐδαίμονος ἀμφὶ Κυράνας P. 4.276

αἱ μεγαλοπόλιες Ἀθᾶναι P. 7.1

ὁ χαιτάεις Λατοίδας P. 9.5

τὸ Πελινναῖον ἀπύει P. 10.4

τὸν Ἱπποκλέαν P. 10.57

τὸν Ἰφικλείδαν Ἰόλαον P. 11.59

ταῖς μεγάλαις Ἀθάναις N. 2.8

ἁ Σαλαμίς γε N. 2.13

τὸν μέγαν πολεμιστὰν Ἀλκυονῆ N. 4.27

ἁ Νεμέα μὲν ἄραρεν N. 5.44

διὰ τὸν ἁδυεπῆ γενέσθ' Ὅμηρον N. 7.21

ὁ καρτερὸς Αἴας N. 7.26

τὰν νεοκτίσταν ἐς Αἴτναν N. 9.2

ἐκ τᾶς ἱερᾶς Σικυῶνος N. 9.53

ὁ Τυνδαρίδας N. 10.73

τὸν ἀκερσεκόμαν Φοῖβον I. 1.7

ἁ Μοῖσα γὰρ I. 2.6

ταῖς λιπαραῖς ἐν Ἀθάναις I. 2.20

τὰν πυροφόρον Λιβύαν I. 4.54
τὰν κυανάμπυκα Θήβαν fr. 29. 3. ἁ Κοιογενὴς fr. 33d. 3.
ὁ παντελὴς Ἐνιαυτὸς Pae. 1.5

ἀλλ' ὅ γε Μέλαμπος Pae. 6.28

ἐς τὸν βαθὺν Τάρταρον Pae. 4.44

ὁ πόντιος Ὀρσιτρίαινα Pae. 9.47
ἐν ταῖς ἱεραῖς Ἀθάναις fr. 75. 4. ὦ ταὶ λιπαραὶ καὶ ἰοστέφανοι καὶ ἀοίδιμοι, Ἑλλάδος ἔρεισμα, κλειναὶ Ἀθᾶναι fr. 76. 1. τὰν λιπαρὰν μὲν Αἴγυπτον ἀγχίκρημνον fr. 82. ὁ [Λοξ]ίας Παρθ. 2. 3. ὁ Μοισαγέτας με καλεῖ χορεῦσαι Ἀπόλλων fr. 94c. 1. ἀπὸ τᾶς ἀγλαοκάρπου Σικελίας ( τᾶς del. Schr.) fr. 106. 6. τῶ[ν..Λο]κρῶν τις (supp. Wil.) fr. 140b. 4.

b c. subs., in apposition to subs. prop.
Χρόνος, ὁ πάντων πατήρ O. 2.17

Μήδειαν τὰν Πελίαο φονόν P. 4.250

Ζεὺς ὁ θεῶν σκοπὸς Pae. 6.94

Νηρεὺς δ' ὁ γέρων Pae. 15.4
Νόμος ὁ πάντων βασιλεύς fr. 169. 1.

c c. gen., sc.
υἱός. τὸν Αἰνησιδάμου O. 2.46
Σᾶμος ὁ Ἁλιροθίου (Boeckh: om. codd.) O. 10.70
βία Φώκου κρέοντος, ὁ τᾶς θεοῦ N. 5.13

d c. gen., in apposition.
πόσις ὁ πάντων Ῥέας ὑπέρτατον ἐχοίσας θρόνον O. 2.77

παῖς ὁ Λατοῦς O. 8.31

παῖς ὁ Λικυμνίου Οἰωνός O. 10.65

παῖς ὁ Θεαρίωνος Σωγένης N. 7.7

2 c. subs.

a
ὁ δὲ χρυσὸς O. 1.1

τὸ δὲ κλέος O. 1.93

ὁ μὰν πλοῦτος O. 2.53

τῶν δὲ μόχθων O. 8.7

ὁ δὲ λόγος P. 1.35

τὸν εὐεργέταν P. 2.24

ἁ δ' ἀρετὰ P. 3.114

ὁ γὰρ καιρὸς P. 4.286

ὁ πλοῦτος P. 5.1

τὸν εὐεργέταν P. 5.44

ὁ χρυσὸς N. 4.82

τᾶς θεοῦ N. 5.13
εἰ γὰρ ἦν ἓ τὰν ἀλάθειαν ἰδέμεν (Boeckh: ἑὰν, ἐὰν codd., Σ.) N. 7.25
ὁ μάρτυς N. 7.49

ἁ κέλευθος I. 2.33

ὁ κινητὴρ δὲ γᾶς I. 4.19

τίς ὁ ῥυθμὸς ἐφαίνετο; Pae. 8.67
τὰν παῖδα δε[ Πα. 22.i. 2. ἕρπε τὸ σὰν κίβδηλον Δ. 2. 2. τὸ δ' ὄργανον (acc.) *fr. 107b. 2* Διὸς παῖς ὁ χρυσός fr. 222. 1. ἁ μὲν πόλις Αἰακιδᾶν fr. 242.

b with intervening adj.
ὁ πολύφατος ὕμνος O. 1.8

ὁ μέγας δὲ κίνδυνος O. 1.81

τὸν ἀλαθῆ λόγον O. 1.28

τὸν εὐνομώτατον ἐς ἔρανον O. 1.37

τὸ δ' αἰεὶ παράμερον ἐσλὸν O. 1.99

τὸν ὅλον ἀμφὶ χρόνον O. 2.30

τὸν εὔφρονα πότμον O. 2.36

τὰν σὰν πόλιν O. 5.4

τὰν νέοικον ἕδραν O. 5.8

τὰν ποντίαν ὑμνέων παῖδ' Ἀφροδίτας O. 7.13

ὁ δ' ἐπαντέλλων χρόνος O. 8.28

ὁ μέλλων χρόνος O. 10.7

τὸν ἐγκώμιον ἀμφὶ τρόπον O. 10.77

τὸ συγγενὲς ἦθος O. 13.13

τὰ πολλὰ βέλεα O. 13.95
τὸν αἰχματὰν
κεραυνὸν P. 1.5

ὁ πᾶς χρόνος P. 1.46

τὸν προσέρποντα χρόνον P. 1.56

ὁ Φοίνιξ ὁ Τυρσανῶν τ' ἀλαλατὸς P. 1.72

τὰν εὔυδρον ἀκτὰν P. 1.79

αἱ δύο δ' ἀμπλακίαι P. 2.30

τὸν δὲ τετράκναμον δεσμὸν P. 2.40

τὰν πολύκοινον ἀγγελίαν P. 2.41

τὰν ἀπείρονα δόξαν P. 2.64

ὁ λάβρος στρατός P. 2.87

τὰν δ' ἔμπρακτον ἄντλει μαχανάν P. 3.62

ὁ μέγας πότμος P. 3.86
τὸ πάγχρυσον νάκος acc. P. 4.68
τὸν δὲ παμπειθῆ γλυκὺν πόθον P. 4.184

τὰν ἀκίνδυνον αἰῶνα P. 4.186
τὸ κλεεννότατον μέγαρον (nom.) P. 4.280
τὰν θεόσδοτον δύναμιν P. 5.13

αὐτοῦ μένων δ' ὁ θεῖος ἀνὴρ P. 6.38

τὰ καλὰ ἔργα P. 7.19

ὁ Παρνάσσιος μυχὸς P. 10.8

ὁ χάλκεος οὐρανὸς P. 10.27
τό τ' ἀναγκαῖον λέχος acc. P. 12.15 [ τὸν ἐχθρότατον μόρον codd. N. 1.65]
τὸν ἅπαντα χρόνον N. 1.69
ὁ θνατὸς αἰών (ὁ om. codd.: supp. Tricl.) N. 3.75
αἱ δὲ σοφαὶ Μοισᾶν θύγατρες N. 4.2

τῶν ἀγαθῶν ἐργμάτων N. 4.83

Μοισᾶν ὁ κάλλιστος χορός N. 5.23

τὰ καλά σφιν ἔργ' ἐκόμισαν N. 6.30

ταὶ μεγάλαι γὰρ ἀλκαὶ N. 7.12
τὰ τέρπν' ἄνθἐ Ἀφροδίσια acc. N. 7.53
τῶν ἀρειόνων ἐρώτων N. 8.5

τὸ κρατήσιππον γὰρ ἐς ἅρμ' ἀναβαίνων N. 9.4

τὰν βαθύστερνον χθόνα N. 9.25

Ἥρας τὸν εὐάνορα λαὸν N. 10.36
τὸ θαητὸν δέμας acc. N. 11.12
τὸν μόρσιμον αἰῶνα I. 7.41
τὸ πάντολμον σθένος acc. fr. 29. 4.
τὸν εὐρυφαρέτραν ἑκαβόλον Pae. 6.111

τὰν θεμίξενον ἀρετάν Pae. 6.131
ὁ παγκρατὴς κεραυνὸς Δ. 2. 1. τᾶν τ' ἐαριδρόπων ἀοιδᾶν fr. 75. 6. ἐπὶ τὸν κισσοδαῆ θεόν ( τὸν om. unus cod., fort. recte) fr. 75. 9. τὸν ἱρόθυτον θάνατον (verba secl. Sternbach) fr. 78. 3. τὸ σὸν αὐτοῦ μέλι γλάζεις (Wil.: τὸ σαυτου, τὸ σαυτα μέλος codd.) fr. 97. τὸ φαιδρὸν φάος acc. fr. 109. 2. τᾶς χλωρᾶς λιβάνου (Tittmann: τὰν, τὰς codd.) fr. 122. 3. τὸν λοιπὸν χρόνον fr. 133. 5. ταῖς ἱεραῖσι μελίσσαις fr. 158. τὸν ἀχρεῖον λόγον fr. 180. 1. ὁ κρατιστεύων λόγος fr. 180. 3.

c with intervening phrase, e. g. gen.
μετὰ τὸ ταχύποτμον ἀνέρων ἔθνος O. 1.66

μνᾶμα τῶν Οὐλυμπίᾳ κάλλιστον ἀέθλων O. 3.15
“ παρὰ τὸν ἁλικίας ἐοικότα χρόνον” O. 4.27
αἱ δὲ φρενῶν ταραχαὶ O. 7.30

ὀξειᾶν ὁ γενέθλιος ἀκτίνων πατὴρ O. 7.70

ὅ τ' ἐν Ἄργει χαλκὸς ἔγνω μιν O. 7.83
[ τὰν δ' ἔπειτ ἀνδρῶν μάχαν (codd.: μάχας Schr.) O. 8.58]
τὸ μὲν Ἀρχιλόχου μέλος O. 9.1

τὸν Ὀλυμπιονίκαν Ἀρχεστράτου παῖδα O. 10.1

ὁ δ' ἄῤ ἐν Πίσᾳ ἔλσαις ὅλον τε στρατὸν λᾴαν τε πᾶσαν Διὸς ἄλκιμος υἱὸς O. 10.43

τὸ δὲ κύκλῳ πέδον O. 10.46

τὰν πολέμοιο δόσιν O. 10.56

τὰν παρ' ὅρκον καὶ παρὰ ἐλπίδα κτίσιν O. 13.83

ταί θ' ὑπ Αἴτνας ὑψιλόφου καλλίπλουτοι πόλιες O. 13.111

ταί θ' ὑπὲρ Κύμας ἁλιερκέες ὄχθαι P. 1.18

τὰν Φιλοκτήταο δίκαν P. 1.50

ὁ Φοίνιξ ὁ Τυρσανῶν τ' ἀλαλατὸς P. 1.72
τᾶν πρὸ Κιθαιρῶνος μαχᾶν (Wil.: τὰν μάχαν codd.) P. 1.77
τὸν δὲ ταύρῳ χαλκέῳ καυτῆρα νηλέα νόον Φάλαριν P. 1.95

τὸν δ' ἀμφέποντ αἰεὶ δαίμον P. 3.108

τὸ Μηδείας ἔπος P. 4.9
“ τᾶν ἐν δυνατῷ φιλοτάτων” P. 4.92
τὰν Οἰδιπόδα σοφίαν P. 4.263

οὐ τὰν Ἐπιμηθέος ἄγων ὀψινόου θυγατέρα Πρόφασιν P. 5.27

τὸ καλλίνικον λυτήριον δαπανᾶν μέλος χαρίεν P. 5.106

ἁ δικαιόπολις ἀρεταῖς κλειναῖσιν Αἰακιδᾶν θιγοῖσα νᾶσος P. 8.22

τὸν δὲ σύγκοιτον γλυκὺν παῦρον ἐπὶ γλεφάροις ὕπνον ἀναλίσκοισα P. 9.23

τᾷ Δαιδάλου δὲ μαχαίρᾳ N. 4.59

ὁ δὲ λοιπὸς εὔφρων ποτὶ χρόνος ἕρποι N. 7.67

τὸ δ' ἐμὸν οὔ ποτε φάσει κέαρ N. 7.102

οἵ τ' ἀνὰ Σπάρταν Πελοπηιάδαι N. 8.12

ταῖς Ἐπάφου παλάμαις N. 10.5

καὶ τὸν Ἰσθμοῖ καὶ Νεμέᾳ στέφανον N. 10.25
τὸ δὲ Πεισάνδρου πάλαι αἷμ acc. N. 9.33 τὸ τεόν, χρύσασπι Θήβα, πρᾶγμα acc. I. 1.1
τὰν ἁλιερκέα Ἰσθμοῦ δειράδ I. 1.9

τεύχων τὸ μὲν ἅρματι τεθρίππῳ γέρας. τὰν Ἀσωποδώρου πατρὸς αἶσαν I. 1.34

τὸν Μινύα τε μυχόν I. 1.56
τὸ Δάματρος κλυτὸν ἄλσος Ἐλευσῖνα acc. I. 1.57
Πρωτεσίλα, τὸ τεὸν δ' ἀνδρῶν Ἀχαιῶν ἐν Φυλάκᾳ τέμενος συμβάλλομαι I. 1.58

οἱ μὲν πάλαι, ὦ Θρασύβουλε, φῶτες I. 2.1
νῦν δ' ἐφίητι λτ;τὸγτ; τὠργείου φυλάξαι ῥῆμ (supp. Heyne: om. codd.) I. 2.9
τὸ δ' ἐμὸν οὐκ ἄτερ Αἰακιδᾶν κέαρ ὕμνων γεύεται I. 5.19

ὁ Κλεονίκου παῖς I. 6.16

καὶ τὸν βουβόταν οὔρει ἴσον Φλέγραισιν εὑρὼν Ἀλκυονῆ I. 6.32

τὸν Ἀργείων τρόπον I. 6.58

τὰν Ψαλυχιδᾶν τε πάτραν I. 6.63

τόν δὲ Θεμιστίου ὀρθώσαντες οἶκον I. 6.65

τίνι τῶν πάρος, ὦ μάκαιρα Θήβα, καλῶν ἐπιχωρίων I. 7.1

ὅ τοι πτερόεις ἔρριψε Πάγασος I. 7.44

τὸν ὑπὲρ κεφαλᾶς γε Ταντάλου λίθον I. 8.9
τὰν Ἀγαμήδει Τρεφωνίῳ θ' ἑκαταβόλου συμβουλίαν λαβών fr. 2. 2. τὰν Διωνύσου πολυγαθέα τιμὰν fr. 29. 5. ἄνακτα τὸν πάντων ὑπερβάλλοντα Χρόνον μακάρων fr. 33. τὸ μηδὲν ἄγαν ἔπος acc. fr. 35b. τὸν τρικάρανον Πτωίου κευθμῶνα κατέσχεθε fr. 51b.
τὰν δὲ λαῶν γενεὰν Pae. 1.9

[ὁ δ] ἐχθρὰ νοήσαις ἤδη φθόνος Pae. 2.54
τὸ δὲ οἴκοθεν ἄστυ nom. Πα.. 32. τὰ θεῶν βουλεύματ acc. fr. 61. 3. τὰς δὲ Θεοξένου ἀκτῖνας fr. 123. 2. τὰν ἐνθάδε νύκτα Θρ.. 2. τὸν ἄπειρον ἐρεύγονται σκότον fr. 130 ad Θρ.. τὸν ὕπερθεν ἅλιον fr. 133. 2. τὸν Ἰάσονος εὔδοξον πλόον fr. 172. 6. ταὶ δὲ Χίρωνος ἐντολαί (Hermann: αἱ codd.) fr. 177c. ὁ γὰρ ἐξ οἴκου ποτὶ μῶμον ἔπαινος κίρναται *fr. 181* ἁ Μειδύλου δ' αὐτῷ γενεά fr. 190.

d where a sentence or major part thereof intervenes between article and noun, so that the usage is almost demonstrative.
τῶν γὰρ πεπραγμένων ἔργων τέλος O. 2.15
ἅ μ' ἐθέλοντα προσέρπει ματρομάτωρ ἐμὰ (but v. A. 1. a supra) O. 6.83
τὸ γὰρ ἐμφυὲς ἦθος O. 11.19

αἵ γε μὲν ἀνδρῶν ἐλπίδες O. 12.5

ταὶ Διωνύσου χάριτες O. 13.18

ὁ δ' ἦρα χρόνῳ ἵκετ ἀνὴρ ἔκπαγλος P. 4.78
[ τάν ποτε Καλλίσταν ἀπῴκησαν χρόνῳ νᾶσον (Boeckh: ἂν codd.: ἔν Chaeris) P. 4.258]
ὁ Βάττου δ' ἕπεται παλαιὸς ὄλβος P. 5.55
τὸ δ' ἐμὸν γαρύει ἀπὸ Σπάρτας ἐπήρατον κλέος (v. γαρύω) P. 5.72
τὸ δ' ἐν ποσί μοι τράχον ἴτω τεὸν χρέος P. 8.32
“ φυᾷ τὸ γενναῖον ἐπιπρέπει ἐκ πατέρων παισὶ λῆμα” P. 8.44 “ ὁ δὲ καμὼν προτέρᾳ πάθᾳἌδραστος ἥρως” P. 8.48
ὁ δὲ τὰν εὐώλενον θρέψατο παῖδα Κυράναν P. 9.17

ἤτοι τό τε θεσπέσιον Φόρκοἰ ἀμαύρωσεν γένος P. 12.13

ὄφρα τὸν Εὐρυάλας γόον P. 12.20

τὰν πολυξέναν νᾶσον Αἴγιναν N. 3.2

ὁ δ' εὖ φράσθη Ζεὺς N. 5.34

ὁ δὲ χάλκεος οὐρανός N. 6.3

ὁ δ' Ζεὺς N. 9.24

ἐν ᾇ καὶ τὸν ἀδείμαντον Ἀλκμήνα τέκεν παῖδα I. 1.12
[cf.
τὸν μὲν κτἑ I. 6.37
]
ὁ δ' ἀθανάτων μὴ θρασσέτω φθόνος I. 7.39

τὸ δὲ πρὸ ποδὸς ἄρειον ἀεὶ βλέπειν χρῆμα πάν I. 8.12
ἁ δὲ τὰς τίκτεν ἀλαθέας ὥρας fr. 30. 6.
ὁ πάντα τοι τά τε καὶ τὰ τεύχων σὸν ἐγγυάλιξεν ὄλβον εὐρύοπα Κρόνου παῖς Pae. 6.132
τὸν ἀοιδότατον τρέφον κάλαμον fr. 70. 1. ὁ δὲ Καινεὺς Θρ. 6. 7. repeated, ὁ ζαμενὴς δ' ὁ χοροιτύπος ὃν Μαλέας ὄρος ἔθρεψε, Ναίδος ἀκοίτας Σιληνός fr. 156. cf.
πρὶν γενέσθαι τὰν Ἀδράστου τάν τε Καδμείων ἔριν N. 8.51

e in apposition, with phrase following.
στέφανων ἄωτον γλυκὺν τῶν Οὐλυμπίᾳ O. 5.2
ἐρέω ταύταν χάριν, τὰν δ' ἔπειτ ἀνδρῶν μάχας ἐκ παγκρατίου (Schr.: μάχαν codd.) O. 8.58
ὕβριν ἰδὼν τὰν πρὸ Κύμας P. 1.72

τῶν δ' Ὁμήρου καὶ τόδε συνθέμενος ῥῆμα πόρσυν P. 4.277

φροντίδα τὰν πὰρ ποδός P. 10.62

βοτάνα τέ νίν ποθ' ἁ λέοντος νικάσαντ ἤρεφε N. 6.42
παίδων τε παῖδες ἔχοιεν αἰεὶ γέρας τό περ νῦν καὶ ἄρειον ὄπιθεν (fort. rel.?) N. 7.101
κρέσσων δὲ καππαύει δίκαν τὰν πρόσθεν ἀνήρ N. 9.15
† ἱπποτρόφον ἄστυ τὸ Προίτοιο θάλησεν† N. 10.41

3 c. adj., part.

a adj.
ἅπαντα τὰ μείλιχα O. 1.30

τὸ δ' ἔσχατον O. 1.113

τὰ δ' ἐν τᾷδε Διὸς ἀρχᾷ ἀλιτρὰ O. 2.58

ἐς δὲ τὸ πὰν ἑρμανέων χατίζει O. 2.85

οἱ δύο O. 8.38

τὰ τέρπν O. 9.28

τὰ τοιαῦτ O. 9.40

τὸ δὲ σαφανὲς O. 10.55

τά τε τερπνὰ καὶ τὰ γλυκέα O. 14.5

οἱ σοφοὶ P. 2.88

τοῖς ἀγαθοῖς P. 2.96

τὰ καλὰ τρέψαντες ἔξω P. 3.83

τὸν μονοκρήπιδα P. 4.75

τοῖς ἀγαθοῖς P. 4.285

ὁ δ' ἀρχαγέτας ἔδωκ Ἀπόλλων P. 5.60
[ τὸ δ' ἐμὸν (v. γαρύω) P. 5.72] τὸ λοιπὸν (adv.) P. 5.118 τὸ μαλθακὸν acc. P. 8.6
τὸ μὲν μέγιστον τόθι χαρμάτων ὤπασας P. 8.64
τὸ τερπνὸν nom. P. 8.93
τὸν ἐχθρὸν P. 9.95
τὸ δὲ συγγενὲς nom. P. 10.12
τῶν δ' ἐν Ἑλλάδι τερπνῶν P. 10.19
τὰ μέγιστ acc. P. 10.24 Μοῖσα, τὸ δὲ τεόν nom. P. 11.41
τὰ μέσα P. 11.52

τὸ δὲ μόρσιμον οὐ παρφυκτὸν P. 12.30

τὸ γὰρ οἰκεῖον πιέζει N. 1.53

τὸ καλλίνικον N. 3.18

τὰ μακρὰ N. 4.33

τὸ μόρσιμον N. 4.61
, N. 7.44
τὸ συγγενὲς N. 6.8

τὸ τερπνὸν N. 7.74

τὸ μὲν λαμπρὸν τῶν δ' ἀφάντων N. 8.34

τὸ τὠργείου φυλάξαι ῥῆμ I. 2.9

τὸν ἐσλόν I. 2.7

τῶν ἀπειράτων I. 4.30

τὸν ἐχθρόν I. 4.48

τὸν φέρτατον θεῶν I. 7.5

τὰ μακρὰ I. 7.43

τὸ δὲ πὰρ δίκαν γλυκὺ I. 7.47

τὸ μὲν ἐμόν I. 8.38
ὁ κράτιστος Πα. 7B. 50.
τὸ πάντων ἔργων ἱερώτ[ατον] Pae. 8.74
τὸ δὲ μὴ Δὶ φίλτερον fr. 81 ad Δ. 2. τὸ κοινόν fr. 109. τὸ πάν fr. 140d. τὸ βιαιότατον fr. 169. 3.

b in apposition.
παῖς ὁ κισσοφόρος O. 2.27

ἄλσος ἁγνὸν τὸ τεὸν O. 5.12

θεῶν βασιλεὺς ὁ μέγας O. 7.34

καλλίνικος ὁ τριπλόος κεχλαδὼς O. 9.2

πλοῦτος ὁ λαχὼν ποιμένα O. 10.88

Χίρωνα τὸν ἀποιχόμενον P. 3.3

θύγατρες αἱ τρεῖς P. 3.97
“ Ζεὺς ὁ γενέθλιος ἀμφοτέροις” P. 4.167 καί τινα σὺν πλαγίῳ ἀνδρῶν κόρῳ στείχοντα τὸν ἐχθρότατον φᾶσέ νιν δώσειν μόρῳ (Boeckh: μόρον codd.: τῷ ἐχθροτάτῳ μόρῳ Beck: alii alia) N. 1.65
ὁ Τελαμωνιάδας N. 4.47

λόγον Αἰακοῦ παίδων τὸν ἅπαντα N. 4.72
[ προπάτωρ ὁ σὸς (codd.: ὁ del. Boeckh) N. 4.89] ὅμιλος ἀνδρῶν ὁ πλεῖστος N.7.24.
ὡς παισὶ κλέος μὴ τὸ δύσφαμον προσάψω N. 8.37

ζωᾶς ἄωτον τὸν ἄλπνιστον I. 5.12

κόμπον τὸν ἐοικότ I. 5.24

Ζεὺς ὁ πάντων κύριος I. 5.53

λόγον τὸν ἐθέλοντα γενέσθαι Pae. 2.79

Ἀπόλλων ὁ χρυσοκόμας Pae. 5.41
Τέρπανδρός ποθ' ὁ Λέσβιος fr. 125. 1. θεὸς ὁ πάντα τεύχων βροτοῖς fr. 141. ἐσθὰς δ' ἀμφοτέρα μιν ἔχεν, ἅ τε Μαγνήτων ἐπιχώριος ἁρμόζοισα θαητοῖσι γυίοις, ἀμφὶ δὲ (where the τε δέ connection is irregular) P. 4.80

c c. part.
ὁ νικῶν O. 1.97

τὸ μέλλον O. 2.56

σοφὸς ὁ πολλὰ εἰδὼς φυᾷ O. 2.86

ὁ δὲ πάλᾳ κυδαίνων Ἔχεμος Τεγέαν O. 10.66

τῶν δὲ μελλόντων O. 12.9

τά τ' ἐσσόμενα O. 13.103

τῶν ἀπεόντων P. 3.20

τὰ ἐοικότα P. 3.59

ὁ δὲ καλόν τι νέον λαχών P. 8.88

τό γ' ἐν ξυνῷ πεποναμένον εὖ P. 9.93

ὁ δὲ χαμηλὰ πνέων P. 11.30

τὸ παρκείμενον N. 3.75

λόγον ὁ μὴ συνιείς N. 4.31

τὸ δὲ πὰρ ποδὶ ναὸς ἑλισσόμενον αἰεὶ κυμάτων N. 6.55

ὁ πονήσαις δὲ νόῳ I. 1.40

τὸ σεσωπαμένον I. 1.63

τῶν τότ' ἐόντων I. 4.27
ὁ δ' ἐθέλων τε καὶ δυνάμενος ἁβρὰ πάσχειν fr. 2. 1. τιν' ἄνδρα τῶν θανόντων fr. 4. τῷ παρέοντι fr. 43. 4.
τῶν γὰρ ἀντομένων Pae. 2.42

τὸ δ' εὐβουλίᾳ τε καὶ αἰδοῖ ἐγκείμενον Pae. 2.52

ὁ δὲ καλόν τι πονήσαις Pae. 2.66

τά τ ἐόντα τε κα[ὶ ] πρόσθεν γεγενημένα Pae. 8.83
ὁ δὲ μηδὲν ἔχων Παρθ. 1.. τὸ πεπρωμένον fr. 232.

4 c. inf., pro subs.
τὸ δὲ τυχεῖν O. 2.51

τὸ λαλαγῆσαι O. 2.97

τὸ διδάξασθαι O. 8.59

τὸ μὴ προμαθεῖν O. 8.60

τό γε λοιδορῆσαι O. 9.37

τὸ καυχᾶσθαι O. 9.38

τὸ δὲ παθεῖν P. 1.99

τὸ πλουτεῖν δὲ P. 2.56

καὶ τὸ σιγᾶν N. 5.18

ὦ Μέγα, τὸ δ' αὖτις τεὰν ψυχὰν κομίξαι οὔ μοι δυνατόν N. 8.44
τὸ δὲ φυγεῖν Δ... τὸ γὰρ πρὶν γενέ[σθαι (G-H, sed alia possis) Παρθ. 1. 20.

5 c. adv.

a pro subs.
τῶν γε νῦν O. 1.105

τὸ πόρσω δ' ἐστὶ σοφοῖς ἄβατον κἀσόφοις O. 3.44

νεότατος τὸ πάλιν ἤδη O. 10.87

τῶν πάροιθε P. 2.60

τὰ πόρσω P. 3.22

τῶν πάλαι P. 6.40

τῶν νῦν δὲ P. 6.43
ὁ δ' ἐχθρὰ νοήσαις ἤδη φθόνος οἴχεται τῶν πάλαι προθανόντων ( τῶν προθανόντων?) P. 2.56

b pro adv.
τὸ πολλάκις O. 1.32

ἀμφοτέροις ὁμοῖοι τοκεῦσι, τὰ ματρόθεν μὲν κάτω τὰ δ' ὕπερθε πατρός P. 2.48

εἶδον γὰρ τὰ πόλλ' ἐν ἀμαχανίᾳ ψογερὸν Ἀρχίλοχον P. 2.54

τὸ νῦν τε καὶ τὸ λοιπὸν P. 5.117
“ τὸ δὲ οἴκοθεν ἀντία πράξει” P. 8.51 “ τὸ πρῶτον” P. 9.41
τὸ πρίν P. 11.39

τό γέ νυν P. 11.44

τὰ πόλλ N. 2.2

τὸ πρῶτον N. 3.49

τὸ λοιπὸν N. 7.45
τὸ πάροιθε fr. 33d. 1. τίμαθεν γὰρ τὰ πάλαι τὰ νῦν τ' Παρθ. 2. 42.

6 c. subs. phrase.
τὸ δὲ φυᾷ κράτιστον ἅπαν O. 9.100

Ἰσθμοῖ τά τ' ἐν Νεμέᾳ O. 13.98

τὰ δ' Ὀλυμπίᾳ O. 13.101

τὰ δ' ὑπ ὀφρύι Παρνασσίᾳ O. 13.106

ἀνέχει τότε μὲν τὰ κείνων P. 2.89

τὸ πὰρ ποδός P. 3.60

τὰ δ' εἰς ἐνιαυτὸν P. 10.63

τῶν γὰρ ἀνὰ πόλιν εὑρίσκων τὰ μέσα μακροτέρῳ ὄλβῳ τεθαλότα P. 11.52

τὰ δ' οἴκοι μάσσον ἀριθμοῦ N. 2.23

Γαδείρων τὸ πρὸς ζόφον οὐ περατόν N. 4.69

τὰ μὲν ἀμφὶ πόνοις ὑπερώτατα N. 8.42

τὰ δ' ἄλλαις ἁμέραις πολλὰ μὲν ἐν κονίᾳ χέρσῳ, τὰ δὲ γείτονι πόντῳ φάσομαι N. 9.42

μακρὰ μὲν τὰ Περσέος ἀμφὶ Μεδοίσας Γοργόνος N. 10.4
τὸ δ' ἐκ Διὸς ἀνθρώποις σαφὲς οὐχ ἕπεται τέκμαρ as for what comes from Zeus N. 11.43 but cf. 2d supra.

7 ὁ αὐτός, the same
τωὔτ' ἐπὶ χρέος O. 1.45

μηνός τε τωὐτοῦ O. 13.38
ταὐτὰ δὲ τρὶς τετράκι τ' ἀμφιπολεῖν ἀπορία τελέθει (Σ: ταῦτα codd.) N. 7.104

8 fragg. ]
ογοι τῶν γε δε[ Pae. 6.176
ὁ μέγιστ[ος Πα. 7. a. 3.
τῷ δ[ Pae. 10.22
πολ]λὰ μὲν τὰ πάροιθ' τὰ δ α[ Παρθ. 2. 31. τὸ δ ἀλαθε[ ] κατέστα φάος[ ?fr. 337. 9.

Lexicon to Pindar > ὅ
3 θεός

θεός, οῦ (Hom.+; Herm. Wr.; ins, pap, LXX, pseudepigr., Philo, Joseph.) ὁ and ἡ, voc. θεέ (Pisidian ins [JHS 22, 1902, 355] θέ; PGM 4, 218 θεὲ θεῶν; 7, 529 κύριε θεὲ μέγιστε; 12, 120 κύριε θεέ; 13, 997; LXX [Thackeray 145; PKatz, Philo’s Bible ’50, 152f]; ApcMos 42; Jos., Ant. 14, 24 ὦ θεὲ βασιλεῦ τ. ὅλων; SibOr 13, 172 βασιλεῦ κόσμου θεέ) Mt 27:46, more frequently (s. 2 and 3c, h below) ὁ θεός (LXX; ParJer 6:12; ApcEsdr 7:5; ApcMos 32; B-D-F §147, 3m; JWackernagel, Über einige antike Anredeformen 1912; Mlt-H. 120). On the inclusion or omission of the art. gener. s. W-S. §19, 13d; B-D-F §254, 1; 268, 2; Rob. 758; 761; 780; 786; 795; Mlt-Turner 174; BWeiss, D. Gebr. des Artikels bei den Gottesnamen, StKr 84, 1911, 319–92; 503–38 (also published separately). The sg. article freq. suggests personal claim on a deity. ‘God, god’.

① In the Gr-Rom. world the term θεός primarily refers to a transcendent being who exercises extraordinary control in human affairs or is responsible for bestowal of unusual benefits, deity, god, goddess (s. on θεά) Ac 28:6; 2 Th 2:4 (cp. SibOr 5, 34 ἰσάζων θεῷ αὐτόν; Ar. 4, 1 οὐκ εἰσὶ θεοί; Tat. 10, 1 θεὸς … κύκνος γίνεται …; Ath. 18, 3 θεός τις δισώματος); θεὸς Ῥαιφάν Ac 7:43 (Am 5:26; s. entry Ῥαιφάν). οὐδεὶς θεὸς εἰ μὴ εἷς there is no god but one 1 Cor 8:4 (cp. AcPl Ha 1, 17 restored). θεοῦ φωνὴ καὶ οὐκ ἀνθρώπου Ac 12:22.—ἡ θεός the (female) god, goddess (Att., later more rarely; Peripl. Eryth. c. 58; Lucian, Dial. Deor. 17, 2; SIG 695, 28; ins, one of which refers to Artemis, in Hauser p. 81f; Jos., Ant. 9, 19; Ar. 11, 2 [Artemis]; Ath. 29, 2 [Ino]) Ac 19:37.—Pl. Ac 7:40 (Ex 32:1). Cp. 14:11; 19:26; PtK 2 p. 14, 21. εἴπερ εἰσὶν λεγόμενοι θεοί even if there are so-called gods 1 Cor 8:5a; s. vs. 5b (on θεοὶ πολλοί cp. Jos., Ant. 4, 149.—Maximus Tyr. 11, 5a: θ. πολλοί w. εἷς θ. πατήρ). οἱ φύσει μὴ ὄντες θεοί those who by nature are not really gods Gal 4:8b (cp. Ar. 4, 2 μὴ εἶναι τὸν οὐρανὸν θεόν al.). θεοὶ … λίθινοι etc. AcPl Ha 1, 18 (cp. JosAs 10:13 τοὺς χρυσοῦς καὶ ἀργυροῦς). Of the devil μὴ ὢν θεός AcPlCor 2:15.

② Some writings in our lit. use the word θ. w. ref. to Christ (without necessarily equating Christ with the Father, and therefore in harmony w. the Shema of Israel Dt 6:4; cp. Mk 10:18 and 4a below), though the interpretation of some of the pass. is in debate. In Mosaic and Gr-Rom. traditions the fundamental semantic component in the understanding of deity is the factor of performance, namely saviorhood or extraordinary contributions to one’s society. Dg. 10:6 defines the ancient perspective: ὸ̔ς ἃ παρὰ τοῦ θεοῦ λάβων ἔχει, ταῦτα τοῖς ἐπιδεομένοις χορηγῶν, θεὸς γίνεται τῶν λαμβανάντων one who ministers to the needy what one has received from God proves to be a god to the recipients (cp. Sb III, 6263, 27f of a mother). Such understanding led to the extension of the mng. of θ. to pers. who elicit special reverence (cp. pass. under 4 below; a similar development can be observed in the use of σέβομαι and cognates). In Ro 9:5 the interpr. is complicated by demand of punctuation marks in printed texts. If a period is placed before ὁ ὢν κτλ., the doxology refers to God as defined in Israel (so EAbbot, JBL 1, 1881, 81–154; 3, 1883, 90–112; RLipsius; HHoltzmann, Ntl. Theol.² II 1911, 99f; EGünther, StKr 73, 1900, 636–44; FBurkitt, JTS 5, 1904, 451–55; Jülicher; PFeine, Theol. d. NTs⁶ ’34, 176 et al.; RSV text; NRSV mg.). A special consideration in favor of this interpretation is the status assigned to Christ in 1 Cor 15:25–28 and the probability that Paul is not likely to have violated the injunction in Dt 5:7.—If a comma is used in the same place, the reference is to Christ (so BWeiss; EBröse, NKZ 10, 1899, 645–57 et al.; NRSV text; RSV mg. S. also εἰμί 1.—Undecided: THaering.—The transposition by the Socinian scholar JSchlichting [died 1661] ὧν ὁ=‘to whom belongs’ was revived by JWeiss, D. Urchristentum 1917, 363; WWrede, Pls 1905, 82; CStrömman, ZNW 8, 1907, 319f). In 2 Pt 1:1; 1J 5:20 the interpretation is open to question (but cp. ISmyrna McCabe.0010, 100 ὁ θεὸς καὶ σωτὴρ Ἀντίοχος). In any event, θ. certainly refers to Christ, as one who manifests primary characteristics of deity, in the foll. NT pass.: J 1:1b (w. ὁ θεός 1:1a, which refers to God in the monotheistic context of Israel’s tradition. On the problem raised by such attribution s. J 10:34 [cp. Ex 7:1; Ps 81:6]; on θεός w. and without the article, acc. to whether it means God or the Logos, s. Philo, Somn. 1, 229f; JGriffiths, ET 62, ’50/51, 314–16; BMetzger, ET 63, ’51/52, 125f), 18b. ὁ κύριός μου καὶ ὁ θεός μου my Lord and my God! (nom. w. art.=voc.; s. beg. of this entry.—On a resurrection as proof of divinity cp. Diog. L. 8, 41, who quotes Hermippus: Pythagoras returns from a journey to Hades and appears among his followers [εἰσέρχεσθαι εἰς τὴν ἐκκλησίαν], and they consider him θεῖόν τινα) J 20:28 (on the combination of κύριος and θεός s. 3c below). Tit 2:13 (μέγας θ.). Hb 1:8, 9 (in a quot. fr. Ps 44:7, 8). S. TGlasson, NTS 12, ’66, 270–72. Jd 5 P⁷². But above all Ignatius calls Christ θεός in many pass.: θεὸς Ἰησοῦς Χριστός ITr 7:1; Χριστὸς θεός ISm 10:1. ὁ θεὸς ἡμῶν IEph ins; 15:3; 18:2; IRo ins (twice); 3:3; IPol 8:3; τὸ πάθος τοῦ θεοῦ μου IRo 6:3. ἐν αἵματι θεοῦ IEph 1:1. ἐν σαρκὶ γενόμενος θεός 7:2. θεὸς ἀνθρωπίνως φανερούμενος 19:3. θεὸς ὁ οὕτως ὑμᾶς σοφίσας ISm 1:1.—Hdb. exc. 193f; MRackl, Die Christologie d. hl. Ign. v. Ant. 1914. ὁ θεός μου Χριστὲ Ἰησοῦ AcPl Ha 3, 10; Χριστὸς Ἰησοῦς ὁ θ[εός] 6, 24; cp. ln. 34 (also cp. Just., A I, 63, 15, D. 63, 5 al.; Tat. 13, 3; Ath. 24, 1; Mel., P. 4, 28 al.).—SLösch, Deitas Jesu u. antike Apotheose ’33. Cp. AWlosk, Römischer Kaiserkult ’78.

③ God in Israelite/Christian monotheistic perspective, God the predom. use, somet. with, somet. without the art.

ⓐ ὁ θεός Mt 1:23; 3:9; 5:8, 34; Mk 2:12; 10:18; 13:19 (cp. TestJob 37:4); Lk 2:13; J 3:2b; Ac 2:22b; Gal 2:6 al. With prep. εἰς τὸν θ. Ac 24:15. ἐκ τοῦ θ. J 8:42b, 47; 1J 3:9f; 4:1ff, 6f; 5:1, 4; 2 Cor 3:5; 5:18 al.; ἐν τῷ θ. Ro 5:11; Col 3:3 (Ath. 21, 1). ἔναντι τοῦ θ. Lk 1:8; ἐπὶ τὸν θ. Ac 15:19; 26:18, 20 (Just., D. 101, 1); ἐπὶ τῷ θ. Lk 1:47 (Just., D. 8, 2); παρὰ τοῦ θ. J 8:40 (Ar. 4, 2; Just., A I, 33, 6 al.; without art. Just., D. 69, 6 al.). παρὰ τῷ θ. Ro 2:13; 9:14 (Just., A I, 28, 3; Tat. 7, 1; Ath. 31, 2 al.); πρὸς τὸν θ. J 1:2; Ac 24:16; AcPl Ha 3, 8 (Just., D. 39, 1 al.; Mel., HE 4, 26, 13 al.); τὰ πρὸς τὸν θ. Hb 2:17; 5:1; Ro 15:17 is acc. of respect: with respect to one’s relation to God or the things pert. to God, in God’s cause (s. B-D-F §160; Rob. 486. For τὰ πρὸς τ. θ. s. Soph., Phil. 1441; X., De Rep. Lac. 13, 11; Aristot., Pol. 1314b, 39; Lucian, Pro Imag. 8; Mitt-Wilck. I/2, 109, 3 [III B.C.] εὐσεβὴς τὰ πρὸς θεούς; Ex 4:16; 18:19; Jos., Ant. 9, 236 εὐσεβὴς τὰ πρὸς τ. θεόν). τὰ πρὸς τ[ὸν] θεὸν ἐτήρουσαν, when they were observant of matters pert. to God AcPl Ha 8, 13 (=τα π̣ρος θ̣̄ν̄| ἐτήρουσαν Ox 1602, 10f=BMM recto 16 restored after the preceding).

ⓑ without the art. Mt 6:24; Lk 2:14; 20:38; J 1:18a; Ro 8:8, 33b; 2 Cor 1:21; 5:19; Gal 2:19; 4:8f; 2 Th 1:8; Tit 1:16; 3:8; Hb 3:4; AcPl Ha 8, 20=BMM recto 25 (s. also HSanders’ rev. of Ox 1602, 26, in HTR 31, ’38, 79, n. 2, Ghent 62 verso, 6); AcPlCor 1:15; 2:19, 26. W. prep. ἀπὸ θεοῦ J 3:2a; 16:30 (Just., A II, 13, 4 τὸν … ἀπὸ ἀγεννήτου … θεοῦ λόγον). εἰς θεόν IPhld 1:2. ἐκ θεοῦ (Pind., O. 11, 10, P. 1, 41; Jos., Ant. 2, 164; Just., A I, 22, 2; Mel., P. 55, 404) Ac 5:39; 2 Cor 5:1; Phil 3:9. ἐν θεῷ J 8:21; Ro 2:17; Jd 1; AcPl Ha 1, 15; 2, 35. ἐπὶ θεόν AcPl Ha 2, 29 (cp. πρὸς θεόν Just., D. 138, 2). κατὰ θεόν acc. to God’s will (Appian, Iber. 19 §73; 23 §88; 26 §101, Liby. 6 §25, Bell. Civ. 4, 86 §364) Ro 8:27; 2 Cor 7:9ff; IEph 2:1. ἡ κατὰ θ. ἀγάπη godly love IMg 1:1; cp. 13:1; ITr 1:2. παρὰ θεῷ (Jos., Bell. 1, 635) Mt 19:26; Lk 2:52.

ⓒ w. gen. foll. or w. ἴδιος to denote a special relationship: ὁ θ. Ἀβραάμ Mt 22:32; Mk 12:26; Lk 20:37; Ac 3:13; 7:32 (all Ex 3:6). ὁ θ. (τοῦ) Ἰσραήλ (Ezk 44:2; JosAs 7:5) Mt 15:31; Lk 1:68; cp. Ac 13:17; 2 Cor 6:16; Hb 11:16. ὁ θ. μου Ro 1:8; 1 Cor 1:4; 2 Cor 12:21; Phil 1:3; 4:19; Phlm 4. OT κύριος ὁ θ. σου (ἡμῶν, ὑμῶν, αὐτῶν) Mt 4:7 (Dt 6:16); 22:37 (Dt 6:5); Mk 12:29 (Dt 6:4); Lk 1:16; 4:8 (Dt 6:13); 10:27 (Dt 6:5); Ac 2:39. ὁ κύριος καὶ ὁ θ. ἡμῶν Rv 4:11 (Just., D. 12, 3; the combination of κύριος and θεός is freq. in the OT: 2 Km 7:28; 3 Km 18:39; Jer 38:18; Zech 13:9; Ps 29:3; 34:23; 85:15; 87:2; TestAbr A 3 p. 79, 19 [Stone p. 6]; JosAs 3:4; 12:2 κύριε ὁ θ. τῶν αἰώνων. But s. also Epict. 2, 16, 13 κύριε ὁ θεός [GBreithaupt, Her. 62, 1927, 253–55], Herm. Wr.: Cat. Cod. Astr. VIII/2, p. 172, 6 κύριε ὁ θεὸς ἡμῶν, the PGM ref. at the beg. of this entry, and the sacral uses τ. θεῷ κ. κυρίῳ Σοκνοπαίῳ [OGI 655, 3f—24 B.C.]; PTebt 284, 6; τῷ κυρίῳ θεῷ Ἀσκληπίῳ [Sb 159, 2]; deo domino Saturno [ins fr. imperial times fr. Thala in the prov. of Africa: BPhW 21, 1901, 475], also Suetonius, Domit. 13 dominus et deus noster [for the formulation s. 4a: PMich 209]; Ar. 15, 10; Just., D. 60, 3 al.) τὸν ἴδιον θ. AcPl Ha 3, 22.—ὁ θ. τοῦ κυρίου ἡμῶν Ἰ. Χ. Eph 1:17.

ⓓ used w. πατήρ (s. πατήρ 6a) ὁ θ. καὶ πατὴρ τοῦ κυρίου ἡμῶν Ἰησοῦ Χριστοῦ Ro 15:6; 2 Cor 1:3; Eph 1:3; Col 1:3; 1 Pt 1:3. ὁ θ. καὶ πατὴρ ἡμῶν Gal 1:4; Phil 4:20; 1 Th 1:3; 3:11, 13. ὁ θ. καὶ πατήρ 1 Cor 15:24; Eph 5:20; Js 1:27. θ. πατήρ Phil 2:11; 1 Pt 1:2; cp. 1 Cor 8:6. ἀπὸ θεοῦ πατρὸς ἡμῶν Ro 1:7b; 1 Cor 1:3; 2 Cor 1:2; Gal 1:3; Eph 1:2; Phil 1:2; Col 1:2; Phlm 3; ἀπὸ θ. π. Gal 1:3 v.l.; Eph 6:23; 2 Th 1:2; 2 Ti 1:2; Tit 1:4; παρὰ θεοῦ π. 2 Pt 1:17; 2J 3.

ⓔ w. gen. of what God brings about, in accordance w. the divine nature: ὁ θ. τῆς εἰρήνης Ro 15:33; 1 Th 5:23. τῆς ἐλπίδος the God fr. whom hope comes Ro 15:13. πάσης παρακλήσεως 2 Cor 1:3b. ὁ θ. τῆς ἀγάπης 13:11. ὁ θ. πάσης χάριτος 1 Pt 5:10. In οὐ γάρ ἐστιν ἀκαταστασίας ὁ θεός 1 Cor 14:33, θεός is to be supplied before ἀκατ.: for God is not a God of disorder.

ⓕ The gen. (τοῦ) θεοῦ is

α. subj. gen., extremely freq. depending on words like βασιλεία, δόξα, θέλημα, ἐντολή, εὐαγγέλιον, λόγος, ναός, οἶκος, πνεῦμα, υἱός, υἱοί, τέκνα and many others. Here prob. (s. β) belongs τὸ μωρὸν τ. θ. the (seeming) foolishness of G. 1 Cor 1:25 (s. B-D-F §263, 2).

β. obj. gen. ἡ ἀγάπη τοῦ θ. love for God Lk 11:42; J 5:42; ἡ προσευχὴ τοῦ θ. prayer to God Lk 6:12. πίστις θεοῦ faith in God Mk 11:22. φόβος θεοῦ fear of, reverence for God Ro 3:18 al. (s. φόβος 2bα) If 1 Cor 1:25 is to be placed here (s. α above), τὸ μωρὸν τ. θ. refers to apostolic allegiance to God, which is viewed by outsiders as folly.

γ. τὰ τοῦ θεοῦ the things, ways, thoughts, or secret purposes of God 1 Cor 2:11. φρονεῖν τὰ τ. θ. Mt 16:23; Mk 8:33 s. φρονέω 2b (ἀτιμάζοντας τὰ τοῦ θ. Just., D. 78, 10 al.). ἀποδιδόναι τὰ τ. θ. τῷ θεῷ give God what belongs to God Mt 22:21; Mk 12:17; Lk 20:25.

δ. Almost as a substitute for the adj. divine IMg 6:1f; 15 (cp. Ath. 21, 4 οὐδὲν ἔχων θεοῦ [of Zeus]).

ⓖ The dat. τῷ θεῷ (s. B-D-F §188, 2; 192; Rob. 538f; WHavers, Untersuchungen z. Kasussyntax d. indogerm. Sprachen 1911, 162ff) is

α. dat. of advantage (cp. e.g. Ath. 26, 3 ὡς ἐπηκόῳ θεῷ) for God 2 Cor 5:13. Perh. (s. β) ὅπλα δυνατὰ τῷ θ. 10:4. The dat. of Ro 6:10f rather expresses the possessor.

β. ethical dat. in the sight of God, hence w. superl. force (s. Beginn. IV, 75, on Ac 7:20) very: μεγάλοι τῷ θ. B 8:4 (cp. Jon 3:3). ἀστεῖος τῷ θ. Ac 7:20. Perh. (s. α) ὅπλα δυνατὰ τ. θ. weapons powerful in the sight of God 2 Cor 10:4. This idea is usu. expressed by ἐνώπιον τοῦ θ.

ⓗ ὁ θ. is used as a vocative Mk 15:34 (Ps 21:2. θεός twice at the beginning of the invocation of a prayer: Ael. Dion. θ, 8; Paus. Attic. θ, 7 ‘θεὸς θεός’ ταῖς ἀρχαῖς ἐπέλεγον ἐπιφημιζόμενοι); Lk 18:11; Hb 1:8 (Ps 44:7; MHarris, TynBull 36, ’85, 129–62); 10:7 (Ps 39:9); AcPl Ha 3, 10; 5, 12; 31. S. also 2 and 3c and the beg. of this entry.

ⓘ θ. τῶν αἰώνων s. αἰών 3 and 4; θ. αἰώνιος s. αἰώνιος 2; θ. ἀληθινός s. ἀληθινός 3b; εἷς ὁ θεός s. εἷς 2b; (ὁ) θ. (ὁ) ζῶν s. [ζάω] 1aε.—ὁ μόνος θεός the only God (4 Km 19:15, 19; Ps 85:10; Is 37:20; Da 3:45; Philo, Leg. All. 2, 1f; s. Norden, Agn. Th. 145) J 5:44 (some mss. lack τοῦ μόνου); 1 Ti 1:17.—ὁ μόνος ἀληθινὸς θ. (Demochares: 75 Fgm. 2 p. 135, 7 Jac. [in Athen. 6, 62, 253c] μόνος θ. ἀληθινός) J 17:3. cp. the sim. combinations w. μόνος θ. Ro 16:27; Jd 25. μόνος ὁ θεὸς μένει AcPl Ha 2, 27.—θ. σωτήρ s. σωτήρ 1.—OHoltzmann, D. chr. Gottesglaube, s. Vorgesch. u. Urgesch.1905; EvDobschütz, Rationales u. irrat. Denken über Gott im Urchristent.: StKr 95, 1924, 235–55; RHoffmann, D. Gottesbild Jesu ’34; PAlthaus, D. Bild Gottes b. Pls: ThBl 20, ’41, 81–92; Dodd 3–8; KRahner, Theos im NT: Bijdragen (Maastricht) 11, ’50, 212–36; 12, ’51, 24–52.

④ that which is nontranscendent but considered worthy of special reverence or respect, god (Artem. 2, 69 p. 161, 17: γονεῖς and διδάσκαλοι are like gods; Simplicius in Epict. p. 85, 27 acc. to ancient Roman custom children had to call their parents θεοί; s. 2 above and note on σέβομαι).

ⓐ of humans θεοί (as אֱלֹהִים) J 10:34f (Ps 81:6; humans are called θ. in the OT also Ex 7:1; 22:27; cp. Philo, Det. Pot. Insid. 161f, Somn. 1, 229, Mut. Nom. 128, Omn. Prob. Lib. 43, Mos. 1, 158, Decal. 120, Leg. All. 1, 40, Migr. Abr. 84). θ. γίνεται τῶν λαμβανόντων (a benefactor) proves to be a god to recipients Dg 10:6 (cp. Pliny, NH 2, 7, 18; s. 2 above, beg.—Aristot., Pol. 3, 8, 1, 1284a of the superior pers. as a god among humans; Arcesilaus [III B.C.] describes Crates and Polemo as θεοί τινες=‘a kind of gods’ [Diog. L. 4, 22]; Antiphanes says of the iambic poet Philoxenus: θεὸς ἐν ἀνθρώποισιν ἦν [Athen. 14, 50, 643d]; Diod S 1, 4, 7 and 5, 21, 2 of Caesar; for honors accorded Demetrius, s. IKertész, Bemerkungen zum Kult des Demetrios Poliorketes: Oikumene 2, ’78, 163–75 [lit.]; Dio Chrys. 30 [47], 5 Πυθαγόρας ἐτιμᾶτο ὡς θεός; Heliod. 4, 7, 8 σωτὴρ κ. θεός, addressed to a physician; BGU 1197, 1 [4 B.C.] a high official, and 1201, 1 [2 B.C.] a priest θεός and κύριος; PMich 209, 11f [II/III A.D.] οἶδας ἄδελφε, ὅτει οὐ μόνον ὧς ἀδελφόν σε ἔχω, ἀλλὰ καὶ ὡς πατέρα κ. κύριον κ. θεόν; Just., A I, 26, 2 [Σίμων] θεὸς ἐνομίσθη καὶ … ὡς θεὸς τετίμηται; Tat. 3, 2 μὴ θεὸς ὤν [Empedocles]; Ath. 30, 2 Ἀντίνους … ἔτυχε νομίζεσθαι θεός of benefactors in gener. AcJ 27 [Aa II/1, 166, 4]).—JEmerton, JTS 11, ’60, 329–32.

ⓑ of the belly (=appetite) as the god of certain people Phil 3:19 (cp. Athen. 3, 97c γάστρων καὶ κοιλιοδαίμων. Also Eupolis Com. [V B.C.] Fgm. 172 K. [in Athen. 3, 100b]; on the use of θ. in ref. to impersonal entities [e.g. Eur., Cyclops 316 of wealth as a god] s. DDD 693f).

⑤ of the devil ὁ θ. τοῦ αἰῶνος τούτου 2 Cor 4:4 (s. αἰών 2a and WMüllensiefen, StKr 95, 1924, 295–99).—668–99. RAC XI 1202–78; XII 81–154; B. 1464. LfgrE s.v. θεός col. 1001 (lit.). Schmidt, Syn. IV 1–21. DELG. M-M. TW. Sv.

Ελληνικά-Αγγλικά παλαιοχριστιανική Λογοτεχνία > θεός
4 ὁ

ὁ, [full] ἡ, τό, is, when thus written,

A demonstr. Pronoun.

B in [dialect] Att., definite or prepositive Article.

C in [dialect] Ep., the so-called postpositive Article, = relative Pronoun, ὅς, ἥ, ὅ.—The nom. masc. and fem. sg. and pl., ὁ, ἡ, οἱ, αἱ, have no accent in codd. and most printed books, exc. when used as the relative ; but ὁ, ἡ, οἱ, αἱ differ only in writing from ὃ, ἣ, οἳ, αἳ ; the nom. forms of the article are said by Hdn.Gr.1.474 to be oxytone, and by A.D.Pron.8.7 not to be enclitic. The forms τῶν, τοῖς, ταῖς were barytone (i. e. τὼν, τοὶς, ταὶς ) in [dialect] Aeol. acc. to Aristarch. ap. A.D.Synt.51.26. For οἱ, αἱ some dialects (not Cypr., cf. Inscr.Cypr.135.30H., nor Cret., cf.Leg.Gort. 5.28, nor Lesbian, cf. Alc.81, Sapph.Supp.5.1 ) and Hom. have τοί, ταί (though οἱ, αἱ are also found in Hom.): other Homeric forms are gen. sg. τοῖο, gen. and dat. dual τοῖιν Od.18.34
, al.: gen. pl. fem. τάων [pron. full] [ᾱ], dat. τοῖσι, τῇς and τῇσι, never ταῖσι or ταῖς in Hom.— In [dialect] Dor. and all other dialects exc. [dialect] Att. and [dialect] Ion. the fem. forms preserve the old [pron. full] ᾱ instead of changing it to η, hence [dialect] Dor. etc. ἁ, τάν, τᾶς ; the gen. pl. τάων contracts in many dialects to τᾶν ; the gen. sg. is in many places τῶ, acc. pl. τώς, but Cret., etc., τόνς (Leg.Gort.7.7, al.) or τός (ib.3.50, al.) ; in Lesbian [dialect] Aeol. the acc. pl. forms are τοὶς, ταὶς, IG12(2).645 A13, B62 ; dat. pl. τοῖς, ταῖς (or τοὶς, ταὶς, v. supr.), ib.645 A8, ib.1.6 ; ταῖσι as demonstr., Sapph. 16. The [dialect] Att. Poets also used the [dialect] Ion. and [dialect] Ep. forms τοῖσι, ταῖσι ; and in Trag. we find τοὶ μέν.., τοὶ δέ.., for οἱ μέν.., οἱ δέ.., not only in lyr., as A.Pers. 584, Th. 295, 298 ; οἱ μέν.. τοὶ δ' S.Aj. 1404
(anap.) ; but even in a trimeter, A.Pers. 424. In [dialect] Att. the dual has usu. only one gender, τὼ θεώ (for τὰ θεά) And.1.113 sq. ; τὼ πόλεε Foed. ap. Th.5.23 ; τὼ ἡμέρα X.Cyr.1.2.11
; τὼ χεῖρε Id.Mem.2.3.18
; τοῖν χεροῖν Pl.Tht. 155e
; τοῖν γενεσέοιν Id.Phd. 71e
; τοῖν πολέοιν Isoc.4.75
(τά S.Ant. 769, Ar.Eq. 424, 484, ταῖν Lys.19.17
, Is.5.16, etc. have been corrected) ; in Arc. the form τοῖς functions as gen. dual fem., μεσακόθεν τοῖς κράναιυν Schwyzer664.8
(Orchom., iv B.C.):—in Elean and [dialect] Boeot. ὁ, ἡ (ἁ), τό, with the addition of -ί, = ὅδε, ἥδε, τόδε, nom.pl. masc. τυΐ the following men, Schwyzer485.14 (Thespiae, iii B.C.), al., cf. infr. VIII. 5. (With ὁ, ἁ, cf. Skt. demonstr. pron. sa, sā, Goth. sa, sō, ONorse sá, sú, Old Lat. acc. sum, sam (Enn.): —with τό [from Τόδ] cf. Skt. tat (tad), Lat. is-tud, Goth. pata: —with τοί cf. Skt. te, Lith. tĩe, OE. pá, etc.:—with τάων cf. Skt. tāsām, Lat. is-tarum:— the origin of the relative ὅς, ἥ, ὅ (q. v.) is different.)

A ὁ, ἡ, τό, DEMONSTR. PRONOUN, that, the oldest and in Hom. the commonest sense: freq. also in Hdt. (1.86,5.35,al.), and sts. in Trag. (mostly in lyr., A.Supp. 1047, etc.; in trimeters, Id.Th. 197, Ag.7, Eu. 174 ; τῶν γάρ.., τῆς γάρ.., Id.Supp. 358, S.OT 1082 ; seldom in [dialect] Att. Prose, exc. in special phrases, v. infr. VI, VII):

I joined with a Subst., to call attention to it, ὁ Τυδεΐδης he—Tydeus' famous son, Il. 11.660; τὸν Χρύσην that venerable man Chryses, I.II: and so with Appellat., Νέστωρ ὁ γέρων N.— thataged man, 7.324 ; αἰετοῦ.. τοῦ θηρητῆρος the eagle, that which is called hunter, 21.252, al. ; also to define and give emphasis, τιμῆς τῆς Πριάμου for honour, namely that of Priam, 20.181 ; οἴχετ' ἀνὴρ ὤριστος a man is gone, and he the best, 11.288, cf. 13.433, al.: sts. with words between the Pron. and Noun, αὐτὰρ ὁ αὖτε Πέλοψ 2.105
; τὸν Ἕκτορι μῦθον ἐνίσπες 11.186
, cf. 703, al.:—different from this are cases like Il.1.409 αἴ κέν πως ἐθέλῃσιν ἐπὶ Τρώεσσιν ἀρῆξαι, τοὺς δὲ κατὰ πρύμνας τε καὶ ἀμφ' ἅλα ἔλσαι Ἀχαιούς if he would help the Trojans, but drive those back to the ships— I mean the Achaeans, where Ἀχ. is only added to explain τούς, cf. 1.472, 4.20, 329, al.

II freq. without a Subst., he, she, it, ὁ γὰρ ἦλθε Il.1.12
, al.

III placed after its Noun, before the Relat. Prons., ἐφάμην σὲ περὶ φρένας ἔμμεναι ἄλλων, τῶν ὅσσοι Λυκίην ναιετάουσι far above the rest, above those to wit who, etc., Il.17.172 ; οἷ' οὔ πώ τιν' ἀκούομεν οὐδὲ παλαιῶν, τάων αἳ πάρος ἦσαν.. Ἀχαιαί such as we have not heard tell of yet even among the women of old, those women to wit who.., Od.2.119, cf. Il.5.332 ; θάλαμον τὸν ἀφίκετο, τόν ποτε τέκτων ξέσσεν Od.21.43
, cf. 1.116, 10.74 :—for the [dialect] Att. usage v. infr.

IV before a Possessive Pron. its demonstr. force is sts. very manifest, φθίσει σε τὸ σὸν μένος that spirit of thine, Il.6.407, cf. 11.608 ; but in 15.58, 16.40, and elsewh. it is merely the Art.

V for cases in which the Homeric usage approaches most nearly to the Attic, v. infr. B. init.

VI ὁ μέν.., ὁ δέ.. without a Subst., in all cases, genders, and numbers, Hom., etc.: sts. in Opposition, where ὁ μέν prop. refers to the former, ὁ δέ to the latter ; more rarely ὁ μέν the latter,
ὁ δέ
the former, Pl.Prt. 359e
, Isoc.2.32,34: sts. in Partition, the one.., the other.., etc.—The Noun with it is regularly in gen. pl., being divided by the ὁ μέν.., ὁ δέ.., into parts, ἠΐθεοι καὶ παρθένοι.., τῶν δ' αἱ μὲν λεπτὰς ὀθόνας ἔχον, οἱ δὲ χιτῶνας εἵατο Il.18.595
; τῶν πόλεων αἱ μὲν τυραννοῦνται, αἱ δὲ δημοκρατοῦνται, αἱ δὲ ἀριστοκρατοῦνται Pl.R. 338d
, etc.: but freq. the Noun is in the same case, by a kind of apposition, ἴδον υἷε Δάρητος, τὸν μὲν ἀλευάμενον τὸν δὲ κτάμενον Il.5.28
, cf. Od.12.73, etc.: so in Trag. and [dialect] Att., S.Ant. 22, etc. ; πηγὴ ἡ μὲν εἰς αὐτὸν ἔδυ, ἡ δὲ ἔξω ἀπορρεῖ Pl.Phdr. 255c
; if the Noun be collective, it is in the gen. sg., ὁ μὲν πεπραμένος ἦν τοῦ σίτου, ὁ δὲ ἔνδον ἀποκείμενος D.42.6
: sts. a Noun is added in apposition with ὁ μέν or ὁ δέ, ὁ μὲν οὔτασ' Ἀτύμνιον ὀξέϊ δουρὶ Ἀντίλοχος.., Μάρις δὲ.. Il.16.317
-19, cf. 116 ; τοὺς μὲν τὰ δίκαια ποιεῖν ἠνάγκασα, τοὺς πλουσίους, τοὺς δὲ πένητας κτλ. D.18.102
, cf. Pl.Grg. 501a, etc.

2 when a neg. accompanies ὁ δέ, it follows δέ, e.g. τὰς γοῦν Ἀθήνας οἶδα τὸν δὲ χῶρον οὔ S.OC24
; τὸν φιλόσοφον σοφίας ἐπιθυμητὴν εἶναι, οὐ τῆς μὲν τῆς δ' οὔ, ἀλλὰ πάσης Pl.R. 475b
; οὐ πάσας χρὴ τὰς δόξας τιμᾶν, ἀλλὰ τὰς μὲν τὰς δ' οὔ· οὐδὲ πάντων, ἀλλὰ τῶν μὲν τῶν δ' οὔ Id.Cri. 47a
, etc.

3 ὁ μέν τις.., ὁ δέ τις.. is used in Prose, when the Noun to which ὁ refers is left indefinite, ἔλεγον ὁ μέν τις τὴν σοφίαν, ὁ δὲ τὴν καρτερίαν.., ὁ δέ τις καὶ τὸ κάλλος X.Cyr.3.1.41
; νόμους.. τοὺς μὲν ὀρθῶς τιθέασιν τοὺς δέ τινας οὐκ ὀρθῶς Pl.R. 339c
, cf. Phlb. 13c.

4 on τὸ μέν.., τὸ δέ.., or τὰ μέν.., τὰ δέ.., v. infr. VIII.4.

5 ὁ μέν is freq. used without a corresponding ὁ δέ, οἱ μὲν ἄρ' ἐσκίδναντο.., Μυρμιδόνας δ' οὐκ εἴα ἀποσκίδνασθαι Il.23.3
, cf. 24.722, Th.8.12, etc.: also folld. by ἀλλά, ἡ μὲν γάρ μ' ἐκέλευε.., ἀλλ' ἐγὼ οὐκ ἔθελον Od.7.304
; by ἄλλος δέ, Il.6.147, etc. ; τὸν μὲν.., ἕτερον δέ Ar.Av. 843
, etc. ; ὁ μέν.., ὃς δέ.. Thgn.205
(v.l. οὐδέ): less freq. ὁ δέ in the latter clause without ὁ μέν preceding, τῇ ῥα παραδραμέτην φεύγων, ὁ δ' ὄπισθε διώκων (for ὁ μὲν φεύγων) Il.22.157 ; σφραγῖδε.. χρυσοῦν ἔχουσα τὸν δακτύλιον, ἡ δ' ἑτέρα ἀργυροῦν IG22.1388.45
, cf. μέν D.
III ; γεωργὸς μὲν εἷς, ὁ δὲ οἰκοδόμος, ἄλλος δέ τις ὑφαντής Pl.R. 369d
, cf. Tht. 181d.

6 ὁ δέ following μέν sts. refers to the subject of the preceding clause, τοῦ μὲν ἅμαρθ', ὁ δὲ Λεῦκον.. βεβλήκει Il. 4.491
; τὴν μὲν γενομένην αὐτοῖσι αἰτίην οὐ μάλα ἐξέφαινε, ὁ δὲ ἔλεγέ σφι Hdt.6.3
, cf. 1.66,6.9, 133,7.6 : rare in [dialect] Att. Prose, ἐπεψήφιζεν αὐτὸς ἔφορος ὤν· ὁ δὲ οὐκ ἔφη διαγιγνώσκειν τὴν βοήν Th.1.87
; ἔμενον ὡς κατέχοντες τὸ ἄκρον· οἱ δ' οὐ κατεῖχον X.An.4.2.6
: this is different from ὁ δέ in apodosi, v. infr. 7 ; also from passages in which both clauses have a common verb, v. ὅ γε 11.

7 ὁ δέ is freq. used simply in continuing a narrative, Il.1.43, etc.; also used by Hom. in apodosi after a relat., v. ὅδε 111.3.

8 the opposition may be expressed otherwise than by μέν and δέ, οὔθ' ὁ.. οὔθ' ὁ Il.15.417
; ἢ τοῖσιν ἢ τοῖς A.Supp. 439
; οὔτε τοῖς οὔτε τοῖς Pl.Lg. 701e
.

VII the following usages prevailed in [dialect] Att. Prose,

1 in dialogue, after καί, it was usual to say in nom. sg. masc. καὶ ὅς ; in the other cases the usual forms of the Art. were used (v. ὅς A.
II.I and cf. Skt. sas, alternat. form of sa) ; so, in acc., καὶ τὸν εἰπεῖν Pl.Smp. 174a
, cf. X.Cyr.1.3.9, etc.; also in Hdt., καὶ τὴν φράσαι 6.61
, al.

2 ὁ καὶ ὁ such and such, τῇ καὶ τῇ ἀτιμίᾳ Pl.Lg. 721b
: but mostly in acc., καί μοι κάλει τὸν καὶ τόν Lys.1.23
, cf. Pl.Lg. 784d ; τὰ καὶ τὰ πεπονθώς D.21.141
, cf. 9.68 ; τὸ καὶ τό Id.18.243
; ἀνάγκη ἄρα τὸ καὶ τό it must then be so and so, Arist.Rh. 1401a4, cf. 1413a22 ; but τὰ καὶ τά now one thing, now another, of good and bad, τὸν δ' ἀγαθὸν τολμᾶν χρὴ τά τε καὶ τὰ φέρειν Thgn.398
, cf. Pi.P.5.55,7.20, al.; τῶν τε καὶ τῶν καιρόν Id.O. 2.53
; so πάντα τοῦ μετρίου μεταβαλλόμενα ἐπὶ τὰ καὶ ἐπὶ τά, of excess and defect, Hp.Acut.46 ; cf. A. VI.8.

VIII abs. usages of single cases,

1 fem. dat. τῇ, of Place, there, on that spot, here, this way, that way, Il.5.752, 858, al.: folld. by ᾗ, 13.52, etc.: also in Prose, τὸ μὲν τῇ, τὸ δὲ τῇ X.Ath.2.12
.

b with a notion of motion towards, that way, in that direction, Il.10.531,11.149, 12.124 ; τῇ ἴμεν ᾗ.. 15.46
; δελφῖνες τῇ καὶ τῇ ἐθύνεον ἰχθυάοντες Hes.Sc. 210
:—only poet.

c of Manner,
τῇ περ τελευτήσεσθαι ἔμελλεν
in this way, thus, Od.8.510
.

d repeated, τῇ μέν.., τῇ δέ.., in one way.., in another.., or partly.., partly.., E.Or. 356, Pl.Smp. 211a, etc.: without μέν, τῇ μᾶλλον, τῇ δ' ἧσσον Parm.8.48
.

e relat., where, by which way, only [dialect] Ep., as Il.12.118, Od.4.229.

2 neut. dat. τῷ, therefore, on this account, freq. in Hom., Il.1.418, 2.254, al. (v. infr.): also in Trag., A.Pr. 239, S.OT 510 (lyr.) ; in Prose, τῷ τοι.. Pl.Tht. 179d
, Sph. 230b.

b thus, so, Il.2.373, 13.57, etc.: it may also, esp. when εἰ precedes, be translated, then, if this be so, on this condition, Od.1.239,3.224, 258,al., Theoc.29.11.—In Hom. the true form is prob. τῶ, as in cod. A, or τώ, cf. A.D.Adv.199.2.

3 neut. acc. τό, wherefore, Il.3.176, Od.8.332, al., S.Ph. 142(lyr.) ; also τὸ δέ abs., but the fact is.., Pl.Ap. 23a, Men. 97c, Phd. 109d, Tht. 157b, R. 340d, Lg. 967a ; even when the τό refers to what precedes, the contrast may lie not in the thing referred to, but in another part of the sentence (cf. supr. VI. 6), τὸ δ' ἐπὶ κακουργίᾳ.. ἐπετήδευσαν Th.1.37
; τὸ δὲ.. ἡμῖν μᾶλλον περιέσται Id.2.89
; φασὶ δέ τινες αὐτὸν καὶ τῶν ἑπτὰ σοφῶν γεγονέναι· τὸ δὲ οὐκ ἦν but he was not, Nic.Dam.58J.

4 τὸ μέν.., τὸ δέ.., partly.., partly.., or on the one hand.., on the other.., Th.7.36, etc., cf.Od.2.46 ; more freq. τὰ μέν.., τὰ δέ.., Hdt.1.173, S.Tr. 534, etc.; also τὰ μέν τι.., τὰ δέ τι.. X.An.4.1.14
; τὸ μέν τι.., τὸ δέ τι.. Luc.Macr.14
; τὰ μέν.., τὸ δὲ πλέον.. Th.1.90
: sts. without τὸ μέν.. in the first clause, τὸ δέ τι Id.1.107
,7.48 : rarely of Time, τὰ μὲν πολλὰ.., τέλος δέ several times.. and finally, Hdt.3.85.

5 of Time, sts. that time, sts. this (present) time, συνμαχία κ' ἔα ἑκατὸν ϝέτεα, ἄρχοι δέ κα τοΐ (where it is possible, but not necessary, to supply ϝέτος) SIG9.3 (Olympia, vi B.C.): so with Preps., ἐκ τοῦ, [dialect] Ep. τοῖο, from that time, Il.1.493,15.601.

b πρὸ τοῦ, sts. written προτοῦ, before this, aforetime, Hdt.1.103, 122,5.55, A.Ag. 1204, Ar.Nu.5, etc.; ἐν τῷ πρὸ τοῦ χρόνῳ Th.1.32
, cf. A.Eu. 462 ; τὸ πρὸ τοῦ D.S.20.59
.

c in Thess. Prose, ὑππρὸ τᾶς yesterday, τὰ ψαφίσματα τό τε ὑππρὸ τᾶς γενόμενον καὶ τὸ τᾶμον the decree which was passed yesterday (lit. before this [day]), and to-day's, IG9(2).517.43 (Larissa, iii B.C.).

6 ἐν τοῖς is freq. used in Prose with Superlatives, ἐν τοῖσι θειότατον a most marvellous thing, Hdt.7.137 ; ἐν τοῖς πρῶτοι the very first, Th.1.6, etc.; ἐν τοῖσι πρῶτος ( πρώτοις codd.) Pherecr.145.4 ; [Ζεὺς] Ἔρωτά τε καὶ Ἀνάγκην ἐν τοῖς πρῶτα ἐγέννησεν first of all, Aristid. Or.43(1).16, cf. 37(2).2: when used with fem. Nouns, ἐν τοῖς remained without change of gender, ἐν τοῖς πλεῖσται δὴ νῆες the greatest number of ships, Th.3.17; ἐν τοῖς πρώτη ἐγένετο (sc. ἡ στάσις) ib.82 : also with Advbs., ἐν τοῖς μάλιστα Id.8.90
, Pl.Cri. 52a, Plu.2.74e, 421d, 723e, Brut.6, 11,al., Paus.1.16.3, etc.; ἐν τοῖς χαλεπώτατα Th.7.71
; τὴν Αἴγυπτον ἐν τοῖς μάλιστα μελάγγειον οὖσαν Plu.2.364c
: in late Prose, also with Positives, ἐν τοῖς παράδοξον Aristid.Or.48(24).47
codd.; with πάνυ, ἐν τοῖς πάνυ D.H.1.19
, cf. 66 ( ἐν ταῖς πάνυ f.l. 4.14,15).

B ὁ, ἡ, τό, THE DEFINITE ARTICLE, the, to specify individuals: rare in this signf. in the earliest Gr., becoming commoner later. In Hom. the demonstr. force can generally be traced, v. supr. A. I, but the definite Art. must be recognized in places like Il.1.167,7.412, 9.309, 12.289, Od.19.372 : also when joined to an Adj. to make it a Subst.,
αἰὲν ἀποκτείνων τὸν ὀπίστατον
the hindmost man, Il.11.178
; τὸν ἄριστον 17.80
; τὸν δύστηνον 22.59
; τὸν προὔχοντα 23.325
; τῷ πρώτῳ.., τῷ δευτέρῳ.., etc., ib. 265sq. ; also in τῶν ἄλλων 2.674
, al.: with Advs., τὸ πρίν 24.543
, al.; τὸ πάρος περ 17.720
; τὸ πρόσθεν 23.583
; also τὸ τρίτον ib. 733 ; τὰ πρῶτα 1.6
,al.; τὸ μὲν ἄλλο for the rest, 23.454 ; ἀνδρῶν τῶν τότε 9.559
.—The true Art., however, is first fully established in fifth-cent. [dialect] Att., whilst the demonstr. usage disappears, exc. in a few cases, V. A. VI-VIII.—Chief usages, esp. in [dialect] Att.

I not only with common Appellats., Adjs., and Parts., to specify them as present to sense or mind, but also freq. where we use the Possessive Pron., τὸ κέαρ ηὐφράνθην Ar.Ach.5
; τὴν κεφαλὴν κατεάγην my head was broken, And.1.61, etc. ; τοὺς φίλους ποιούμεθα we make our friends, S.Ant. 190 ; τὰς πόλεις ἔκτιζον they began founding their cities, Th.1.12; οὐχ ὑπὲρ τὴν οὐσίαν ποιούμενοι τοὺς παῖδας Pl.R. 372b
.

b omitted with pr.nn.and freq. with Appellats. which require no specification, as θεός, βασιλεύς, v. θεός 1.1, βασιλεύς III ; ἐμ πόλει in the Acropolis, IG12.4.1, al.: but added to pr. nn., when attention is to be called to the previous mention of the person, as Th. (3.70 ) speaks first of Πειθίας and then refers to him repeatedly as ὁ Π.; cf. Θράσυλος in Id.8.104, with ὁ Θ. ib. 105 ; or when the person spoken of is to be specially distinguished, Ζεύς, ὅστις ὁ Ζεύς whoever this Zeus is, E.Fr. 480 ; and therefore properly omitted when a special designation follows, as Σωκράτης ὁ φιλόσοφος: seldom in Trag. with pr. nn., save to give pecul. emphasis, like Lat. ille, ὁ Λάϊος, ὁ Φοῖβος, S.OT 729, El.35, etc.: later, however, the usage became very common (the Homeric usage of ὁ with a pr. n. is different, v. A.I).

c Aristotle says Σωκράτης meaning the historical Socrates, as in SE183b7, PA642a28, al., but ὁ Σωκράτης when he means the Platonic Socrates, as Pol.1261a6, al.: so with other pr.nn., EN1145a21, 1146a21, al.

d for Σαῦλος ὁ καὶ Παῦλος, etc., v. καί B.2.

2 in a generic sense, where the individual is treated as a type, οἷς ὁ γέρων μετέῃσιν.. λεύσσει Il.3.109
; πονηρὸν ὁ συκοφάντης D.18.242
, etc.

b freq. with abstract Nouns, ἥ τε ἐλπὶς καὶ ὁ ἔρως Th.3.45
, etc.

3 of outstanding members of a class, ὁ γεωγράφος, ὁ κωμικός, ὁ ποιητής, ὁ τεχνικός, v. γεωγράφος, κωμικός, ποιητής, τεχνικός.

4 with infs., which thereby become Substs., τὸ εἴργειν prevention, Pl.Grg. 505b ; τὸ φρονεῖν good sense, S.Ant. 1348(anap.), etc.: when the subject is expressed it is put between the Art.and the inf., τὸ θεοὺς εἶναι the existence of gods, Pl.Phd. 62b ; τὸ μηδένα εἶναι ὄλβιον the fact or statement that no one is happy, Hdt.1.86.

5 in neut. before any word or expression which itself is made the object of thought, τὸ ἄνθρωπος the word or notion man ; τὸ λέγω the word λέγω ; τὸ μηδὲν ἄγαν the sentiment 'ne quid nimis', E.Hipp. 265(lyr.); τὸ τῇ αὐτῇ the phrase τῇ αὐτῇ, Pl.Men. 72e : and so before whole clauses, ἡ δόξα.. περὶ τοῦ οὕστινας δεῖ ἄρχειν the opinion about the question 'who ought to rule', Id.R. 431e ; τὸ ἐὰν μένητε παρ' ἐμοί, ἀποδώσω the phrase 'I will give back, if.. ', X.Cyr. 5.1.21, cf. Pl.R. 327c, etc.; τοὺς τοῦ τί πρακτέον λογισμούς D.23.148
; τὸ ὀλίγοι the term few, Arist.Pol. 1283b11.

6 before relat. clauses, when the Art. serves to combine the whole relat. clause into one notion, τῇ ᾗ φὴς σὺ σκληρότητι the harshness you speak of, Pl.Cra. 435a ; τὸν ἥμερον καρπόν.., καὶ τὸν ὅσος ξύλινος (i.e. καὶ τὸν καρπὸν ὅσος ἂν ᾖ ξύλινος) Id.Criti. 115b ; τῶν ὅσοι ἂν.. ἀγαθοὶ κριθῶσιν Id.R. 469b
; ἐκ γῆς καὶ πυρὸς μείξαντες καὶ τῶν ὅσα πυρὶ καὶ γῇ κεράννυται Id.Prt. 320d
, cf. Hyp.Lyc.2 ; ταύτην τε τὴν αἰτίαν καὶ τὴν ὅθεν ἡ κίνησις Arist.Metaph. 987a8
; τὸν ὃς ἔφη Lys.23.8
: hence the relat., by attraction, freq. follows the case of the Art., τοῖς οἵοις ἡμῖν τε καὶ ὑμῖν, i.e. τοῖς οὖσιν οἷοι ἡμεῖς καὶ ὑμεῖς, X.HG2.3.25, etc.

7 before Prons.,

a before the pers. Prons., giving them greater emphasis, but only in acc., τὸν ἐμέ Pl.Tht. 166a
,Phlb. 20b ; τὸν.. σὲ καὶ ἐμέ ib. 59b ; τὸν αὑτόν Id.Phdr. 258a
; on ὁ αὐτός, v. αὐτός 111.

b before the interrog. Pron. (both τίς and ποῖος), referring to something before, which needs to be more distinctly specified, A.Pr. 251, Ar. Pax 696 ; also τὰ τί; because οἷα went before, ib. 693. Of τίς only the neut. is thus used (v.supr.): ποῖος is thus used not only in neut. pl., τὰ ποῖα; E.Ph. 707 ; but also in the other genders, ὁ ποῖος; ib. 1704 ; τῆς ποίας μερίδος; D.18.64 ; τοῖς ποίοις.. ; Arist.Ph. 227b1.

c with τοιοῦτος, τοιόσδε, τηλικοῦτος, etc., the Art. either makes the Pron. into a Subst.,
ὁ τοιοῦτος
that sort of person, X.Mem.4.2.21
, etc.; or subjoins it to a Subst. which already has an Art., τὴν ἀπολογίαν τὴν τοιαύτην D.41.13
.

8 before ἅπας, Pi.N.1.69, Hdt.3.64, 7.153 (s.v.l.), S.OC 1224 (lyr.), D.18.231, etc.; also τὸν ἕνα, τὸν ἕνα τοῦτον, Arist.Pol. 1287b8, 1288a19 : on its usage with ἕκαστος, v. sub voc.; and on οἱ ἄλλοι, οἱ πολλοί, etc., v. ἄλλος 11.6, πολύς 11.3
, etc.

9 the Art. with the [comp] Comp. is rare, if ἤ follows, S.Ant. 313, OC 796.

II elliptic expressions:

1 before the gen. of a pr.<*>., to express descent, son or daughter, Θουκυδίδης ὁ Ὀλόρου (sc. υἱός) Th.4.104 ; Ἑλένη ἡ τοῦ Διός (sc. θυγάτηρ) E.Hel. 470 : also to denote other relationships, e.g. brother, Lys.32.24, Alciphr.2.2.10 ; ἡ Σμικυθίωνος Μελιστίχη M. the wife of S., Ar.Ec.46 ; Κλέαρχος καὶ οἱ ἐκείνου Cl. and his men, X.An.1.2.15 ; ὁ τοῦ Ἀντιγένεος the slave of A., Hp.Hum.20.

2 generally, before a gen. it indicates a wider relation, as τὸ τῶν νεῶν, τὸ τῶν Ἑρμῶν, the matter of the ships, the affair of the Hermae, Th.4.23,6.60 ; τὰ τοῦ Ἀρριβαίου πράσσειν to promote the interests of Arrhibaeus, Id.4.83, cf. 6.89, etc.; τὸ τῆς τύχης,=ἡ τύχη, Id.4.18 ; τὰ τῆς τύχης accidents, chance events, ib.55 ; τὰ γὰρ φθιτῶν τοῖς ὁρῶσι κόσμος performance of the rites due to the dead befits the living, E.Supp.78(lyr.); τὰ τῶν θεῶν that which is destined by the gods, S.Tr. 498(lyr.): hence with neut. of Possessive Pron., τὸ ἐμόν, τὸ σόν, what regards me or thee, my or thy business or interests, S.Aj. 124, El. 251, etc.: and with gen. of 3 pers., τὸ τῆσδε E.Hipp.48
. But τό τινος is freq. also, a man's word or saying, as τὸ τοῦ Σόλωνος Hdt.1.86
; τὸ τοῦ Ὁμήρου as Homer says, Pl.Tht. 183e ; also τά τινος so-and-so's house, Ar.V. 1432, D.54.7, Theoc.2.76, Herod.5.52, Ev.Luc.2.49.

3 very freq. with cases governed by Preps.. αἱ ἐκ τῆς Ζακύνθου νῆες the ships from Zacynthus, Th.4.13 ; οἱ ἀμφί τινα, οἱ περί τινα, such an one and his followers, v. ἀμφί c.1.3, περί c.1.2 ; also τὰ ἐπὶ Θρᾴκης the Thrace-ward district, Th.1.59, al.; τὰ ἀπὸ τοῦ καταστρώματος matters on deck, Id.7.70 ; τὰ ἀπ' Ἀλκιβιάδου the proposals of Alcibiades, Id.8.48 ; τὰ ἀπὸ τῆς τύχης the incidents of fortune, Id.2.87, etc.

4 on μὰ τόν, μὰ τήν, etc., v. μά IV.

5 in elliptical phrases, ἐπορευόμην τὴν ἔξω τείχους (sc. ὁδόν) Pl.Ly. 203a ; ἡ ἐπὶ θανάτῳ (sc. στολή, δέσις), v. θάνατος; κατὰ τὴν ἐμήν (sc. γνώμην), v. ἐμός 11.4 ; ἡ αὔριον (sc. ἡμέρα), v. αὔριον; ἡ Λυδιστί (sc. ἁρμονία) Arist.Pol. 1342b32, etc.: freq. with Advs., which thus take an adj. sense, as ὁ, ἡ, τὸ νῦν; ὁ οἴκαδε πλοῦς Th.1.52
; οἱ τότε, οἱ ἔπειτα (sc. ἄνθρωποι), ib.9,10, etc. ; but τό stands abs. with Advs. of time and place, when one cannot (as in the preceding instances) supply a Subst., as κἀκεῖσε καὶ τὸ δεῦρο E.Ph. 266
, cf.[315] (lyr.); ὁ μὲν τὸ κεῖθεν, ὁ δὲ τὸ κεῖθεν Id.Or. 1412
(lyr.): rarely abs. in gen., ἰέναι τοῦ πρόσω to go forward, X.An.1.3.1 ; τοῦ προσωτάτω δραμεῖν S.Aj. 731
.

C as RELATIVE PRONOUN in many dialects ; both in nom. sg. masc. ὅ, as κλῦθί μοι, ὃ χθιζὸς θεὸς ἤλυθες Od.2.262
, cf. 1.300, al. ; Ἔρως, ὃ κατ' ὀμμάτων στάζεις πόθον E.Hipp. 526
(lyr.); Ἄδωνις, ὃ κἠν Ἀχέροντι φιλεῖται Theoc.15.86
; ὃ ἐξορύξη he who banishes him, Schwyzer679.12,25 ([place name] Cyprus) ; and in the forms beginning with τ, esp. in Hom. (Od.4.160, al.), Hdt.1.7, al.: also in [dialect] Ion. Poets, ἐν τῷ κάθημαι Archil.87.3
, cf. Semon.7.3, Anacr.86 (prob.), Herod.2.64, al.: freq. in Trag., τῆς S.OC 1258
, Tr. 381, 728, E.Alc. 883 (anap.); τῷ S.Ph.14
; τήν Id.OC 747
, Tr.47, El. 1144 ; τό Id.OT 1427 ; τῶν ib. 1379, Ant. 1086.—Never in Com. or [dialect] Att. Prose:—[dialect] Ep. gen. sg. τεῦ Il.18.192
(s.v.l.).

D CRASIS OF ARTICLE:

a [dialect] Att. ὁ, ἡ, τό, with [pron. full] ᾰ make ᾱ, as ἁνήρ, ἁλήθεια, τἀγαθόν, τᾄτιον; so οἱ, αἱ, τά, as ἅνδρες, τἀγαθά; also τοῦ, τῷ, as τἀγαθοῦ, τἀγαθῷ: ὁ, τό, οἱ, before e gives ου, οὑξ, οὑπί, οὑμός, τοὔργον, οὑπιχώριοι, etc.; also τοῦ, as τοὐμοῦ, τοὐπιόντος; but ἅτερος, θάτερον ([pron. full] ¯ ?ὁX?ὁX), [dialect] Ion. οὕτερος, τοὔτερον (v. ἕτερος), [dialect] Att. fem. ἡτέρα, dat. θητέρᾳ (v. ἕτερος); τῷ loses the iota, τὠμῷ, τὠπιόντι: ὁ, τό, before ο gives ου, as Οὁδυσσεύς, Οὑλύμπιος, τοὔνομα: ὁ, τό, etc., before αυ gives ᾱυ, αὑτός, ταὐτό, ταὐτῷ (freq. written ἁτός, etc. in Inscrr. and Pap.); so τὰ αὐτά=ταὐτά, αἱ αὐταί= αὑταί: ἡ before εὐ gives ηὑ, as ηὑλάβεια: τῇ before ἡ gives θη, as θἠμέρᾳ: τὸ before ὑ gives θου, as θοὔδωρ for τὸ ὕδωρ.

b other dialects: in their treatment of crasis these follow the local laws of contraction, hence, e.g., [dialect] Dor. ὡξ from ὁ ἐξ Theoc.1.65
, ὥλαφος from ὁ ἔλαφος ib. 135 ; [dialect] Ion. ᾡσυμνήτης from ὁ αἰς- SIG57.45 (Milet., v B.C.) ; ὡυτή from ἡ αὐτή Heraclit.60
, etc.

Greek-English dictionary (Αγγλικά Ελληνικά-λεξικό) > ὁ
5 ὅς

ὅς, ἥ, ὅ

① as relative pron. who, which, what, that (Hom.+). On its use s. B-D-F §293–97; 377–80; Rydbeck 98–118; W-S. §24; Rob. 711–26, and for ancient Gk. in gener. Kühner-G. II 399ff; Schwyzer II 639–41.

ⓐ As a general rule, the relative pron. agrees in gender and number w. the noun or pron. to which it refers (i.e. its antecedent); its case is determined by the verb, noun, or prep. that governs it: ὁ ἀστήρ, ὸ̔ν εἶδον Mt 2:9. ὁ Ἰησοῦς, ὅν ἐγὼ καταγγέλλω ὑμῖν Ac 17:3. Ἰουδαῖον, ᾧ (sc. ἦν) ὄνομα Βαριησοῦς 13:6. ὁ Ἰουδαῖος …, οὗ ὁ ἔπαινος Ro 2:29. Ἰσραηλίτης, ἐν ᾧ δόλος οὐκ ἔστιν J 1:47. οὗτος, περὶ οὗ ἀκούω τοιαῦτα Lk 9:9 and very oft.

ⓑ A demonstrative pron. is freq. concealed within the relative pron.:

α. in such a way that both pronouns stand in the same case: ὅς the one who ὅς οὐ λαμβάνει Mt 10:38; sim. Mk 4:9; 9:40 (the three w. implied condition). οὗ of the one whose J 18:26. ᾧ to the one to whom Ro 6:16. ὅν the one whom (or someth. sim.) Mk 15:12; J 1:45. οἷς to those for whom Mt 20:23. οὕς those whom Mk 3:13; J 5:21. ὅ that which, what Mt 10:27.—A prep. governing the relative belongs in certain pass. to the (omitted) demonstr. pron. alone: παρʼ ὅ Ro 12:3; Gal 1:8; ὑπὲρ ὅ (ἅ) 1 Cor 10:13; 2 Cor 12:6; Phlm 21; πρὸς ἅ 2 Cor 5:10; εἰς ὅν J 6:29. In others it must be added to both pronouns: ἐν ᾧ in that in which 2 Cor 11:12; 1 Pt 2:12; 3:16 (these passages in 1 Pt may be classed under 1kγ also). ἐν οἷς Phil 4:11. ὑπὲρ οὑ because of that for which 1 Cor 10:30. ἀφʼ ὧν from the persons from whom 2 Cor 2:3.—The much disputed pass. ἑταῖρε, ἐφʼ ὸ̔ πάρει Mt 26:50 would belong here if we were to supply the words necessary to make it read about as follows: friend, (are you misusing the kiss) for that (purpose) for which you are here? (Wlh.; EKlostermann) or thus: in connection with that (=the purposes), for which (=for the realization of which) you have appeared (do you kiss me)? (Rdm.² 78). Friend, are you here for this purpose? FRehkopf, ZNW 52, ’61, 109–15. But s. βב and iβ below.

β. But the two pronouns can also stand in different cases; in such instances the demonstr. pron. is nearly always in the nom. or acc.

א. in the nom. οὗ one whose Ac 13:25. ὧν those whose Ro 4:7 (Ps 31:1). ᾧ the one to or for whom Lk 7:43; 2 Pt 1:9. οἷς those to whom Mt 19:11; Ro 15:21 (Is 52:15). ὅ that (nom.) which (acc.) Mt 13:12; 25:29; 26:13; Mk 11:23; Lk 12:3. Likew. ἅ Lk 12:20. ὅν he whom J 3:34; 4:18; Ac 10:21. ἐφʼ ὅν the one about whom Hb 7:13.

ב. in the acc. ὧν the things of which J 13:29. ᾧ the one (in) whom 2 Ti 1:12. So also w. a prep.: ἐν ᾧ anything by which Ro 14:21. ἐν οἷς things in which 2 Pt 2:12. ἐφʼ ὅ that upon which Lk 5:25. περὶ ὧν the things of which Ac 24:13. ἐφʼ οἷς from the things of which Ro 6:21 (this passage perh. uses a commercial metaphor, for pap s. Mayser II/2, 434f §121). εἰς ὸ̔ν the one in whom Ro 10:14a.—So Mt 26:50 (s. bα above), if the words to be supplied are about as follows: friend, (do that) for which you have come! (so ESchwartz, ByzZ 25, 1925, 154f; EOwen, JTS 29, 1928, 384–86; WSpiegelberg, ZNW 28, 1929, 341–43; FZorell, VD 9, 1929, 112–16; sim. PMaas, Byz.-Neugriech. Jahrb. 8, ’31, 99; 9, ’32, 64; WEltester: OCullmann Festschr., ’62, 70–91; but s. iβ end.—S. Jos., Bell. 2, 615 at πάρειμι 1a).

ג. Only in isolated instances does the demonstr. pron. to be supplied stand in another case: οὗ = τούτῳ, οὗ in him of whom Ro 10:14b. παρʼ ὧν = τούτοις, παρʼ ὧν Lk 6:34.

ⓒ Constructions peculiar in some respect

α. The pleonastic use of the pers. pron. after ὅς (Mlt. 94f; B-D-F §297) γυνὴ ἧς εἶχεν τὸ θυγάτριον αὐτῆς Mk 7:25 is found in older Gk. (Hyperid., Euxen. 3 ὧν … τούτων.—Kühner-G. II 433f), and is not unknown in later Gk. (POxy 117, 15), but above all is suggested by Semitic languages (LXX; GrBar 2:1; Thackeray 46; JHudson, ET 53, ’41/42, 266f); the omission of αὐτῆς in the v.l. is in line w. Gk. usage. οὗ τὸ πτύον ἐν τῇ χειρὶ αὐτοῦ Mt 3:12; Lk 3:17. οὗ … τῶν ὑποδημάτων αὐτοῦ Mk 1:7; Lk 3:16. οὗ τῷ μώλωπι αὐτοῦ 1 Pt 2:24 v.l. οὗ καὶ πολλὰ αὐτοῦ συγγράματα EpilMosq 2. In a quot. ἐφʼ οὓς ἐπικέκληται … ἐπʼ αὐτούς Ac 15:17 = Am 9:12. οὗ ἡ πνοὴ αὐτοῦ 1 Cl 21:9. Esp. freq. in Rv 3:8; 7:2, 9; 9:11 v.l.; 13:8, 12; 20:8.

β. constructions ‘ad sensum’

א. a relative in the sing. refers to someth. in the pl. οὐρανοῖς … ἐξ οὗ (οὐρανοῦ) Phil 3:20.

ב. a relative in the pl. refers to a sing. (Jdth 4:8 γερουσία, οἵ) πλῆθος πολύ …, οἳ ἦλθον Lk 6:17f. κατὰ πόλιν πᾶσαν, ἐν αἷς Ac 15:36. Cp. ἤδη δευτέραν ἐπιστολήν, ἐν αἷς (i.e. ἐν ταῖς δυσὶν ἐπιστ.) 2 Pt 3:1.

ג. the relative conforms to the natural gender rather than the grammatical gender of its antecedent noun τέκνα μου, οὕς Gal 4:19; cp. 2 J 1; Phlm 10. ἔθνη, οἵ Ac 15:17 (Am 9:12); cp. 26:17. παιδάριον, ὅς J 6:9. θηρίον, ὅς Rv 13:14. ὀνόματα, οἵ 3:4 v.l. γενεᾶς σκολιᾶς, ἐν οἷς Phil 2:15. W. ref. to Christ, τὴν κεφαλήν, ἐξ οὗ Col 2:19.

ⓓ Attraction (or assimilation) of the relative. Just as in Hdt. and freq. Att., ins, pap, LXX, the simple relative ὅς, ἥ, ὅ is somet. attracted to the case of its antecedent, even though the relationship of the relative within its own clause would demand a different case.

α. In most instances it is the acc. of the rel. that is attracted to the gen. or dat. of the antecedent: περὶ πράγματος οὗ ἐὰν αἰτήσωνται Mt 18:19. τῆς διαθήκης ἧς ὁ θεὸς διέθετο Ac 3:25. Cp. Mt 24:50b; Mk 7:13; Lk 2:20; 3:19; 5:9; 9:43; 15:16; J 4:14; 7:31; 15:20; 17:5; 21:10; Ac 1:1; 2:22; 22:10; 1 Cor 6:19; 2 Cor 1:6; 10:8, 13; Eph 2:10; 2 Th 1:4; Jd 15 al.—When the antecedent is an understood but unexpressed demonstr. pron. (s. b, beg.) that would stand in the gen. or dat., the acc. of a relative pron. can be attracted to this gen. or dat.: οὐδὲν ὧν ἑώρακαν is really οὐδὲν τούτων ἃ ἑώρακαν Lk 9:36 (Schwyzer II 641); ἅ takes on the case of τούτων which, in turn, is omitted (so already Soph., Pla., et al.).—23:14, 41; Ac 8:24; 21:19, 24; 22:15; 25:11; 26:16; Ro 15:18; 1 Cor 7:1; Eph 3:20; Hb 5:8. ὧν = τούτων, οὕς J 17:9; 2 Cor 12:17. οἷς = τούτοις, ἅ Lk 24:25.

β. The dat. of the relative is less frequently attracted (B-D-F §294, 2; Rob. 717) ἕως τῆς ἡμέρας ἧς (=ᾗ) ἀνελήμφθη Ac 1:22 (cp. Lev 23:15; 25:50; Bar 1:19); Eph 1:6; 4:1; 1 Ti 4:6 v.l.; κατέναντι οὗ ἐπίστευσεν θεοῦ = κατέν. τοῦ θεοῦ ᾧ ἐπίστ. Ro 4:17. διὰ τῆς παρακλήσεως ἧς παρακαλούμεθα 2 Cor 1:4.

γ. In relative clauses that consist of subject, predicate, and copula, the relative pron. somet. agrees in gender and number not w. the noun to which it refers, but w. the predicate if it is the subj. and, conversely, w. the subj. if it is the pred. of its own clause: πνεύματι …, ὅς ἐστιν ἀρραβών Eph 1:14 v.l. τῷ σπέρματί σου, ὅς ἐστιν Χριστός Gal 3:16. τὴν μάχαιραν τοῦ πνεύματος, ὅ ἐστιν ῥῆμα θεοῦ Eph 6:17.—Rv 4:5; 5:8.

δ. Inverse attraction occurs when the relative pronoun attracts its antecedent to its own case (as early as Hom.; also Soph., Oed. Rex 449; s. Kühner-G. II 413; Schwyzer II 641; B-D-F §295; Rob. 717f); τὸν ἄρτον ὸ̔ν κλῶμεν, οὐχὶ κοινωνία … ἐστιν; = ὁ ἄρτος ὅν … 1 Cor 10:16. λίθον, ὸ̔ν ἀπεδοκίμασαν … οὗτος ἐγενήθη (Ps 117:22) Mt 21:42; Mk 12:10; Lk 20:17; 1 Pt 2:7 v.l.—παντὶ ᾧ ἐδόθη πολύ, πολὺ ζητηθήσεται παρʼ αὐτοῦ Lk 12:48. ὅρκον, ὸ̔ν ὤμοσεν (=μνησθῆναι ὅρκου ὅν) 1:73 (s. W-S. §24, 7 note). τοὺς λίθους, οὓς εἶδες, ἀποβεβλημένους, οὗτοι … ἐφόρεσαν Hs 9, 13, 3. Cp. 1J 2:25.

ε. Attraction can, as in earlier Gk. (Thu. 2, 70, 4), fail to take place when the relative clause is more distinctly separated fr. its antecedent by additional modifiers of the noun and by the importance attaching to the content of the relative clause itself (B-D-F §294, 1; Rob. 714f): τῆς σκηνῆς τῆς ἀληθινῆς, ἣν ἔπηξεν ὁ κύριος, οὐκ ἄνθρωπος Hb 8:2. But s. also Mk 13:19; J 2:22; 4:5; Ac 8:32; 1 Ti 4:3; Tit 1:2; Phlm 10; Hb 9:7; Rv 1:20.

ⓔ The noun which is the antecedent of a relative clause can be incorporated into the latter

α. without abbreviating the constr. and without attraction of the case: ᾗ οὐ δοκεῖτε ὥρᾳ = τῇ ὥρᾳ ᾗ οὐ δοκ. Mt 24:44; cp. Lk 12:40; 17:29, 30. ἃ ἡτοίμασαν ἀρώματα 24:1. ὸ̔ ἐποίησεν σημεῖον J 6:14. ὸ̔ θέλω ἀγαθόν Ro 7:19.

β. w. abbreviation, in that a prep. normally used twice is used only once: ἐν ᾧ κρίματι κρίνετε κριθήσεσθε = ἐν τῷ κρίματι, ἐν ᾧ κρίνετε, κριθήσεσθε Mt 7:2a. Cp. vs. 2b; Mk 4:24. ἐν ᾧ ἦν τόπῳ = ἐν τῷ τόπῳ ἐν ᾧ ἦν J 11:6. καθʼ ὸ̔ν τρόπον = κατὰ τὸν τρόπον, καθʼ ὅν Ac 15:11.

γ. w. a change in case, due mostly to attraction

א. of the relative pron. περὶ πάντων ὧν ἐποίησεν πονηρῶν = περὶ πάντων πονηρῶν, ἃ ἐπ. Lk 3:19. περὶ πασῶν ὧν εἶδον δυνάμεων = περὶ πασῶν δυνάμεων, ἃς εἶδον 19:37. αἰτίαν … ὧν ἐγὼ ὑπενόουν πονηρῶν Ac 25:18.—The dat. of the relative is also attracted to other cases: ἄχρι ἧς ἡμέρας = ἄχρι τῆς ἡμέρας, ᾖ Mt 24:38; Lk 1:20; 17:27; Ac 1:2. ἀφʼ ἧς ἡμέρας Col 1:6, 9.

ב. of the noun to which the rel. refers: ὸ̔ν ἐγὼ ἀπεκεφάλισα Ἰωάννην, οὗτος ἠγέρθη = Ἰωάννης ὸ̔ν κτλ. Mk 6:16 εἰς ὸ̔ν παρεδόθητε τύπον διδαχῆς = τῷ τύπῳ τῆς διδαχῆς εἰς ὸ̔ν παρεδόθητε Ro 6:17.

δ. The analysis is doubtful in passages like περὶ ὧν κατηχήθης λόγων = περὶ τῶν λόγων οὓς κατηχήθης or τῶν λόγων, περὶ ὧν κατηχήθης Lk 1:4. ἄγοντες παρʼ ᾧ ξενισθῶμεν Μνάσωνι Ac 21:16 must acc. to the sense = ἄγοντες πρὸς Μνάσωνα, ἵνα ξενισθῶμεν παρʼ αὐτῷ. S. B-D-F §294, 5; Rob. 719.

ⓕ The prep. can be omitted before the relative pron. if it has already been used before the antecedent noun: ἐν παντὶ χρόνῳ ᾧ (=ἐν ὧ.) Ac 1:21. εἰς τὸ ἔργον ὅ (=εἰς ὅ) 13:2. ἀπὸ πάντων ὧν (=ἀφʼ ὧν) vs. 38. Cp. 26:2. ἐν τῷ ποτηρίῳ ᾧ (=ἐν ᾧ) Rv 18:6.

ⓖ The neut. is used

α. in explanations, esp. of foreign words and of allegories: ὅ ἐστιν which or that is, which means: βασιλεὺς Σαλήμ, ὅ ἐστιν βασιλεὺς εἰρήνης Hb 7:2; cp. Mt 27:33; Mk 3:17; 7:11, 34; 15:42. Also ὅ ἐστιν μεθερμηνευόμενον Mt 1:23; Mk 5:41; Ac 4:36; cp. J 1:38, 41f. ὅ ἐστιν μεθερμηνευόμενος κρανίου τόπος Mk 15:22 v.l. (for μεθερμηνευόμενον). τόπος, ὸ̔ λέγεται, Ἑβραϊστὶ Γολγοθά J 19:17.—S. also αὐλῆς, ὅ ἐστιν πραιτώριον Mk 15:16. λεπτὰ δὺο, ὅ ἐστιν κοδράντης 12:42. τοῦ σώματος αὐτοῦ, ὅ ἐστιν ἡ ἐκκλησία Col 1:24. πλεονέκτης ὅ ἐστιν εἰδωλολάτρης Eph 5:5. τὴν ἀγάπην ὅ ἐστιν σύνδεσμος τῆς τελειότητος Col 3:14.—B-D-F §132, 2.

β. when the relative pron. looks back upon a whole clause: τοῦτον τ. Ἰησοῦν ἀνέστησεν ὁ θεός, οὗ πάντες ἡμεῖς ἐσμεν μάρτυρες Ac 2:32; cp. 3:15; 11:30; 26:9f; Gal 2:10; Col 1:29; 1 Pt 2:8; Rv 21:8.

γ. ὅ is to be understood as an obj. acc. and gains its content fr. what immediately follows in these places (s. W-S. §24, 9; Rob. 715): ὸ̔ ἀπέθανεν, τῇ ἁμαρτίᾳ ἀπέθανεν ἐφάπαξ = τὸν θάνατον, ὸ̔ν ἀπέθανεν κτλ. what he died, i.e. the death he suffered, he suffered for sin Ro 6:10a; cp. vs. 10b. ὸ̔ νῦν ζῶ ἐν σαρκί the life that I now live in the flesh Gal 2:20.

ⓗ The relative is used w. consecutive or final mng. (result or purpose): τίς ἔγνω νοῦν κυρίου, ὸ̔ς συμβιβάσει αὐτόν; who has known the mind of the Lord, so that he could instruct him? 1 Cor 2:16 (cp. Is 40:13). ἄξιός ἐστιν ᾧ παρέξῃ τοῦτο he is worthy that you should grant him this Lk 7:4. ἀποστέλλω τὸν ἄγγελόν μου …, ὸ̔ς κατασκευάσει Mt 11:10. ἔπεμψα Τιμόθεον …, ὸ̔ς ὑμᾶς ἀναμνήσει 1 Cor 4:17. ἔχετε μεθʼ ἑαυτῶν, εἰς οὓς ἐργάσεσθε τὸ καλόν 21:2.

ⓘ taking the place of the interrogative pron.

α. in indirect questions (Soph., Oed. Rex 1068; Thu. 1, 136, 4; Attic ins of 411 B.C. in Meisterhans³-Schw.; pap [Witkowski 30, 7]; oft. Joseph. [Schmidt 369]; Just., D. 44, 4 διʼ ἧς ὁδοῦ). ὸ̔ ἐγὼ ποιῶ what I am doing J 13:7. ἃ λέγουσιν 1 Ti 1:7 (Just., D. 9, 1 οὐ γὰρ οἶδας ὸ̔ λέγεις).—J 18:21.

β. NT philology has generally dismissed the proposition that ὅς is used in direct questions (Mlt. 93; B-D-F §300, 2; Radermacher² 78; PMaas [see 1bβב above]). An unambiguous example of it is yet to be found. Even the ins on a goblet in Dssm., LO 100ff [LAE 125–31], ET 33, 1922, 491–93 leaves room for doubt. Therefore also the translation of ἐφʼ ὸ̔ πάρει Mt 26:50 as ‘what are you here for?’ (so Goodsp., Probs. 41–43; similarly, as early as Luther, later Dssm.; JWilson, ET 41, 1930, 334) has been held suspect. S. ZNW 52, ’61, 109ff.—Rob. 725 doubts the interrogative here, but Mlt-Turner 50 inclines toward it. If further proof for interrogative use of ὅς can be found, lit.-crit. considerations (s. vv. 14–16) invite attention to the v.l. (s. Tdf. app.) ἐφʼ ᾦ, a combination used in commercial documents (PGrenf II, 17, 2; 5; Mayser II/1 p. 215); the colloquial use suggests the sense: What deal did you make?—See also 1bβב above.

ⓙ combined w. particles

α. with ἄν (ἐάν), s. ἄν I. b.

β. with γέ (s. γέ aβ and cp. PFlor 370, 9) Ro 8:32.

γ. w. δήποτε whatever J 5:3(4) v.l. (the vv.ll. vary betw. οἵῳ and ᾧ, δηποτοῦν and δήποτε).

δ. w. καί who also Mk 3:19; Lk 6:13f; 7:49 al.

ε. with περ = ὅσπερ, ἥπερ, ὅπερ (TestSol, TestAbr; TestJob 7:13; JosAs 14:12; GrBar; ApcSed 2:1; Jos., Ant. 2, 277, Vi. 95; apolog. [exc. Mel.]) just the one who Mk 15:6 v.l. ὅπερ which indeed Ox 840, 35; ISm 4:1. πάντα ἅπερ whatever GPt 11:45.

ⓚ used w. preposition (s. also above: 1bα; 1bβב; 1eβ,γ; 1f, and s. Johannessohn, Präp. 382f [ind.]), whereby a kind of conjunction is formed:

α. with ἀντί: ἀνθʼ ὧν (s. ἀντί 4) because Lk 1:20; 19:44; Ac 12:23; 2 Th 2:10; therefore Lk 12:3.

β. w. εἰς: εἰς ὅ to this end 2 Th 1:11.

γ. with ἐν: ἐν οἷς connects w. the situation described in what precedes under which circumstances = under these circumstances Lk 12:1; Ac 24:18 v.l.; 26:12. So also perh. ἐν ᾧ 1 Pt 1:6; 2:12; 3:16, 19; 4:4. S. also ἐν 7 and cp. 1bα above.

δ. w. ἐπί: ἐφʼ ᾧ (normally, ‘for which’: Plut., Cimon 483 [8, 6] Cimon receives honors in requital for his generous deed [cp. the pl. ἐφʼ οἷς IPriene 114, 22 of honors heaped on a gymnasiarch for his numerous contributions]; cp. Plut., Mor. 522e and Diog. L. 7, 173. Conversely Plut., Aratus 1048 [44, 4]: A. suffers some dishonor ‘for what’ he did to one of his associates) has freq. been interpreted=ἐπὶ τούτῳ ὅτι for the reason that, because Ro 5:12 (lit. on ἁμαρτία 3a); 2 Cor 5:4; Phil 3:12; for 4:10. But a commercial metaphor may find expression in the first 3 passages cited here; s. ἐπί 6c. Difft. on Ro 5:12 JFitzmyer, NTS 39, ’93, 321–39; also comm. (Anchor), ad loc.: ‘with the result that, so that’

ε. οὗ χάριν therefore Lk 7:47.

ζ. in indications of time: ἀφʼ ἧς (s. ἀπό 2bγ and cp. BGU 252, 9 [98 A.D.]) from the time when; since Lk 7:45; Ac 24:11; 2 Pt 3:4; Hs 8, 6, 6 v.l.; as soon as, after 8, 1, 4.—ἀφʼ οὗ (s. ἀπό 2bγ) when once, since Lk 13:25; 24:21; Rv 16:18. ἄχρι οὗ (s. ἄχρι 1bα) until (the time when) Ac 7:18; Ro 11:25; 1 Cor 11:26; Gal 3:19. Also ἕως οὗ until Mt 1:25; 13:33; 14:22; 17:9; Lk 13:21; D 11:6 al. μέχρις οὗ until Mk 13:30; Gal 4:19.—On the gen. οὗ as an adv. of place s. it as a separate entry.

② Demonstrative pron. this (one) (Hom.+; prose of Hdt. et al. [Kühner-G. II 228f]; pap, LXX).

ⓐ ὸ̔ς δέ but he (Ps.-Lucian, Philopatris 22; PRyl 144, 14 [38 A.D.]) Mk 15:23; J 5:11 v.l. Mostly

ⓑ ὸ̔ς μὲν … ὸ̔ς δέ the one … the other (Hippocr.+; very oft. in later wr.; POxy 1189, 7 [c. 117 A.D.]; SibOr 3, 654) the masc. in var. cases of sing. and pl. Mt 22:5; Lk 23:33; Ac 27:44; Ro 14:5; 1 Cor 11:21; 2 Cor 2:16; Jd 22f. ὸ̔ μὲν … ὸ̔ δέ this … that Ro 9:21. ἃ μὲν … ἃ δέ (Lucian, Rhet. Praec. 15) some … others 2 Ti 2:20. ὸ̔ς μὲν … ὸ̔ς δὲ … ὸ̔ς δέ Mt 21:35; 25:15 (Lucian, Tim. 57 διδοὺς … ᾧ μὲν πέντε δραχμάς, ᾧ δέ μνᾶν, ᾧ δὲ ἡμιτάλαντον). ὸ̔ μὲν … ὸ̔ δὲ … ὸ̔ δέ Mt 13:8b, 23. ᾧ μὲν … ἄλλῳ δὲ … ἑτέρῳ (ἄλλῳ δέ is then repeated five times, and before the last one there is a second ἑτέρῳ) 1 Cor 12:8–10. ὸ̔ μὲν … καὶ ἄλλο κτλ. Mk 4:4. ὸ̔ μὲν … καὶ ἕτερον (repeated several times) Lk 8:5. ἃ μὲν … ἄλλα δέ (repeated several times) Mt 13:4–8a. In anacoluthon οὓς μέν without οὓς δέ 1 Cor 12:28. ὸ̔ς μὲν … ὁ δὲ ἀσθενῶν Ro 14:2.—B-D-F §250. MBlack, An Aramaic Approach³, ’67, 100f.—DELG 1 ὅς. M-M.

Ελληνικά-Αγγλικά παλαιοχριστιανική Λογοτεχνία > ὅς
6 ἄν

ἄν (A), [pron. full] [ᾰ], [dialect] Ep., Lyr., [dialect] Ion., Arc., [dialect] Att.; also κεν) [dialect] Ep., [dialect] Aeol., Thess., κᾱ [dialect] Dor., [dialect] Boeot., El.; the two combined in [dialect] Ep. (infr. D. 11.2) and Arc.,

A εἰκ ἄν IG5(2).6.2
, 15 (iv B. C.):—modal Particle used with Verbs to indicate that the action is limited by circumstances or defined by conditions. In Hom. κε is four times as common as ἄν, in Lyr. about equally common. No clear distinction can be traced, but κε as an enclitic is somewhat less emphatic; ἄν is preferred by Hom. in negative clauses, κε ([etym.] ν) with the relative.

A In Simple Sentences, and in the Apodosis of Compound Sentences; here ἄν belongs to the Verb, and denotes that the assertion made by the Verb is dependent on a condition, expressed or implied: thus ἦλθεν he came, ἦλθεν ἄν he would have come (under conditions, which may or may not be defined), and so he might have come; ἔλθοι may he come, ἔλθοι ἄν he would come (under certain conditions), and so he might come.

I WITH INDICATIVE:

1 with historical tenses, generally [tense] impf. and [tense] aor., less freq. [tense] plpf., never [tense] pf., v. infr.,

a most freq. in apodosis of conditional sentences, with protasis implying nonfulfilment of a past or present condition, and apod. expressing what would be or would have been the case if the condition were or had been fulfilled. The [tense] impf. with ἄν refers to continued action, in Hom. always in past time, exc. perh. καί κε θάμ' ἐνθάδ' ἐόντες ἐμισγόμεθ' Od.4
. 178; later also in [tense] pres. time, first in Thgn.905; πολὺ ἂν θαυμαστότερον ἦν, εἰ ἐτιμῶντο it would be far more strange if they were honoured, Pl.R. 489a; οὐκ ἂν νήσων ἐκράτει, εἰ μή τι καὶ ναυτικὸν εἶχεν he would not have been master of islands if he had not had also some naval power, Th.1.9. The [tense] aor. strictly refers only to past time, Pi.N.11.24, etc.; εἰ τότε ταύτην ἔσχε τὴν γνώμην, οὐδὲν ἂν ὧν νυνὶ πεποίηκεν ἔπραξεν if he had then come to this opinion, he would have accomplished nothing of what he has now done, D.4.5, al., but is used idiomatically with Verbs of saying, answering, etc., as we say I should have said, εἰ μὴ πατὴρ ἦσθ', εἶπον ἄν σ' οὐκ εὖ φρονεῖν S.Ant. 755
, cf. Pl.Smp. 199d, Euthphr. 12d, etc.: the [tense] plpf. refers to completed actions, as ὃ εἰ ἀπεκρίνω, ἱκανῶς ἂν ἤδη παρὰ σοῦ τὴν ὁσιότητα ἐμεμαθήκη I should have already learnt.., ib. 14c; εἰ ὁ ἀνὴρ ἀπέθανεν, δικαίως ἂν ἐτεθνήκει Antipho 4.2.3
.

b the protasis is freq. understood: ὑπό κεν ταλασίφρονά περ δέος εἷλεν fear would have seized even the stout-hearted (had he heard the sound), Il.4.421; τὸ γὰρ ἔρυμα τῷ στρατοπέδῳ οὐκ ἂν ἐτειχίσαντο they would not have built the wall (if they had not won a battle), Th.1.11; πολλοῦ γὰρ ἂν ἦν ἄξια for (if that were so) they would be worth much, Pl.R. 374d; οὐ γὰρ ἦν ὅ τι ἂν ἐποιεῖτε for there was nothing which you could have done, i. e. would have done (if you had tried), D.18.43.

c with no definite protasis understood, to express what would have been likely to happen, or might have happened in past time: ἢ γάρ μιν ζωόν γε κιχήσεαι, ἤ κεν Ὀρέστης κτεῖνεν ὑποφθάμενος for either you will find him alive, or else Orestes may already have killed him before you, Od.4.546; ὃ θεασάμενος πᾶς ἄν τις ἀνὴρ ἠράσθη δάϊος εἶναι every man who saw this (the 'Seven against Thebes') would have longed to be a warrior, Ar. Ra. 1022; esp. with τάχα, q. v., ἀλλ' ἦλθε μὲν δὴ τοῦτο τοὔνειδος τάχ' ἂν ὀργῇ βιασθὲν μᾶλλον ἢ γνώμῃ φρενῶν, i. e. it might perhaps have come, S.OT 523; τάχα ἂν δὲ καὶ ἄλλως πως ἐσπλεύσαντες (sc. διέβησαν ) and they might also perhaps have crossed by sea (to Sicily) in some other way, Th.6.2, cf. Pl.Phdr. 265b.

d ἄν is freq. omitted in apodosi with Verbs expressing obligation, propriety, or possibility, as ἔδει, ἐχρῆν, εἰκὸς ἦν, etc., and sts. for rhetorical effect, εἰ μὴ.. ᾖσμεν, φόβον παρέσχεν it had caused (for it would have caused) fear, E.Hec. 1113. This use becomes more common in later Gk.

2 with [tense] fut. ind.:

a frequently in [dialect] Ep., usu. with κεν, rarely ἄν, Il.9.167, 22.66, indicating a limitation or condition, ὁ δέ κεν κεχολώσεται ὅν κεν ἵκωμαι and he will likely be angry to whom- soever I shall come, ib.1.139; καί κέ τις ὧδ' ἐρέει and in that case men will say, 4.176; ἐγὼ δέ κέ τοι καταλέξω Od.3.80
; so in Lyr., μαθὼν δέ τις ἂν ἐρεῖ Pi.N.7.68
, cf. I.6(5).59.

b rarely in codd. of [dialect] Att. Prose writers, σαφὲς ἂν καταστήσετε Th.1.140
; οὐχ ἥκει, οὐδ' ἂν ἥξει δεῦρο Pl.R. 615d
, cf. Ap. 29c, X.An.2.5.13; dub. in Hp.Mul.2.174: in later Prose, Philostr. V A2.21, S E.M.9.225: also in Poetry, E.El. 484, Ar.Av. 1313; οὐκ ἂν προδώσω Herod.6.36
(corr. - δοίην):— for ἄν with [tense] fut. inf. and part. v. infr.

II WITH SUBJUNCTIVE, only in [dialect] Ep., the meaning being the same as with the [tense] fut. ind. (1.2a), freq. with [ per.] 1st pers., as εἰ δέ κε μὴ δώῃσιν, ἐγὼ δέ κεν αὐτὸς ἕλωμαι in that case I will take her myself, Il.1.324; πείθευ, ἐγὼ δέ κέ τοι εἰδέω χάριν obey and if so I will be grateful, 14.235 (the subj. is always introduced by δέ in this usage); also with other persons, giving emphasis to the future, οὐκ ἄν τοι χραίσμῃ κίθαρις 3.54
, al.

III WITH OPTATIVE (never [tense] fut., rarely [tense] pf. πῶς ἂν λελήθοι [με]; X.Smp.3.6):

a in apodosis of conditional sentences, after protasis in opt. with εἰ or some other conditional or relative word, expressing a [tense] fut. condition: ἀλλ' εἴ μοί τι πίθοιο, τό κεν πολὺ κέρδιον εἴη Il.7.28
; οὐ πολλὴ ἂν ἀλογία εἴη, εἰ φοβοῖτο τὸν θάνατον; Pl.Phd. 68b
:—in Hom. [tense] pres. and [tense] aor. opt. with κε or ἄν are sts. used like [tense] impf. and [tense] aor. ind. with ἄν in Attic, with either regular ind. or another opt. in the protasis: καί νύ κεν ἔνθ' ἀπόλοιτο.. εἰ μὴ.. νόησε κτλ., i. e. he would have perished, had she not perceived, etc., Il.5.311, cf. 5.388, 17.70; εἰ νῦν ἐπὶ ἄλλῳ ἀεθλεύοιμεν, ἦ τ' ἂν ἐγὼ.. κλισίηνδε φεροίμην if we were now contending in another's honour, I should now carry.., ib.23.274: so rarely in Trag., οὐδ' ἂν σὺ φαίης, εἴ σε μὴ κνίζοι λέχος (for εἰ μὴ ἔκνιζε) E.Med. 568.

b with protasis in [tense] pres. or [tense] fut., the opt. with ἄν in apodosi takes a simply future sense: φρούριον δ' εἰ ποιήσονται, τῆς μὲν γῆς βλάπτοιεν ἄν τι μέρος they might perhaps damage, Th.1.142, cf. 2.60, Pl.Ap. 25b, R. 333e; ἢν οὖν μάθῃς.. οὐκ ἂν ἀποδοίην Ar.Nu. 116
, cf. D.1.26, al.

c with protasis understood: φεύγωμεν· ἔτι γάρ κεν ἀλύξαιμεν κακὸν ἦμαρ Od.10.269
; οὔτε ἐσθίουσι πλείω ἢ δύνανται φέρειν· διαρραγεῖεν γὰρ ἄν for (if they should do so) they would burst, X. Cyr.8.2.21; τὸν δ' οὔ κε δύ' ἀνέρε.. ἀπ' οὔδεος ὀχλίσσειαν two men could not heave the stone from the ground, i. e. would not, if they should try, Il.12.447; οὐδ' ἂν δικαίως ἐς κακὸν πέσοιμί τι S.Ant. 240
, cf. D.2.8: in Hom. sts. with ref. to past time, Τυδεΐδην οὐκ ἂν γνοίης ποτέροισι μετείη Il.5.85
.

d with no definite protasis implied, in potential sense: ἡδέως δ' ἂν ἐροίμην Λεπτίνην but I would gladly ask Leptines, D.20.129; βουλοίμην ἄν I should like , Lat. velim (but ἐβουλόμην ἄν I should wish, if it were of any avail, vellem); ποῖ οὖν τραποίμεθ' ἄν; which way then can we turn? Pl.Euthd. 290a; οὐκ ἂν μεθείμην τοῦ θρόνου I will not give up the throne, Ar.Ra. 830; idiomatically, referring to the past, αὗται δὲ οὐκ ἂν πολλαὶ εἶεν but these would not (on investigation) prove to be many, Th.1.9; εἴησαν δ' ἂν οὗτοι Κρῆτες these would be (i. e. would have been) Cretans, Hdt.1.2: used in order to soften assertions by giving them a less positive form, as οὐκ ἂν οὖν πάνυ γέ τι σπουδαῖον εἴη ἡ δικαιοσύνη, i.e. it would not prove to be, etc. (for, it is not, etc.), Pl.R. 333e.

e in questions, expressing a wish: τίς ἂν θεῶν.. δοίη; S.OC 1100
, cf.A.Ag. 1448; πῶς ἂν θάνοιμι; S.Aj. 389
: hence (with no question) as a mild command, exhortation, or entreaty, τλαίης κεν Μενελάῳ ἐπιπροέμεν ταχὺν ἰόν Il.4.94
; σὺ μὲν κομίζοις ἂν σεαυτὸν ᾗ θέλεις you may take yourself off (milder than κόμιζε σεαυτόν), S.Ant. 444; χωροῖς ἂν εἴσω you may go in, El. 1491; κλύοις ἂν ἤδη, Φοῖβε hear me now, Phoebus, ib. 637; φράζοις ἄν, λέγοις ἄν, Pl.Phlb. 23c, 48b.

f in a protasis which is also an apodosis: εἴπερ ἄλλῳ τῳ ἀνθρώπων πειθοίμην ἄν, καὶ σοὶ πείθομαι if I would trust any (other) man (if he gave me his word), I trust you, Id.Prt. 329b; εἰ μὴ ποιήσαιτ' ἂν τοῦτο if you would not do this (if you could), D.4.18, cf. X.Mem.1.5.3, Plot.6.4.16.

g rarely omitted with opt. in apodosis: ῥεῖα θεός γ' ἐθέλων καὶ τηλόθεν ἄνδρα σαώσαι Od.3.231
, cf. 14.123, Il.5.303; also in Trag., θᾶσσον ἢ λέγοι τις E.Hipp. 1186
; τεὰν δύνασιν τίς.. κατάσχοι; S.Ant. 605
.

h ἄν c. [tense] fut. opt. is prob. always corrupt (cf. 1.2b), as τὸν αὐτὸν ἂν ἐπαινέσοι ( ἐπαινέσαι Bekk.) Pl.Lg. 719e; εἰδὼς ὅτι οὐδέν' ἂν καταλήψοιτο ( οὐδένα Bekk.) Lys.1.22.

IV WITH INF. and PART. (sts. ADJ. equivalent to part., τῶν δυνατῶν ἂν κρῖναι Pl.R. 577b
) representing ind. or opt.:

1 [tense] pres. inf. or part.:

a representing [tense] impf. ind., οἴεσθε τὸν πατέρα.. οὐκ ἂν φυλάττειν; do you think he would not have kept them safe? ([etym.] οὐκ ἂν ἐφύλαττεν), D.49.35; ἀδυνάτων ἂν ὄντων [ὑμῶν] ἐπιβοηθεῖν when you would have been unable, Th.1.73, cf. 4.40.

b representing [tense] pres. opt., πόλλ' ἂν ἔχων (representing ἔχοιμ' ἄν) ἕτερ' εἰπεῖν παραλείπω D. 18.258
, cf. X.An.2.3.18: with Art., τὸ ἐθέλειν ἂν ἰέναι ἄκλητος ἐπὶ δεῖπνον Pl.Smp. 174b
.

2 [tense] aor. inf. or part.:

a representing [tense] aor. ind., οὐκ ἂν ἡγεῖσθ' αὐτὸν κἂν ἐπιδραμεῖν; do you not think he would even have run thither? ([etym.] καὶ ἐπέδραμεν ἄν), D.27.56; ἴσμεν ὑμᾶς ἀναγκασθέντας ἄν we know you would have been compelled, Th.1.76, cf. 3.89; ῥᾳδίως ἂν ἀφεθείς when he might easily have been acquitted, X.Mem.4.4.4.

b representing [tense] aor. opt., οὐδ' ἂν κρατῆσαι αὐτοὺς τῆς γῆς ἡγοῦμαι I think they would not even be masters of the land ([etym.] οὐδ' ἂν κρατήσειαν), Th.6.37, cf. 2.20; ὁρῶν ῥᾳδίως ἂν αὐτὸ ληφθέν ([etym.] ληφθείη ἄν) Id.7.42; οὔτε ὄντα οὔτε ἂν γενόμενα, i.e. things which are not and never could happen ([etym.] ἃ οὔτε ἂν γένοιτο), Id.6.38.

3 [tense] pf. inf. or part. representing:

a [tense] plpf. ind., πάντα ταῦθ' ὑπὸ τῶν βαρβάρων ἂν ἑαλωκέναι ([etym.] φήσειεν ἄν ) he would say that all these would have been destroyed by the barbarians ([etym.] ἑαλώκη ἄν), D.19.312.

b [tense] pf. opt., οὐκ ἂν ἡγοῦμαι αὐτοὺς δίκην ἀξίαν δεδωκέναι, εἰ.. καταψηφίσαισθε I do not believe they would (then) have suffered ([etym.] δεδωκότες ἂν εἶεν) punishment enough, etc., Lys.27.9.

4 [tense] fut. inf.or part., never in [dialect] Ep., and prob. always corrupt in [dialect] Att., νομίζων μέγιστον ἂν σφᾶς ὠφελήσειν (leg. - ῆσαι) Th.5.82, cf. 6.66, 8.25,71; part. is still more exceptional, ὡς ἐμοῦ οὐκ ἂν ποιήσοντος ἄλλα Pl.Ap. 30c
(codd.), cf. D.19.342 (v. l.); both are found in later Gk., νομίσαντες ἂν οἰκήσειν οὕτως ἄριστα Plb.8.30.8
, cf. Plu.Marc.15, Arr.An.2.2.3; with part., Epicur. Nat.14.1, Luc.Asin.26, Lib.Or.62.21, dub. l. in Arr.An.6.6.5.

B IN DEPENDENT CLAUSES.

I In the protasis of conditional sentences with εἰ, regularly with the subjunctive. In Attic εἰ ἄν is contracted into ἐάν, ἤν, or ἄν ([etym.] ᾱ) (q. v.): Hom. has generally εἴ κε (or αἴ κε), sts. ἤν, once εἰ δ' ἄν Il.3.288
, twice εἴπερ ἄν 5.224
, 232. The protasis expresses either future condition (with apod. of [tense] fut. time) or general condition (with apod. of repeated action): εἰ δέ κεν ὣς ἔρξῃς καί τοι πείθωνται Ἀχαιοί, γνώσῃ ἔπειθ' ὅς .. if thus thou shalt do.., ib.2.364; ἢν ἐγγὺς ἔλθῃ θάνατος, οὐδεὶς βούλεται θνῄσκειν if death (ever) come near.., E.Alc. 671.

2 in relative or temporal clauses with a conditional force; here ἄν coalesces with ὅτε, ὁπότε, ἐπεί, ἐπειδή, cf. ὅταν, ὁπόταν, ἐπήν or ἐπάν ([dialect] Ion. ἐπεάν) , ἐπειδάν: Hom. has ὅτε κε (sts. ὅτ' ἄν) , ὁππότε κε (sts. ὁπότ' ἄν or ὁππότ' ἄν) , ἐπεί κε ( ἐπεὶ ἄν Il.6.412
), ἐπήν, εὖτ' ἄν; v. also εἰσόκε ([etym.] εἰς ὅ κε):—τάων ἥν κ' ἐθέλωμι φίλην ποιήσομ' ἄκοιτιν whomsoever of these I may wish.., Il.9.397; ὅταν δὴ μὴ σθένω, πεπαύσομαι when I shall have no strength.., S.Ant.91; ἐχθρὸς γάρ μοι κεῖνος.. ὅς χ' ἕτερον μὲν κεύθῃ ἐνὶ φρεσίν, ἄλλο δὲ εἴπῃ who ever conceals one thing in his mind and speaks another, Il.9.312, cf. D.4.6, Th.1.21. —Hom. uses subj. in both the above constructions (1 and 2 ) without ἄν; also Trag. and Com., S.Aj. 496, Ar.Eq. 805; μέχρι and πρίν occasionally take subj. without ἄν in prose, e.g. Th.1.137,4.16 ([etym.] μέχρι οὗ), Pl.Phd. 62c, Aeschin.3.60.

3 in final clauses introduced by relative Advbs., as ὡς, ὅπως (of Manner), ἵνα (of Place), ὄφρα, ἕως, etc. (of Time), freq. in [dialect] Ep., σαώτερος ὥς κε νέηαι Il.1.32
; ὄφρα κεν εὕδῃ Od.3.359
; ὅπως ἂν εἰδῇ.. φράσω A.Pr. 824
; ὅπως ἂν φαίνηται κάλλιστος Pl.Smp. 198e
; μηχανητέον ὅπως ἂν διαφύγῃ Grg. 481a
(where ὅπως with [tense] fut. ind. is the regular constr.); also after ὡς in Hdt., Trag., X.An.2.5.16, al., once in Th.6.91 (but [tense] fut. ind. is regular in [dialect] Att.); ἵνα final does not take ἄν or κε exc. ἵνα εἰδότες ἤ κε θάνωμεν ἤ κεν.. φύγοιμεν Od.12.156
( ἵνα = where in S.OC 405). μή, = lest, takes ἄν only with opt. in apodosis, as S.Tr. 631, Th.2.93.

II in [dialect] Ep. sts. with OPTATIVE as with subj. (always κε ([etym.] ν), exc. εἴ περ ἂν αὐταὶ Μοῦσαι ἀείδοιεν Il.2.597
), εἴ κεν Ἄρης οἴχοιτο Od.8.353
; ὥς κε.. δοίη ᾧ κ' ἐθέλοι that he might give her to whomsoever he might please, ib.2.54: so in Hdt. in final clauses, 1.75,99:—in Od.23.135 ὥς κέν τις φαίη, κέν belongs to Verb in apod., as in ὡς δ' ἂν ἥδιστα ταῦτα φαίνοιτο X.Cyr.7.5.81
.

2 rarely in oratio obliqua, where a relat. or temp. word retains an ἄν which it would have with subj. in direct form, S.Tr. 687, X.Mem.1.2.6, Isoc.17.15; ἐπειδὰν δοκιμασθείην D.30.6
:—similarly after a preceding opt., οὐκ ἀποκρίναιο ἕως ἂν.. σκέψαιο Pl.Phd. 101d
.

III rarely with εἰ and INDICATIVE in protasis, only in [dialect] Ep.:

1 with [tense] fut. ind. as with subj.: αἴ κεν Ἰλίου πεφιδήσεται Il.15.213
:—so with relat., οἵ κέ με τιμήσουσι 1.175
.

2 with εἰ and a past tense of ind., once in Hom., εἰ δέ κ' ἔτι προτέρω γένετο δρόμος Il.23.526
; so Ζεὺς γάρ κ' ἔθηκε νῆσον εἴ κ' ἐβούλετο Orac. ap. Hdt.1.174, cf. Ar.Lys. 1099 (cod. R), A.R.1.197.

IV in later Greek, ἄν with relative words is used with INDICATIVE in all tenses, as ὅπου ἂν εἰσεπορεύετο Ev.Marc.6.56
; ὅσ' ἂν πάσχετε PFay. 136
(iv A. D.); ἔνθ' ἂν πέφυκεν ἡ ὁλότης εἶναι Phlp. in Ph.436.19
; cf. ἐάν, ὅταν.

C with [tense] impf. and more rarely [tense] aor. ind. in ITERATIVE construction, to express elliptically a condilion fulfilled whenever an opportumty offered; freq. in Hdt. (not in Pi. or A.), κλαίεσκε ἂν καὶ ὀδυρέσκετο she would (i. e. used to) weep and lament, 3.119; εἶτα πῦρ ἂν οὐ παρῆν S.Ph. 295
; εἴ τινες ἴδοιεν.., ἀνεθάρσησαν ἄν whenever they saw it, on each occasion, Th.7.71; διηρώτων ἂν αὐτοὺς τί λέγοιεν Pl.Ap. 22b
: inf. representing [tense] impf. of this constr., ἀκούω Λακεδαιμονίους τότε ἐμβαλόντας ἂν.. ἀναχωρεῖν, i. e. I hear they used to retire ([etym.] ἀνεχώρουν ἄν), D.9.48.

D GENERAL REMARKS:

I POSITION OF ἄν.

1 in A, when ἄν does not coalesce with the relat. word (as in ἐάν, ὅταν), it follows directly or is separated only by other particles, as μέν, δέ, τε, ga/r, kai/, νυ, περ, etc.; as εἰ μέν κεν.. εἰ δέ κε Il.3.281
-4; rarely by τις, as ὅποι τις ἄν, οἶμαι, προσθῇ D.2.14
:—in Hom. and Hes. two such Particles may precede κε, as εἴ περ γάρ κεν Od.8.355
, cf. Il.2.123; εἰ γάρ τίς κε, ὃς μὲν γάρ κε, Hes.Op. 280, 357; rarely in Prose, ὅποι μὲν γὰρ ἄν D.4.45
; ὁπότερος οὖν ἄν Ar.Ra. 1420
: also ὁπόσῳ πλέον ἄν Pl.Lg. 647e
, cf. 850a; ὅπου τὸ πάλαι λεγόμενον ἂν γίγνηται 739c
.

2 in apodosis, ἄν may stand either next to its Verb (before or after it), or after some other emphatic word, esp. an interrog., a negative (e. g. οὐδ' ἂν εἷς, οὐκ ἂν ἔτι, etc.), or an important Adjective or Adverb; also after a participle which represents the protasis, λέγοντος ἄν τινος πιστεῦσαι οἴεσθε; do you think they would have believed it if any one had told them? ([etym.] εἴ τις ἔλεγεν, ἐπίστευσαν ἄν), D.6.20.

3 ἄν is freq. separated from its inf. by such Verbs as οἴομαι, δοκέω, φημί, οἶδα, etc., οὐκ ἂν οἴει .. ; freq. in Pl., Grg. 486d, al.; καὶ νῦν ἡδέως ἄν μοι δοκῶ κοινωνῆσαι I think that I should, X.Cyr.8.7.25; οὕτω γὰρ ἄν μοι δοκεῖ ἥ τε πόλις ἄριστα διοικεῖσθαι Aeschin.3.2
; ἃ μήτε προῄδει μηδεὶς μήτ' ἂν ᾠήθη τήμερον ῥηθῆναι (where ἄν belongs to ῥηθῆναι) D. 18.225:—in the phrase οὐκ οἶδ' ἂν εἰ, or οὐκ ἂν οἶδ' εἰ, ἄν belongs not to οἶδα, but to the Verb which follows, οὐκ οἶδ' ἂν εἰ πείσαιμι, for οὐκ οἶδα εἰ πείσαιμι ἄν, E.Med. 941, cf. Alc.48; οὐκ ἂν οἶδ' εἰ δυναίμην Pl. Ti. 26b
; οὐκ οἶδ' ἂν εἰ ἐκτησάμην X.Cyr.5.4.12
.

4 ἄν never begins a sentence, or even a clause after a comma, but may stand first after a parenthetic clause, ἀλλ', ὦ μέλ', ἄν μοι σιτίων διπλῶν ἔδει Ar. Pax
<*>37.

II REPETITION OF ἄν:—in apodosis ἄν may be used twice or even three times with the same Verb, either to make the condition felt throughout a long sentence, or to emphasize certain words, ὥστ' ἄν, εἰ σθένος λάβοιμι, δηλώσαιμ' ἄν S.El. 333
, cf. Ant.69, A.Ag. 340, Th.1.76 (fin.), 2.41, Pl.Ap. 31a, Lys.20.15; ἀφανεῖς ἂν ὄντες οὐκ ἂν ὑμνήθημεν ἄν E.Tr. 1244
, cf. S.Fr. 739; attached to a parenthetical phrase, ἔδρασ' ἄν, εὖ τοῦτ' ἴσθ' ἄν, εἰ .. Id.OT 1438.

2 ἄν is coupled with κε ([etym.] ν ) a few times in Hom., as Il.11.187, 202, Od.5.361, al.; cf. ἤν περ γάρ κ' ἐθέλωσιν v.l. ib.18.318.

III ELLIPSIS OF VERB:—sts. the Verb to which ἄν belongs must be supplied, in Hom. only εἰμί, as τάτ' ἔλδεται ὅς κ' ἐπιδευής (sc. ᾖ) Il.5.481; ἀλλ' οὐκ ἂν πρὸ τοῦ (sc. ἔρρεγκον) Ar.Nu.5; τί δ' ἂν δοκεῖ σοι Πρίαμος (sc. πρᾶξαι) , εἰ τάδ' ἤνυσεν; A.Ag. 935
:—so in phrases like πῶς γὰρ ἄν; and πῶς οὐκ ἄν (sc. εἴη); also in ὥσπερ ἂν εἰ (or ὡσπερανεί), as φοβούμενος ὥσπερ ἂν εἰ παῖς (i. e. ὥσπερ ἂν ἐφοβήθη εἰ παῖς ἦν) Pl.Grg. 479a; so τοσοῦτον ἐφρόνησαν, ὅσον περ ἂν (sc. ἐφρόνησαν) εἰ.. Isoc.10.48
:—so also when κἂν εἰ ( = καὶ ἂν εἰ) has either no Verb in the apod. or one to which ἄν cannot belong, Pl.R. 477a, Men. 72c; cf. κἄν:—so the Verb of a protasis containing ἄν may be understood, ὅποι τις ἂν προσθῇ, κἂν μικρὰν δύναμιν (i. e. καὶ ἐὰν προσθῇ) D.2.14; ὡς ἐμοῦ οὖν ἰόντος ὅπῃ ἂν καὶ ὑμεῖς (sc. ἴητε) X.An.1.3.6.

IV ELLIPSIS OF ἄν:—when an apodosis consists of several co-ordinate clauses, ἄν is generally used only in the first and understood in the others: πείθοι' ἂν εἰ πείθοι'· ἀπειθοίης δ' ἴσως A.Ag. 1049
: even when the construction is continued in a new sentence, Pl.R. 352e, cf. 439b codd.: but ἄν is repeated for the sake of clearness or emphasis, ib. 398a, cf. D.19.156 (where an opt. is implied with the third ὡς): rarely expressed with the second of two co-ordinate Verbs and understood with the first, τοῦτον ἂν.. θαρσοίην ἐγὼ καλῶς μὲν ἄρχειν, εὖ δ' ἂν ἄρχεσθαι θέλειν (i. e. καλῶς μὲν ἂν ἄρχοι, εὖ δ' ἂν θέλοι ἄρχεσθαι) S.Ant. 669.

------------------------------------

ἄν (B), [pron. full] [ᾱ], [dialect] Att.,

A = ἐάν, ἤν, Th.4.46 codd., al.; freq. in Pl., ἂν σωφρονῇ Phd. 61b
; ἂν θεὸς θέλῃ ib. 80d, cf. D.4.50; ἄν τ'.. ἄν τε Arist. Ath.48.4
: not common in earlier [dialect] Att. Inscrr., IG1.2a5, 2.179b49, al.: but freq. later, SIG1044.27 (iv/iii B. C.), PPetr.2p.47 (iii B. C.), PPar.32.19 (ii B. C.), PTeb.110.8 (i B. C.), Ev.Jo.20.23, etc.

------------------------------------

ἄν (C) or [full] ἀν, Epic form of ἀνά, q. v.

------------------------------------

ἄν (D), shortened from ἄνα, v. sub ἀνά G.

Greek-English dictionary (Αγγλικά Ελληνικά-λεξικό) > ἄν
7 υἱός

υἱός, οῦ, ὁ (Hom.+; loanw. in rabb.) prim. ‘son’

① a male who is in a kinship relationship either biologically or by legal action, son, offspring, descendant

ⓐ the direct male issue of a person, son τέξεται υἱόν Mt 1:21; GJs 14:2 (cp. Mel., P. 8, 53 ὡς γὰρ υἱὸς τεχθείς). Cp. Mt 1:23 (Is 7:14) and 25; 10:37 (w. θυγάτηρ); Mk 12:6a; Lk 1:13, 31, 57; 11:11; 15:11 (on this JEngel, Die Parabel v. Verlorenen Sohn: ThGl 18, 1926, 54–64; MFrost, The Prodigal Son: Exp. 9th ser., 2, 1924, 56–60; EBuonaiuti, Religio 11, ’35, 398–402); Ac 7:29; Ro 9:9 (cp. Gen 18:10); Gal 4:22 al. W. gen. Mt 7:9; 20:20f; 21:37ab; Mk 6:3; 9:17; Lk 3:2; 4:22; 15:19; J 9:19f; Ac 13:21; 16:1; 23:16; Gal 4:30abc (Gen 21:10abc); Js 2:21; AcPlCor 2:29. Also ἐγὼ Φαρισαῖός εἰμι υἱὸς Φαρισαίων Ac 23:6 is prob. a ref. to direct descent. μονογενὴς υἱός (s. μονογενής 1) Lk 7:12. ὁ υἱὸς ὁ πρωτότοκος (πρωτότοκος 1) 2:7.

ⓑ the immediate male offspring of an animal (Ps 28:1 υἱοὺς κριῶν; Sir 38:25. So Lat. filius: Columella 6, 37, 4) in our lit. only as foal ἐπὶ πῶλον υἱὸν ὑποζυγίου Mt 21:5 (cp. Zech 9:9 πῶλον νέον).

ⓒ human offspring in an extended line of descent, descendant, son Ἰωσὴφ υἱὸς Δαυίδ Mt 1:20 (cp. Jos., Ant. 11, 73); s. 2dα below. υἱοὶ Ἰσραήλ (Ἰσραήλ 1) Mt 27:9; Lk 1:16; Ac 5:21; 7:23, 37; 9:15; 10:36; Ro 9:27; 2 Cor 3:7, 13; Hb 11:22 al.; AcPlCor 2:32. οἱ υἱοὶ Λευί (Num 26:57) Hb 7:5. υἱὸς Ἀβραάμ Lk 19:9. υἱοὶ Ἀδάμ 1 Cl 29:2 (Dt 32:8). υἱοι Ῥουβήλ GJs 6:3.

ⓓ one who is accepted or legally adopted as a son (Herodian 5, 7, 1; 4; 5; Jos, Ant. 2, 263; 20, 150) Ac 7:21 (cp. Ex 2:10).—J 19:26.

② a pers. related or closely associated as if by ties of sonship, son, transf. sense of 1

ⓐ of a pupil, follower, or one who is otherw. a spiritual son (SIG 1169, 12 οἱ υἱοὶ τοῦ θεοῦ=the pupils and helpers [40] of Asclepius; sim. Maximus Tyr. 4, 2c; Just., D. 86, 6 οἱ υἱοὶ τῶν προφητῶν.—Some combination w. παῖδες is the favorite designation for those who are heirs of guild-secrets or who are to perpetuate a skill of some kind: Pla., Rep. 3, 407e, Leg. 6, 769b; Dionys. Hal., Comp. Verbi 22 p. 102, 4 Us./Rdm. ῥητόρων παῖδες; Lucian, Anach. 19, Dial. Mort. 11, 1 Χαλδαίων π.=dream-interpreters, Dips. 5 ἱατρῶν π., Amor. 49; Himerius, Or. 48 [=Or. 14], 13 σοφῶν π.): the ‘sons’ of the Pharisees Mt 12:27; Lk 11:19. Peter says Μᾶρκος ὁ υἱός μου 1 Pt 5:13 (perh. w. a component of endearment; s. Μᾶρκος). As a familiar form of address by a cherished mentor Hb 12:5 (Pr 3:11; ParJer 5:28; 7:24). υἱοὶ καὶ θυγατέρες B 1:1.

ⓑ of the individual members of a large and coherent group (cp. the υἷες Ἀχαιῶν in Homer; also PsSol 2:3 οἱ υἱοὶ Ἰερουσαλήμ; Dio Chrys. 71 [21], 15; LXX) οἱ υἱοὶ τοῦ λαοῦ μου 1 Cl 8:3 (scripture quot. of unknown origin). υἱοὶ γένους Ἀβραάμ Ac 13:26. οἱ υἱοὶ τῶν ἀνθρώπων (Gen 11:5; Ps 11:2, 9; 44:3; TestLevi 3:10; TestZeb 9:7; GrBar 2:4) the sons of men=humans (cp. dγ below) Mk 3:28; Eph 3:5; 1 Cl 61:2 (of the earthly rulers in contrast to the heavenly king).

ⓒ of one whose identity is defined in terms of a relationship with a person or thing

α. of those who are bound to a personality by close, non-material ties; it is this personality that has promoted the relationship and given it its character: son(s) of: those who believe are υἱοὶ Ἀβραάμ, because Abr. was the first whose relationship to God was based on faith Gal 3:7. In a special sense the devout, believers, are sons of God, i.e., in the light of the social context, people of special status and privilege (cp. PsSol 17:27; Just., D, 124, 1; Dio Chrys. 58 [75], 8 ὁ τοῦ Διὸς ὄντως υἱός; Epict. 1, 9, 6; 1, 3, 2; 1, 19, 9; Sextus 58; 60; 135; 376a; Dt 14:1; Ps 28:1; 72:15; Is 43:6 [w. θυγατέρες μου]; 45:11; Wsd 2:18; 5:5; 12:21 al.; Jdth 9:4, 13; Esth 8:12q; 3 Macc 6:28; SibOr 3, 702) Mt 5:45; Lk 6:35; Ro 8:14, 19 (‘Redeemer figures’ EFuchs, Die Freiheit des Glaubens, ’49, 108; against him EHommel in ThViat 4, ’52, 118, n. 26); 9:26 (Hos 2:1); 2 Cor 6:18 (w. θυγατέρες, s. Is 43:6 cited above); Gal 3:26 (cp. PsSol 17:27); 4:6a, 7ab (here the υἱός is the κληρονόμος and his opposite is the δοῦλος); Hb 2:10 (JKögel, Der Sohn u. die Söhne: Eine exeget. Studie zu Hb 2:5–18, 1904); 12:5–8 (in vs. 8 opp. νόθος, q.v.); Rv 21:7; 2 Cl 1:4; B 4:9. Corresp. there are sons of the devil (on this subj. cp. Hdb. on J 8:44) υἱὲ διαβόλου Ac 13:10. οἱ υἱοὶ τοῦ πονηροῦ (masc.) Mt 13:38b. τοῦ υἱοῦ τοῦ ἐν Ἅιδου ApcPt Rainer. In υἱοί ἐστε τῶν φονευσάντων τοὺς προφήτας Mt 23:31 this mng. is prob. to be combined w. sense 1c. The expr. υἱοὶ θεοῦ Mt 5:9 looks to the future (s. Betz, SM ad loc.; cp. KKöhler, StKr 91, 1918, 189f). Lk 20:36a signifies a status akin to that of angels (Ps 88:7; θεῶν παῖδες as heavenly beings: Maximus Tyr. 11, 5a; 12a; 13, 6a.—Hierocles 3, 424 the ἄγγελοι are called θεῶν παῖδες; HWindisch, Friedensbringer-Gottessöhne: ZNW 24, 1925, 240–60, discounts connection w. angels and contends for the elevation of the ordinary followers of Jesus to the status of Alexander the Great in his role as an εἰρηνηποιός [cp. Plut., Mor. 329c]; for measured critique of this view s. Betz, SM 137–42.).

β. υἱός w. gen. of thing, to denote one who shares in it or who is worthy of it, or who stands in some other close relation to it, oft. made clear by the context; this constr. is prob. a Hebraism in the main, but would not appear barbaric (B-D-F §162, 6; Mlt-H. 441; Dssm., B p. 162–66 [BS 161–66]; PASA II 1884, no. 2 υἱὸς πόλεως [time of Nero; on this type of formulation SEG XXXIX, 1864]; IMagnMai 167, 5; 156, 12) οἱ υἱοὶ τοῦ αἰῶνος τούτου (αἰών 2a) Lk 16:8a (opp. οἱ υἱοί τοῦ φωτός vs. 8b); 20:34. τῆς ἀναστάσεως υἱοί (to Mediterranean publics the functional equivalent of ἀθάνατοι ‘immortals’; cp. ἀνάστασις 2b) 20:36b. υἱοὶ τῆς ἀνομίας (ἀνομία 1; cp. CD 6:15) Hv 3, 6, 1; ApcPt 1:3; τῆς ἀπειθείας (s. ἀπείθεια) Eph 2:2; 5:6; Col 3:6; τῆς ἀπωλείας ApcPt 1:2. ὁ υἱὸς τῆς ἀπωλείας of Judas the informer J 17:12 (cp. similar expressions in Eur., Hec. 425; Menand., Dyscolus 88f: s. FDanker, NTS 7, ’60/61, 94), of the end-time adversary 2 Th 2:3. υἱοὶ τῆς βασιλείας (βασιλεία 1bη; s. SEG XXXIX, 1864 for related expressions) Mt 8:12; 13:38a. υἱοὶ βροντῆς Mk 3:17 (s. Βοανηργές). υἱὸς γεέννης (s. γέεννα) Mt 23:15; τ. διαθήκης (PsSol 17:15) Ac 3:25; εἰρήνης Lk 10:6. υἱοὶ τοῦ νυμφῶνος (s. νυμφών) Mt 9:15; Mk 2:19; Lk 5:34. υἱὸς παρακλήσεως Ac 4:36 (s. Βαρναβᾶς). υἱοὶ (τοῦ) φωτός (Hippol., Ref. 6, 47, 4 in gnostic speculation) Lk 16:8b (opp. υἱοὶ τοῦ αἰῶνος τούτου); J 12:36. υἱοὶ φωτός ἐστε καὶ υἱοὶ ἡμέρας 1 Th 5:5 (EBuonaiuti, ‘Figli del giorno e della luce’ [1 Th 5:5]: Rivista storico-critica delle Scienze teol. 6, 1910, 89–93).

ⓓ in various combinations as a designation of the Messiah and a self-designation of Jesus

α. υἱὸς Δαυίδ son of David of the Messiah (PsSol 17:21) Mt 22:42–45; Mk 12:35–37; Lk 20:41–44; B 12:10c. Specif. of Jesus as Messiah Mt 1:1a; 9:27; 12:23; 15:22; 20:30f; 21:9, 15; Mk 10:47f; Lk 18:38f.—WWrede, Jesus als Davidssohn: Vorträge u. Studien 1907, 147–77; WBousset, Kyrios Christos² 1921, 4, Rel.³ 226f; ELohmeyer, Gottesknecht u. Davidssohn ’45, esp. 68; 72; 77; 84; TNicklin, Gospel Gleanings ’50, 251–56; WMichaelis, Die Davidsohnschaft Jesu usw., in D. histor. Jesus u. d. kerygm. Christus, ed. Ristow and Matthiae, ’61, 317–30; LFisher, ECColwell Festschr. ’68, 82–97.

β. ὁ υἱὸς τοῦ θεοῦ, υἱὸς θεοῦ (the) Son of God (for the phrase s. JosAs 6:2 al. Ἰωσὴφ ὁ υἱὸς τοῦ θεοῦ; there is no undisputed evidence of usage as messianic title in pre-Christian Judaism [s. Dalman, Worte 219–24, Eng. tr. 268–89; Bousset, Kyrios Christos² 53f; EHuntress, ‘Son of God’ in Jewish Writings Prior to the Christian Era: JBL 54, ’35, 117–23]; cp. 4Q 246 col. 2, 1 [JFitzmyer, A Wandering Aramean ’79, 90–93; JCollins, BRev IX/3, ’93, 34–38, 57]. Among polytheists on the other hand, sons of the gods in a special sense [s. Just., A I, 21, 1f] are not only known to myth and legend, but definite historical personalities are also designated as such. Among them are famous wise men such as Pythagoras and Plato [HUsener, Das Weihnachtsfest² 1911, 71ff], and deified rulers, above all the Roman emperors since the time of Augustus [oft. in ins and pap: Dssm., B 166f=BS 166f, LO 294f=LAE 346f; Thieme 33]. According to Memnon [I B.C./ I A.D.]: 434 Fgm. 1, 1, 1 Jac., Clearchus [IV B.C.] carried his boasting so far as Διὸς υἱὸν ἑαυτὸν ἀνειπεῖν. Also, persons who were active at that time as prophets and wonder-workers laid claim to the title υἱὸς τοῦ θεοῦ, e.g. the Samaritan Dositheus in Origen, C. Cels. 6, 11; sim. an Indian wise man who calls himself Διὸς υἱός Arrian, Anab. 7, 2, 3; cp. Did., Gen. 213, 18 ὁ Ἀβρὰμ υἱὸς θεοῦ διὰ δικαιοσύνην. S. GWetter, ‘Der Sohn Gottes’ 1916; Hdb. exc. on J 1:34; s. also Clemen² 76ff; ENorden, Die Geburt des Kindes 1924, 75; 91f; 132; 156f; EKlostermann, Hdb. exc. on Mk 1:11 [4th ed. ’50]; M-JLagrange, Les origines du dogme paulinien de la divinité de Christ: RB 45, ’36, 5–33; HPreisker, Ntl. Zeitgesch. ’37, 187–208; HBraun, ZTK 54, ’57, 353–64; ANock, ‘Son of God’ in Paul. and Hellen. Thought: Gnomon 33, ’61, 581–90 [=Essays on Religion and the Anc. World II, ’72, 928–39]—originality in Paul’s thought): Ps 2:7 is applied to Jesus υἱός μου εἶ σύ, ἐγὼ σήμερον γεγέννηκά σε Lk 3:22 D; GEb 18, 37.—Ac 13:33; Hb 1:5a; 5:5; 1 Cl 36:4. Likew. Hos 11:1 (w. significant changes): Mt 2:15, and 2 Km 7:14: Hb 1:5b. The voice of God calls him ὁ υἱός μου ὁ ἀγαπητός (s. ἀγαπητός 1) at his baptism Mt 3:17; Mk 1:11; Lk 3:22; GEb 18, 37 and 39 and at the Transfiguration Mt 17:5; Mk 9:7; Lk 9:35 (here ἐκλελεγμένος instead of ἀγαπ.); 2 Pt 1:17. Cp. J 1:34. The angel at the Annunciation uses these expressions in referring to him: υἱὸς ὑψίστου Lk 1:32; GJs 11:3 and υἱὸς θεοῦ Lk 1:35 (Ar. 15, 1 ὁ υἱὸς τοῦ θεοῦ τοῦ ὑψίστου. Cp. Just., A I, 23, 2 μόνος ἰδίως υἱὸς τῷ θεῷ γεγέννηται). The centurion refers to him at the crucifixion as υἱὸς θεοῦ Mt 27:54; Mk 15:39; GPt 11:45; cp. vs. 46 (CMann, ET 20, 1909, 563f; JPobee, The Cry of the Centurion, A Cry of Defeat: CFDMoule Festschr. ’70, 91–102; EJohnson, JSNT 31, ’87, 3–22 [an indefinite affirmation of Jesus]). The high priest asks εἰ σὺ εἶ ὁ Χριστὸς ὁ υἱὸς τοῦ θεοῦ Mt 26:63 (DCatchpole, NTS 17, ’71, 213–26). Passers-by ask him to show that he is God’s Son 27:40; sim. the devil 4:3, 6; Lk 4:3, 9. On the other hand, evil spirits address him as the Son of God Mt 8:29; Mk 3:11; 5:7; Lk 4:41; 8:28; and disciples testify that he is Mt 14:33; 16:16. S. also Mk 1:1 (s. SLegg, Ev. Sec. Marc. ’35).—Jesus also refers to himself as Son of God, though rarely apart fr. the Fourth Gosp.: Mt 28:19 (the Risen Lord in the trinitarian baptismal formula); Mt 21:37f=Mk 12:6 (an allusion in the parable of the vinedressers).—Mt 27:43; Mk 13:32; Rv 2:18. The main pass. is the so-called Johannine verse in the synoptics Mt 11:27=Lk 10:22 (s. PSchmiedel, PM 4, 1900,1–22; FBurkitt, JTS 12, 1911, 296f; HSchumacher, Die Selbstoffenbarung Jesu bei Mt 11:27 [Lk 10:22] 1912 [lit.]; Norden, Agn. Th. 277–308; JWeiss, Heinrici Festschr. 1914, 120–29, Urchristentum 1917, 87ff; Bousset, Kyrios Christos² 1921, 45ff; EMeyer I 280ff; RBultmann, Gesch. d. synopt. Trad.² ’31, 171f; MDibelius, Die Formgeschichte des Evangeliums² ’33, 259; MRist, Is Mt 11:25–30 a Primitive Baptismal Hymn? JR 15, ’35, 63–77; TArvedson, D. Mysterium Christi: E. Studie zu Mt 11:25–30, ’37; WDavies, ‘Knowledge’ in the Dead Sea Scrolls and Mt 11:25–30, HTR 45, ’53, 113–39; WGrundmann, Sohn Gottes, ZNW 47, ’56, 113–33; JBieneck, Sohn Gottes als Christusbez. der Synopt. ’51; PWinter, Mt 11:27 and Lk 10:22: NovT 1, ’56, 112–48; JJocz, Judaica 13, ’57, 129–42; OMichel/OBetz, Von Gott Gezeugt, Beih. ZNW [Jeremias Festschr.] 26, ’60, 3–23 [Qumran]).—Apart fr. the synoptics, testimony to Jesus as the Son of God is found in many parts of our lit. Oft. in Paul: Ro 1:3, 4, 9; 5:10; 8:3, 29, 32; 1 Cor 1:9; 15:28; 2 Cor 1:19; Gal 1:16; 2:20; 4:4; Eph 4:13; Col 1:13; 1 Th 1:10. Cp. Ac 9:20. In Hb: 1:2, 8; 4:14; 5:8; 6:6; 7:3, 28; 10:29. In greatest frequency in John (cp. Herm. Wr. 1, 6 the Λόγος as υἱὸς θεοῦ. Likew. Philo, Agr. 51 πρωτόγονος υἱός, Conf. Lingu. 146 υἱὸς θεοῦ.—Theoph. Ant. 2, 1 [p. 154, 12] ὁ λόγος ὁ τοῦ θεοῦ, ὅς ἐστιν καὶ υἱὸς αὐτοῦ; Iren. 3, 12, 2 [Harv. II 55, 2]): J 1:49; 3:16–18 (s. μονογενής 2), 35f; 5:19–26; 6:40; 8:35f; 10:36; 11:4, 27; 14:13; 17:1; 19:7; 20:31; 1J 1:3, 7; 2:22–24; 3:8, 23; 4:9f, 14f; 5:5, 9–13, 20; 2J 3, 9.—B 5:9, 11; 7:2, 9; 12:8; 15:5; Dg 7:4; 9:2, 4; 10:2 (τὸν υἱὸν αὐτοῦ τὸν μονογενῆ; also ApcEsdr 6:16 p. 31, 22 Tdf.; ApcSed 9:1f); IMg 8:2; ISm 1:1; MPol 17:3; Hv 2, 2, 8; Hs 5, 2, 6 (ὁ υἱὸς αὐτοῦ ὁ ἀγαπητός); 8; 11; 5, 4, 1; 5, 5, 2; 3; 5; 5, 6, 1; 2; 4; 7 (on the Christology of the Shepherd s. Dibelius, Hdb. on Hs 5, also ALink and JvWalter [πνεῦμα 5cα]); Hs 8, 3, 2; 8, 11, 1. Cp. 9, 1, 1; 9, 12, 1ff.—In trinitarian formulas, in addition to Mt 28:19, also IMg 13:1; EpilMosq 5; D 7:1, 3.—The deceiver of the world appears w. signs and wonders ὡς υἱὸς θεοῦ D 16:4 (ApcEsdr 4:27 p. 28, 32 Tdf. ὁ λέγων• Ἐγώ εἰμι ὁ υἱὸς τοῦ θεοῦ [of Antichrist]).—EKühl, Das Selbstbewusstsein Jesu 1907, 16–44; GVos, The Self-disclosure of Jesus 1926.—EBurton, ICC Gal 1921, 404–17; TNicklin, Gospel Gleanings ’50, 211–36; MHengel, The Son of God (tr. JBowden) ’76; DJones, The Title υἱὸς θεοῦ in Acts: SBLSP 24, ’85, 451–63.

γ. ὁ υἱὸς τοῦ ἀνθρώπου lit. ‘the son of the man’ (the pl. form οἱ υἱοὶ τῶν ἀνθρώπων appears freq. in the LXX to render בְּנֵי אָדָם = mortals, e.g. Gen 11:5; Ps 10:4; 11:2; cp. ὁ υἱὸς τῆς ἀπολείας J 17:12 [s. 2cβ]) ‘the human being, the human one, the man’ in our lit. only as a byname in ref. to Jesus and in an exclusive sense the Human One, the Human Being, one intimately linked with humanity in its primary aspect of fragility yet transcending it, traditionally rendered ‘the Son of Man.’ The term is found predom. in the gospels, where it occurs in the synoptics about 70 times (about half as oft. if parallels are excluded), and in J 12 times (s. EKlostermann, Hdb. exc. on Mk 8:31). In every case the title is applied by Jesus to himself. Nowhere within a saying or narrative about him is it found in an address to him: Mt 8:20; 9:6; 10:23; 11:19; 12:8, 32, 40; 13:37, 41; 16:13, 27f; 17:9, 12, 22; 18:10 [11] v.l.; 19:28; 20:18, 28; 24:27, 30, 37, 39, 44; 25:13 v.l., 31; 26:2, 24ab, 45, 64; Mk 2:10, 28; 8:31, 38; 9:9, 12, 31; 10:33, 45; 13:26; 14:21ab, 41, 62; Lk 5:24; 6:5, 22; 7:34; 9:22, 26, 44, 56 v.l., 58; 11:30; 12:8, 10, 40; 17:22, 24, 26, 30; 18:8, 31; 19:10; 21:27, 36; 22:22, 48, 69; 24:7.—John (FGrosheide, Υἱὸς τ. ἀνθρ. in het Evang. naar Joh.: TSt 35, 1917, 242–48; HDieckmann, D. Sohn des Menschen im J: Scholastik 2, 1927, 229–47; HWindisch, ZNW 30, ’31, 215–33; 31, ’32, 199–204; WMichaelis, TLZ 85, ’60, 561–78 [Jesus’ earthly presence]) 1:51; 3:13, 14; 5:27 (BVawter, Ezekiel and John, CBQ 26, ’64, 450–58); 6:27, 53, 62; 8:28; 9:35; 12:23, 34; 13:31. Whether the component of fragility (suggested by OT usage in ref. to the brief span of human life and the ills to which it falls heir) or high status (suggested by traditions that appear dependent on Da 7:13, which refers to one ‘like a human being’), or a blend of the two dominates a specific occurrence can be determined only by careful exegesis that in addition to extra-biblical traditions takes account of the total literary structure of the document in which it occurs. Much neglected in the discussion is the probability of prophetic association suggested by the form of address Ezk 2:1 al. (like the OT prophet [Ezk 3:4–11] Jesus encounters resistance).—On Israelite thought contemporary w. Jesus and alleged knowledge of a heavenly being looked upon as a ‘Son of Man’ or ‘Man’, who exercises Messianic functions such as judging the world (metaph., pictorial passages in En 46–48; 4 Esdr 13:3, 51f) s. Bousset, Rel.³ 352–55; NMessel, D. Menschensohn in d. Bilderreden d. Hen. 1922; ESjöberg, Kenna 1 Henok och 4 Esra tanken på den lidande Människosonen? Sv. Ex. Årsb. 5, ’40, 163–83, D. Menschensohn im äth. Hen. ’46. This view is in some way connected w. Da 7:13; acc. to some it derives its real content fr. an eschatological tradition that ultimately goes back to Iran (WBousset, Hauptprobleme der Gnosis 1907, 160–223; Reitzenstein, Erlösungsmyst. 119ff, ZNW 20, 1921, 18–22, Mysterienrel.³ 418ff; Clemen² 72ff; CKraeling, Anthropos and Son of Man: A Study in the Religious Syncretism of the Hellenistic Orient 1927); acc. to this tradition the First Man was deified; he will return in the last times and usher in the Kingdom of God.—Outside the gospels: Ac 7:56 (v.l. τοῦ θεοῦ; GKilpatrick, TZ 21, ’65, 209); Rv 1:13; 14:14 (both after Da 7:13; sim. allusion to Da in Just., D. 31, 1). The quot. fr. Ps 8:5 in Hb 2:6 prob. does not belong here, since there is no emphasis laid on υἱὸς ἀνθρώπου. In IEph 20:2 Jesus is described as υἱὸς ἀνθρώπου καὶ υἱὸς θεοῦ. Differently B 12:10 Ἰησοῦς, οὐχὶ υἱὸς ἀνθρώπου ἀλλὰ υἱὸς τοῦ θεοῦ Jesus, not a man’s son, but Son of God.—HLietzmann, Der Menschensohn 1896; Dalman, Worte 191–219 (Eng. tr., 234–67); Wlh., Einl.² 123–30; PFiebig, Der Menschensohn 1901; NSchmidt, The Prophet of Nazareth 1905, 94–134, Recent Study of the Term ‘Son of Man’: JBL 45, 1926, 326–49; FTillmann, Der Menschensohn 1907; EKühl, Das Selbstbewusstsein Jesu 1907, 65ff; HHoltzmann, Das messianische Bewusstsein Jesu, 1907, 49–75 (lit.), Ntl. Theologie² I 1911, 313–35; FBard, D. Sohn d. Menschen 1908; HGottsched, D. Menschensohn 1908; EAbbott, ‘The Son of Man’, etc., 1910; EHertlein, Die Menschensohnfrage im letzten Stadium 1911, ZNW 19, 1920, 46–48; JMoffatt, The Theology of the Gospels 1912, 150–63; WBousset, Kyrios Christos² 1921, 5–22 (the titles of the works by Wernle and Althaus opposing his first edition [1913], as well as Bousset’s answer, are found s.v. κύριος, end); DVölter, Jesus der Menschensohn 1914, Die Menschensohnfrage neu untersucht 1916; FSchulthess, ZNW 21, 1922, 247–50; Rtzst., Herr der Grösse 1919 (see also the works by the same author referred to above in this entry); EMeyer II 335ff; HGressmann, ZKG n.s. 4, 1922, 170ff, D. Messias 1929, 341ff; GDupont, Le Fils d’Homme 1924; APeake, The Messiah and the Son of Man 1924; MWagner, Der Menschensohn: NKZ 36, 1925, 245–78; Guillaume Baldensperger, Le Fils d’Homme: RHPR 5, 1925, 262–73; WBleibtreu, Jesu Selbstbez. als der Menschensohn: StKr 98/99, 1926, 164–211; AvGall, Βασιλεία τοῦ θεοῦ 1926; OProcksch, D. Menschensohn als Gottessohn: Christentum u. Wissensch. 3, 1927, 425–43; 473–81; CMontefiore, The Synoptic Gospels² 1927 I 64–80; ROtto, Reich Gottes u. Menschensohn ’34, Eng. tr. The Kgdm. of God and the Son of Man, tr. Filson and Woolf² ’43; EWechssler, Hellas im Ev. ’36, 332ff; PParker, The Mng. of ‘Son of Man’: JBL 60, ’41, 151–57; HSharman, Son of Man and Kingdom of God ’43; JCampbell, The Origin and Mng. of the Term Son of Man: JTS 48, ’47, 145–55; HRiesenfeld, Jésus Transfiguré ’47, 307–13 (survey and lit.); TManson, ConNeot 11, ’47, 138–46 (Son of Man=Jesus and his disciples in Mk 2:27f); GDuncan, Jesus, Son of Man ’47, 135–53 (survey); JBowman, ET 59, ’47/48, 283–88 (background); MBlack, ET 60, ’48f, 11–15; 32–36; GKnight, Fr. Moses to Paul ’49, 163–72 (survey); TNicklin, Gospel Gleanings ’50, 237–50; TManson (Da, En and gospels), BJRL 32, ’50, 171–93; TPreiss, Le Fils d’Homme: ÉThR 26/3, ’51, Life in Christ, ’54, 43–60; SMowinckel, He That Cometh, tr. Anderson, ’54, 346–450; GIber, Überlieferungsgesch. Unters. z. Begriff des Menschensohnes im NT, diss. Heidelb. ’53; ESjöberg, D. verborgene Menschensohn in den Ev. ’55; WGrundmann, ZNW 47, ’56, 113–33; HRiesenfeld, The Mythological Backgrd. of NT Christology, CHDodd Festschr. ’56, 81–95; PhVielhauer, Gottesreich u. Menschensohn in d. Verk. Jesu, GDehn Festschr. ’57, 51–79; ESidebottom, The Son of Man in J, ET 68, ’57, 231–35; 280–83; AHiggins, Son of Man- Forschung since (Manson’s) ‘The Teaching of Jesus’: NT Essays (TW Manson memorial vol.) ’59, 119–35; HTödt, D. Menschensohn in d. synopt. Überl. ’59 (tr. Barton ’65); JMuilenburg, JBL 79, ’60, 197–209 (Da, En); ESchweizer, JBL 79, ’60, 119–29 and NTS 9, ’63, 256–61; BvIersel, ‘Der Sohn’ in den synopt. Jesusworten, ’61 (community?); MBlack, BJRL 45, ’63, 305–18; FBorsch, ATR 45, ’63, 174–90; AHiggins, Jesus and the Son of Man, ’64; RFormesyn, NovT 8, ’66, 1–35 (barnasha=‘I’); SSandmel, HSilver Festschr. ’63, 355–67; JJeremias, Die älteste Schicht der Menschensohn-Logien, ZNW 58, ’67, 159–72; GVermes, MBlack, Aram. Approach³, ’67, 310–30; BLindars, The New Look on the Son of Man: BJRL 63, ’81, 437–62; WWalker, The Son of Man, Some Recent Developments CBQ 45, ’83, 584–607; JDonahue, Recent Studies on the Origin of ‘Son of Man’ in the Gospels, CBQ 48, ’86, 584–607; DBurkitt, The Nontitular Son of Man, A History and Critique: NTS 40, ’94 504–21 (lit.); JEllington, BT 40, ’89, 201–8; RGordon, Anthropos: 108–13.—B. 105; DELG. M-M. EDNT. TW. Sv.

Ελληνικά-Αγγλικά παλαιοχριστιανική Λογοτεχνία > υἱός
8 οὗτος

οὗτος, αὕτη, τοῦτο, gen. τούτου, ταύτης, τούτου, etc.: the dual fem. never in [dialect] Att., v. ὁ, ἡ, τό, init.:—demonstr. Pron.,

A this, common from Hom. downwds.

A ORIGIN and FORMS: οὗτος, αὕτη, τοῦτο prob. arose from a reduplication of the demonstr. ὁ, ἡ, τό with insertion of - υ- (= Skt. Particle u), e.g. ταῦτα fr. τα-υ-τα: [dialect] Dor. gen. sg. fem. τούτας Philol.11
; nom. pl. τοῦτοι, ταῦται A.D.Synt.111.23
: the former occurs Sophr.24, GDI 3045 B 6 ([place name] Selinus), SIG339.16 (Rhodes, iii B. C.), etc., the latter is dub. in Sophr.97, certain in SIG 241 B117 (Delph., iv B. C.): in [dialect] Boeot. all forms begin with οὑτ-, as gen. sg. neut. οὕτω Supp.Epigr.3.359.11
(iii B. C.); acc. sg. fem. οὕταν Corinn. Supp.2.80
; acc. pl. neut. οὗτα SIG1185.20
(Tanagra, iii B. C.), etc.: gen. pl. fem. [dialect] Att. τούτων, Cret. ταυτᾶν Leg.Gort.5.19
; neut. ταύτων Michel 1334.10
(Elis, iv B. C.).—In [dialect] Ion. sts. written ταότην, ταο̄τα, SIG283.19 (Chios, iv B. C.), 46.7 (Halic., v B. C.), al.—In [dialect] Att. οὗτος was freq. strengthd. by the demonstr. -ί, οὑτοσί, αὑτηί, τουτί, gen. τουτουί, dat. τουτῳί, acc. τουτονί; pl. nom. οὑτοιί, neut. ταυτί, etc., this man here: sts. a Particle is inserted between the Pron. and -ί, as αὑτηγί for αὑτηί γε, Ar.Ach. 784; τουτογί for τουτί γε, Id.V. 781, Av. 894, al.; ταυταγί for ταυτί γε, Id.Eq. 492, Pax 1057, al.; τουτοδί for τουτὶ δέ, Id.Pl. 227; τουτουμενί for τουτουὶ μέν, Id.Ra. 965.—In codd. the ν ἐφελκυστικόν is sts. added in the forms οὑτοσίν, οὑτωσίν, and οὑτοσίν is said to be [dialect] Att. by A.D.Pron.59.24, 82.11. [This ι is always long, and a long vowel or diphthong before it becomes short, as αὑτη?οὗτοςXί, τουτω?οὗτοςXί, οὑτοῐί, Ar.Nu. 201, Pl.44, Ach.40, etc.]

B USAGE in regard to CONCORD. οὗτος is freq. used as a Pron. Subst.: hence neut. is folld. by gen., κατὰ τοῦτο τῆς ἀκροπόλιος Hdt. 1.84
; εἰς τοῦθ' ὕβρεως ἐλήλυθεν D.4.37
; εἰς τοῦθ' ἥκεις μανίας Id.36.48
; ταῦτα τῶν μαθημάτων Pl.Euthd. 278b
: but quite as freq. as Adj., in which case its Subst. commonly takes the Art., οὗτος ὁ ἀνήρ or ὁ ἀνὴρ οὗτος.—But the Art. is absent,

1 always in [dialect] Ep. Poets (exc. Od.18.114), οὗτος ἀνήρ Il.14.471
, Od.1.406, etc.: sts. also in Trag., A.Pers. 122 (lyr.), 495, S.Ph. 406, OC 471, 1177: once in an Inscr., τοπεῖα: τούτων τὰ ἡμίσεα τοπείων IG22.1622.135
(iv B. C.).

2 sts. when the Noun is so specified that the Art. is not needed, ἐς γῆν ταύτην.., ἥντινα νῦν Σκύθαι νέμονται Hdt.4.8
; ταύτας ἃς οἱ πατέρες παρέδοσαν μελέτας Th. 1.85
, cf. Pl.R. 449d, etc.; πατὴρ σὸς οὗτος, ὃν θρηνεῖς ἀεί S.El. 530
.

3 when οὗτος is used in local sense, here, v. infr. c. 1.5.

4 when the Noun with which οὗτος agrees stands as its Predicate, αὕτη γὰρ ἦν σοι πρόφασις S.Ph. 1034
; δικαστοῦ αὕτη ἀρετή [ἐστι] Pl.Ap. 18a: this exception extends to cases in which the Predicate is not so distinctly separated from the Subject, αἰτίαι μὲν αὗται προυγεγένηντο these were the grievances which already existed, Th.1.66; ταύτην φήμην παρέδοσαν this was the report which.., Pl.Phlb. 16c: freq. with a [comp] Sup., κίνησις αὕτη μεγίστη δὴ.. ἐγένετο this was notably the greatest movement which.., Th.1.1, cf. 3.113: with πρῶτος Id.1.55
,98, 6.31, Ev.Luc. 2.2.

5 when [ per.] 3rd pers. is used for [ per.] 2nd to express contempt, οὗτος ἀνήρ, οὑτοσὶ ἀνήρ, Pl.Grg. 467b, 489b, etc.

II though οὗτος usu. agrees with the Noun that serves as Predicate, it is not rare to find it in the neut., μανία δὲ καὶ τοῦτ' ἐστί E.Ba. 305
; τοῦτο γάρ εἰσι.. εὔθυναι D.19.82
, etc.: and in pl., οὐκ ἔστι ταῦτα ἀρχή Aeschin. 3.13
; ταῦτ' ἐστὶν ὁ προδότης Id.2.166
: so with an explanatory clause added, τοῦτο γάρ ἐστιν ὁ συκοφάντης, αἰτιᾶσθαι μὲν πάντα ἐξελέγξαι δὲ μηδέν D.57.34
.

2 so also with a Noun in apposition, τούτοισιν μὲν ταῦτα μέλει, κίθαρις καὶ ἀοιδή Od.1.159
; τούτου τιμῶμαι, ἐν πρυτανείῳ σιτήσεως Pl.Ap. 36e
, cf. E.Fr.323.3, etc.

3 the neut. also may refer to a masc. or fem. Noun, καρπὸν φορέει κυάμῳ ἴσον: τοῦτο ἐπεὰν γένηται πέπον κτλ. Hdt.4.23, cf. X.An.1.5.10, etc.

4 the neut. is also used of classes of persons, μελιτοπῶλαι καὶ τυροπῶλαι: τοῦτο δ' εἰς ἕν ἐστι συγκεκυφός Ar.Eq. 854
, cf. Pl.Lg. 711a; or of an abstract fact, οὐκ Ἰοφῶν ζῇ;—τοῦτο γάρ τοι καὶ μόνον ἔτ' ἐστὶ λοιπὸν ἀγαθόν Ar.Ra.73
.

III with Prons.,

1 personal, οὗτος σύ, in local sense, v. infr. c.1.5.

2 interrog., τί τοῦτ' ἔλεξας; what is this that.. ? S.Ph. 1173 (lyr.), cf. Ant.7; ποίοισι τούτοις; for ποῖά ἐστι ταῦτα οἷς [ἔχεις ἐλπίδα]; Id.OC 388, cf.Ant. 1049; Νέστορ' ἔρειο ὅν τινα τοῦτον ἄγει whom he brings here, Il.11.612.

3 with οἷος, Od.20.377, Pl.Phd. 61c.

4 possess., πατὴρ σὸς οὗτος this father of thine, S.El. 530, cf. X.An.7.3.30.

5 demonstr., οὗτος ἐκεῖνος, τὸν σὺ ζητέεις, where ἐκεῖνος is the Predicate, Hdt.1.32; τοῦτ' ἔστ' ἐκεῖνο E. Hel. 622
, cf. Or. 804; αὐτὸ τοῦτο, v. αὐτός 1.7; τοῦτον τὸν αὐτὸν ἄνδρα this same man, S.Ph. 128.

b exceptionally, Διφίλου οὗτος ὅδ' ἐστὶ τύπος IG12(5).300
([place name] Paros).

6 ἄλλος τις οὗτος ἀνέστη another man here, Od.20.380.

IV with Numerals, τέθνηκε ταῦτα τρία ἔτη these three years, Lys.7.10codd.; [στρατείαν] ἑνδέκατον μῆνα τουτονὶ ποιεῖται for these eleven months, D.8.2, cf. 3.4; τριακοστὴν ταύτην ἡμέραν Men.Epit.27
; ταύτας τριάκοντα μνᾶς D.27.23
, cf. Pl.Grg. 463b, etc.

C SIGNIFICATION AND SPECIAL IDIOMS:

I this, to designate the nearer, opp. ἐκεῖνος, that, the more remote, ταῦτα, like τὰ ἐνταῦθα, things round and about us, earthly things, Pl.Phd. 75e (v. l.); cf. ὅδε init.: but οὗτος sts. indicates that which is not really nearest, but most important, δεῖ.. τὸ βέλτιστον ἀεί, μὴ τὸ ῥᾷστον λέγειν: ἐπὶ ἐκεῖνο μὲν γὰρ ἡ φύσις αὐτὴ βαδιεῖται, ἐπὶ τοῦτο δὲ κτλ. D.8.72, cf. 51.3 and 18.

2 when, of two things, one precedes and the other follows, ὅδε prop. refers to what follows, οὗτος to what precedes, οὐκ ἔστι σοι ταῦτ', ἀλλά σοι τάδ' ἔστι S.OC 787
, cf. ὅδε III. 2: freq., however, where there are not two things, οὗτος refers to what follows, Il. 13.377, Od.2.306, etc.; οὔκουν.. τοῦτο γιγνώσκεις, ὅτι .. ; A.Pr. 379, etc.

3 οὗτος is used emphat., generally in contempt, while ἐκεῖνος denotes praise, ὁ πάντ' ἄναλκις οὗτος, i.e. Aegisthus, S.El. 301; τούτους τοὺς συκοφάντας Pl.Cri. 45a
; so D.de Coron. uses οὗτος of Aeschines, ἐκεῖνος of Philip; but οὗτος is used of Philip, D.2.15, 4.3.

b of what is familiar, τούτους τοὺς πολυτελεῖς χιτῶνας, of the Persians, X.An.1.5.8; οἱ τὰς τελετὰς.. οὗτοι καταστήσαντες Pl.Phd. 69c
, cf. Men. 80a; τὸ θυλακῶδες τοῦτο the familiar bag-like thing, Thphr.HP3.7.3, cf. 3.18.11, 4.7.1; οἱ τὰς κόρας ταύτας ὠνούμενοι τοῖς παισίν D.Chr.31.153
.

4 in [dialect] Att. law-language, οὗτος is commonly applied to the opponent, whether plaintiff (as in Aeschin. 2.130 ) or defendant (as in Id.1.1); so, in the political speeches of D., οὗτοι are the opposite party, 4.1, 8.7, etc.; but in the forensic speeches, οὗτοι freq. means the judges, the court, 21.134, 36.47.

5 much like an Adv., in local sense (cf. ὅδε init.), τίς δ' οὗτος κατὰ νῆας.. ἔρχεαι; who art thou here that comest.. ? Il.10.82; freq. in [dialect] Att., τίς οὑτοσί; who's this here? Ar.Ach. 1048; πολλὰ ὁρῶ ταῦτα πρόβατα I see many sheep here, X.An.3.5.9 (as v.l.): with Pron. of 2 pers., οὗτος σύ ho you! you there! S.OT 532, 1121, E.Hec. 1280, etc.: and then οὗτος alone like a voc., οὗτος, τί ποιεῖς; A.Supp. 911,cf.S.Aj.71, E.Alc. 773, Ar.Eq. 240, Nu. 220, al.: with a pr. n., ὦ οὗτος, Αἴας S.Aj.89
; ὦ οὗτος οὗτος, Οἰδίπους Id.OC 1627
, cf. Ar.V. 1364: with voc., βέντισθ' οὗτος Theoc.5.76
:—the fem. is rarer, αὕτη E.Med. 922
; αὕτη σύ Ar.Th. 610
.—This phrase mostly implies anger, impatience, or scorn.

II simply as antec. to ὅς, Od.2.40, S.OT 1180, etc.: freq. following relat. clause, ἅ γ' ἔλαβες,.. μεθεῖναι ταῦτα Id.Ph. 1247
, cf. 1319,Ant. 183, 203, Pl.Grg. 469c.

III = τοιοῦτος, οὗτος ἐγὼ ταχυτᾶτι Pi.O. 4.26; σὺ τοίνυν οὗτος εὑρέθης D.18.282
, cf. 173.

IV after a parenthesis, the Subject, though already named, is freq. emphat. repeated by οὗτος, οὐδὲ γὰρ οὐδὲ Ἀριστέης.., οὐδὲ οὗτος προσωτέρω.. ἔφησε ἀπικέσθαι Hdt.4.16
, cf.81 (s. v. l.), 1.146, Pl.Phd. 107d, etc.

V καὶ οὗτος is added to heighten the force of a previous word, ξυνεστῶτες.. ναυτικῷ ἀγῶνι, καὶ τούτῳ πρὸς Ἀθηναίους Th.4.55
, cf. Hdt.1.147, 6.11, etc.; so οὐδὲ τούτου Aeschin.2.100
; v. infr. VIII.2.

VI repeated, where for the second we should merely say he or it, τοῖσιν τούτου τοῦτον μέλεσιν.. κελαδοῦντες Ar.Ra. 1526
, cf. Pl.La. 200d.

VII ταῦτα is used in some special phrases,

1 ταῦτ', ὦ δέσποτα yes Sir (i. e. ἔστι ταῦτα, ταῦτα δράσω, etc.), Ar.V. 142, Pax 275, cf. Eq.III; so ταῦτα δή Id.Ach. 815
; ταῦτά νυν Id.V. 1008
; so also ἦν ταῦτα even so, true, E.Ph. 417.

2 ταῦτα μὲν δὴ ὑπάρξει so it shall be, Pl.Phd. 78a.

3 καὶ ταῦτα μὲν δὴ ταῦτα so much for that, freq. in [dialect] Att., as Pl.Smp. 220c.

4 ταῦτα at end of a formula in epitaphs, etc., prob. short for ταῦτα οὕτως ἔχει or ὁ βίος ταῦτά ἐστιν, e.g. οὐδὶς ( = -εὶς) ἀθάνατος: ταῦτα IG14.420
; Προκόπι ταῦτα ib.1824; χαίρεται ( = -τε) ταῦτα ib.1479, etc.: similarly perh. in a letter, ἂμ μὴ πέμψῃς, οὐ μὴ φάγω, οὐ μὴ πείνω. ταῦτα POxy.119.15
(ii/iii A. D.).

VIII Adverbial usages:

1 ταῦταabs., therefore, that is why.., Il.11.694; ταῦτ' ἄρα Ar.Ach.90
,Nu. 319, 335, 394, al., X.Smp.4.55; ταῦτα δή A.Pers. 159
, Pl.Smp. 174a; ταῦτ' οὖν S.Tr. 550
, Ar.V. 1358, etc.; αὐτὰ ταῦτα ἥκω, ἵνα .. Pl.Prt. 310e: τοῦτο is rare in this sense, τοῦτ' ἀφικόμην, ὅπως.. εὖ πράξαιμί τι S. OT 1005
; αὐτὸ γὰρ τοῦτο just because of this, Pl.Smp. 204a.

b πρὸς ταῦτα so then, therefore, prop. used in indignant defiance, A.Pr. 992, 1043, S.Aj. 971, 1115, 1313, OT 426, OC 455, etc.

2 καὶ ταῦτα, adding a circumstance heightening the force of what has been said, and that, ἄνδρα γενναῖον θανεῖν, καὶ ταῦτα πρὸς γυναικός A.Eu. 627
: but mostly with a part., ὅς γ' ἐξέλυσας ἄστυ.., καὶ ταῦθ' ὑφ' ἡμῶν οὐδὲν ἐξειδὼς πλέον S.OT37
, cf. Ar.Ra. 704, Pl.Phdr. 241e, etc.; or with a part. omitted, ἥτις.. τὴν τεκοῦσαν ὕβρισεν, καὶ ταῦτα τηλικοῦτος (sc. οὖσα) S.El. 614; so καὶ ταῦτα μέντοι Pl.Erx. 400b
.

b καὶ ταῦτα anyhow, no matter what happens (or happened), ἐπεχείρησας, οὐδὲν ὢν καὶ ταῦτα you tried, but were no good anyhow, i.e. try as you might, Id.R. 341c, cf. Diod.Com.3.5.

3 τοῦτο μέν.., τοῦτο δέ .. on the one hand.., on the other.., partly.., partly.., very freq. in Hdt., as 1.161, al.; τοῦτο μέν is sts. answered by δέ only, 4.76, S.Aj. 670, OC 440; by δὲ αὖ, Hdt.7.176; by ἔπειτα δέ, S.Ant.61; by ἀλλά, D.22.13; by εἶτα, S.Ph. 1345; by τοῦτ' αὖθις, Id.Ant. 165.

4 dat. fem. ταύτῃ,

a on this spot, here, ταύτῃ μὲν.., τῇδε δ' αὖ .. Id.Ph. 1331; ἀλλ' ἐὰν ταύτῃ γε νικᾷ, ταυτῃὶ πεπλήξεται Ar.Eq. 271
, cf. Th. 1221.

b in this point, herein, μηδὲν ταύτῃ γε κομήσῃς Id.Pl. 572
, cf. X.Hier.7.12, etc.

c in this way, thus, A.Pr. 191, S.OC 1300, etc.; οὐ.. ταῦτ' ἐστί πω ταύτῃ Ar.Eq. 843
; ἀλλ' οὔτι ταύτῃ ταῦτα E. Med. 365
, cf. A.Pr. 511: antec. to ὥσπερ, Pl.R. 330c; to ὅπῃ, X.Cyr. 8.3.2; οὕτω τε καὶ ταύτῃ γίγνοιτο Pl.Lg. 681d
; καὶ οὕτω καὶ ταύτῃ ἂν ἔχοι ib. 714d; ταύτῃ καλεῖσθαι, etc., like οὕτω κ., Sch.Pl.Smp. 215b.

5 ἐκ τούτου or τούτων thereupon, X.HG3.1.6, Oec.2.1; therefore, Id.An.3.3.5.

6 ἐν τούτῳ in that case, Pl.R. 440c.

b in the meantime, Hdt.1.126, Th.3.72, X.Mem.2.1.27.

7 πρὸς τούτοις ([etym.] - οισι) besides, Hdt.2.51, Pl.Prt. 326a, X.Mem.2.4.4, Ar.Pl. 540.

Greek-English dictionary (Αγγλικά Ελληνικά-λεξικό) > οὗτος
9 σφεῖς

σφεῖς,

A FORMS: nom. σφεῖς Hdt.7.168
, Th.5.46,65, X.An. 7.5.9, HG5.2.8, Pl.R. 487c:—the uncontr, form σφέες is never found, cf. A.D.Pron.93.1, though recognized by Greg.Cor.p.479 S.:—the obl. cases only are used by Hom.

2 Gen. σφέων, in Hom. a monosyll., and sts. enclitic, Il.18.311, Od.3.134; poet. σφείων only in Il., and always in phrase ὦσαν ἀπὸ σφείων, 4.535, 5.626, 13.148; σφέων also in Hdt.2.4, 4.35, al.; [dialect] Att. σφῶν IG12.39.67
, al., Th.1.120, al., Antipho 6.23, etc., also in Hom. in the phrase σφῶν αὐτῶν, Il.12.155, 19.302.

3 Dat. σφίσι ([etym.] ν ) or σφισι ([etym.] ν) 4.2, 17.453, 22.288, 474, A. Pr. 481, Hdt.1.4, al., Th.1.19, al., X.HG1.7.5, etc.; more freq. in the forms σφι, σφιν, Il.2.612, 614, al., A.Pr. 254, al., Hdt.1.31, al. (not in [dialect] Att. Prose); in Trag. never σφι; sts. elided σφ', Il.3.300, 8.4, etc.; σφιν also in [dialect] Dor. Prose, SIG56.48 (Argos, v B.C.), IG22.1126.25 (Delph. Amphict., iv B.C.), Schwyzer 92.5 (Argos, iii B.C.), Anon. in PSI9.1091.21:— σφίσι ([etym.] ν) is not enclitic acc. to A.D.Pron.98.12, sts. enclitic acc. to Hdn.Gr.2.42 (who says elsewh. (2.57 ) that pronouns beginning with σφ- are always enclitic); σφι ([etym.] ν) is enclitic, exc. at the beginning of a phrase, as σφὶν δ' αὐτοῖς Hes.Fr.49
(cited by A.D.Pron.98.11).

4 Acc., [dialect] Ep. and [dialect] Ion. σφέᾰς (enclit. σφεας) Hom. (v. infr.), Archil.27.2, Hdt.1.4,5, al.; freq. to be pronounced as one long syllable, as in οὐ μέν σφεας ἔτ' ἔολπα Od.8.315
, cf. 480, 13.213, 276; but also as a disyll., Il.12.43, Od.12.225, al.; σφᾰς enclit. in Il.5.567, Parm.1.12, Theoc.21.16, not enclit. in Opp.C.1.471, H.2.231; [dialect] Att. σφᾶς IG12.101.3
, Th.1.24, E.Med. 1378, Or. 1127, etc.; enclit. σφας [ᾱ, cf. S.Ant. 128 (anap.)] S.OT 1470, 1508, OC 486; also σφε Il.19.265, Simon.99, Pi.P.5.86, A.Th. 630 (lyr.), 788 (lyr.), 864 (anap.), S.OT 1505, OC 605, 1669, E.Med. 394, etc.; never in Com. (for Ar.Eq. 1020 is a burlesque oracle), nor in [dialect] Att. Prose; once in Hdt. (7.170, sed leg. σφέας): neut. σφεα (v. infr. 111).

II Rare dialectic forms:—[dialect] Lacon. dat. φιν, EM702.41; used also by Emp.22.3, Call.Dian. 125, 213, Fr. 183, Nic.Th. 725: [dialect] Aeol. dat. and acc. ἄσφι, ἄσφε, Sapph.43, Alc.73: Syrac. dat. and acc. ψιν, ψε, Sophr.93,94, Theoc.4.3; ψε and ψεαυτόνς also Cretan, Rendic.Pont. Accad.Rom. di Arch.7.106, Riv.Fil.58(1930).473; Cret. dat. ψιναυτοῖς Riv.Ist.Arch.2.19
: Arc. dat. σφεις IG5(2).6.10, 18 ([place name] Tegea).-- For the dual v. σφωέ: like other pl. forms σφε can be used with reference to two persons, Il.11.111, Od.8.271, 21.192, 206; so σφεας, Il.11.128.

III Gender:—in Hom. this Pron. has no neut.; in Od.9.70, 10.355, it refers to things, denoted by feminine nouns: but in [dialect] Ion. Prose occurs the neut. pl. σφεα, Hdt.1.46,89, 2.119, 3.53 ( σφε codd.), 7.50, Abyd.9; σφε is acc. pl. neut. in Theoc.15.80.

B MEANINGS:

I they, them, pl. of οὗ B.I, ἐκ γάρ σφεων φρένας εἵλετο Παλλὰς Ἀθήνη Il.18.311
; τῶ σφεων πολέες κακὸν οἶτον ἐπέσπον Od.3.134
; μετὰ δέ σφισι πότνια Ἥβη νέκταρ ἐῳνοχόει Il.4.2
; οὔ σφι θαλάσσια ἔργα μεμήλει 2.614
; ἐγώ σφισιν ἔδειξα κράσεις ἠπίων ἀκεσμάτων A.Pr. 481
, cf. 443, 457, S.OT 1470, al., E.Med. 1378; this use is not found in Prose, exc. in dialects, SIG56.48 (Argos, v B.C.), IG22.1126.25 (Delph. Amphict., iv B.C.), Hdt.1.3, 2.15, al.

b παρὰ δέ σφιν ἑκάστῳ δίζυγες ἵπποι ἑστᾶσι beside each of them, Il.5.195.

2 reflexively, as pl. of οὗ B. 11.1
, ὦσαν ἀπὸ σφείων 4.535
, al.; αἵ ἑ μετὰ σφίσιν εἶχον 22.474
, cf. Th.2.76; later with the same restriction as for οὗ B. 11.1
, e.g. φράζοντες ὡς οὔ σφι περιοπτέη ἐστὶ ἡ Ἑλλὰς ἀπολλυμένη· ἢν γὰρ σφαλῇ, σφεῖς γε οὐδὲν ἄλλο ἢ δουλεύσουσι τῇ πρώτῃ τῶν ἡμερέων Hdt.7.168
, cf. Th.5.46,65, X.An.7.5.9, HG5.2.8, Pl.R. 487c.

3 oblique cases in combination with αὐτῶν, αὐτούς, etc., forming a reflex. Pron. used without the foreg. restriction, ἐντὸς δὲ πυκάζοιεν σφέας αὐτούς Od.12.225
; σφῶν δ' αὐτῶν κήδε' ἑκάστη Il.19.302
, cf. 12.155; σφᾶς δ' αὐτάς Hes.Th.34
; Κερκυραῖοι σφῶν αὐτῶν τοὺς ἐχθροὺς δοκοῦντας εἶναι ἐφόνευον Th.3.81
, cf. 1.139, al.; it sts. = ἀλλήλους ([etym.] - ων) , ἀλλήλοις κοτέοντες ἐπὶ σφέας ὁρμήσωσι Hes.Sc. 403
; ποθεινοτέρως σφῶν αὐτῶν ἔχειν X.Lac.1.5
; σφᾶς ( σφὰς cod. L) αὐτοὺς.. ἐπέφραδον informed one another, A.R.2.959; but σφᾶς ἑωυτάς is prob. f.l. in Hp.Epid.2.1.3: cf. Thom.Mag.p.329 R.

II as sg., = him, her, in the dat. and acc. forms σφι (ν), σφε; σφιν is so used in h.Pan.19, h.Hom.30.9, A.Pers. 759, S.OC 1490 (in Od.15.524 σφιν refers to all the suitors, and in Hes.Sc. 113 to Ares and Cycnus); σφι in Lyc.1242; σφε = him, her, in Pi.I.6(5).74, A.Pr.9, Th. 469, al., S.OT 761, Ant.44, Ph. 200 (anap.), al., E.Alc. 107 (lyr.), 149, 200, Med.33, al.; = it (of a masc. noun) in S.OC40: f.l. for σφεα in Hdt.3.52,53, and for σφεας Id.1.71, al.

III once as 2 pers. pl. reflex., ἠνώγει δέ μ' ἰόντα.. πυθέσθαι ἠὲ.. ἦ.. φύξιν βουλεύοιτε μετὰ σφίσιν Il.10.398
(reported from φύξιν βουλεύουσι μετὰ σφίσιν ib. 311); σφέας for ὑμᾶς in Hdt.3.71 (but with v.l. σφεα).

IV later as 1 pers. pl. (cf. σφέτερος, σφωΐτερος, ἑός) , ἧμιν ἐνὶ σφίσι A.R.2.1278
; σφᾶς = ἡμᾶς, Men.Prot.p.119 D.; censured by Luc.Sol.8,9.

Greek-English dictionary (Αγγλικά Ελληνικά-λεξικό) > σφεῖς
10 μαστιγόω

μαστιγόω fut. μαστιγώσω; 1 aor. ἐμαστίγωσα. Pass.: fut. 3 pl. μαστιγωθήσονται Ps 72:5; 1 aor. ἐμαστιγώθην; pf. μεμαστίγωμαι LXX (‘whip, flog’ Hdt. et al.; ins, pap, LXX; Philo, In Flacc. 85; Joseph.; TestJos 8:4 v.l.)

① to beat with a whip or lash, whip, flog, scourge

ⓐ of flogging as a punishment decreed by the synagogue (Dt 25:2f; s. the Mishna Tractate Sanhedrin-Makkoth, edited w. notes by SKrauss ’33) w. acc. of pers. Mt 10:17; 23:34. Of the beating administered to Jesus J 19:1. If J refers to the ‘verberatio’ given those condemned to death (TMommsen, Röm. Strafrecht 1899, 938f; Jos., Bell. 2, 308; 5, 449), it is odd that Pilate subsequently claims no cause for action (vs. 6); but if the latter statement refers only to the penalty of crucifixion, μ. vs. 1 may be equivalent to παιδεύω (q.v. 2bγ) in Lk 23:16, 22 (for μ.of a non-capital offense PFlor I, 61, 61 [85A.D.]=Mitt-Wilck. II/2, 80 II, 61). The ‘verberatio’ is denoted in the passion predictions and explicitly as action by non-Israelites Mt 20:19; Mk 10:34; Lk 18:33.—As a punishment for cheating in athletic contests (Ps.-Dionys. Hal., Ars Rhet. 7, 6 p. 292, 5 R. μάστιγες … κ. τὸ ἐκβάλλεσθαι ἐκ τ. σταδίων κ. ἀγώνων) 2 Cl 7:4. Of a whipping as netherworld punishment ApcPt Bodl at vs. 34 (for τύπτοντες Akhmim text ln. 107 Dieterich).

ⓑ gener., in a transf. sense, afflict, torment, mistreat (Artem. 1, 24 p. 25, 16 μ. τὰ ὧτα=pulling the ears; UPZ 119, 29; 44 [156 B.C.]; Sir 30:14) ITr 4:1; Hs 6, 3, 1.

② to punish with discipline in mind, punish, chastise, metaph. ext. of 1: of God (Jer 5:3; Jdth 8:27) for discipline (Maximus Tyr. 19, 5e of the soul) Hb 12:6; 1 Cl 56:4 both Pr 3:12.—DELG s.v. μάστιξ. M-M. TW. Spicq.

Ελληνικά-Αγγλικά παλαιοχριστιανική Λογοτεχνία > μαστιγόω
11 μωρός

μωρός, ά, όν (Trag., X., Pla.+; pap, LXX; TestLevi 7:2; ParJer 9:30; Philo; Ar.; Just.; loanw. in rabb.; on the accent s. B-D-F §13; Mlt-H.) foolish, stupid.

ⓐ of pers. (Simonides of Ceos 48, 6f [Diehl], who uses the word with reference to his opponent, Cleobulus; Diod S 10, 22; Epict. 2, 2, 16; 3, 24, 86; w. ἄνους Hippol. Ref. 6, 34, 8; subst.: Orig., C. Cels. 5, 16, 17; Hippol. Ref. 9, 13, 3) Mt 5:22 (s. c below); (w. τυφλός) 23:17, 19 v.l.; (opp. φρόνιμος) 7:26; 25:2f, 8. The same contrast 1 Cor 4:10, where the apostle ironically compares himself w. the Corinthians. (Opp. σοφός as Lucian, Epigr. 1; Dt 32:6; Sir 21:26) 3:18. W. ἀσύνετος (Sir 21:18) Hv 3, 6, 5; Hs 9, 22, 4. W. ἀσύνετος and other similar predicates 1 Cl 39:1. Of the overly ambitious Hs 8, 7, 4. τὰ μ. τοῦ κόσμου what is considered foolish in the world 1 Cor 1:27 also refers to persons, and can do so since it pertains not to individuals but to a general attribute (B-D-F §138, 1; 263, 4; Rob. 411; Mussies 124).

ⓑ of things (SibOr 3, 226; περὶ τροπολογουμένων καὶ οὐ μωρῶν συγγραμμάτων Orig., C. Cels. 4, 51, 28; Theoph. Ant 2, 12 [p. 130, 14]) ὀξυχολία Hm 5, 2, 4. παράδοσις Mk 7:13 v.l. ζητήσεις 2 Ti 2:23; Tit 3:9. πράγματα Hm 5, 2, 2. τρυφαί m 12, 2, 1. διδαχαί Hs 8, 6, 5. ἀφροσύνη 9, 22, 2. Of the πνεῦμα ἐπίγειον m 11:11.—τὸ μ. τοῦ θεοῦ the foolishness of God (in the judgment of unbelievers) 1 Cor 1:25 (cp. Eur., Hipp. 966 τὸ μ.=‘foolishness’).

ⓒ The mng. of μωρέ Mt 5:22 is disputed. Most scholars take it, as the ancient Syrian versions did, to mean you fool (Pla., Leg. 9, 857d and Socrat., Ep. 14, 6 ὦ μῶρε [as it is accented in Att.]=you fool! Likew. Biogr. p. 179.—Epict. 2, 16, 13; 3, 13, 17 μωρέ; Philo, Cher. 75 ὦ μωρέ), somet. also w. the connotation of an obstinate, godless person (like נָבָל; cp. Dt 32:6; Is 32:6; Sir 50:26). Fr. the time of HPaulus, Comm.² 1804ff I 671 to FSchulthess, ZNW 21, 1922, 241, and SFeigin, JNES 2, ’43, 195 it has been held to be a transliteration of מוֹרֵה rebel (Dt 21:18, 20); acc. to KKöhler, ZNW 19, 1920, 91–95 it is simply the Gk. translation of the calque ῥακά; acc. to HPernot, Pages choisies des Évang. 1925, 61, who refers to Mod. Gk., a simple exclamation w. humorous coloring.—RGuelich, ZNW 64, ’73, 39–52; Field, Notes 3–5; Mlt-H. 152f.—B. 1215. DELG. M-M. EDNT. TW. Spicq.

Ελληνικά-Αγγλικά παλαιοχριστιανική Λογοτεχνία > μωρός
12 οἰκοδομέω

οἰκοδομέω (οἰκοδόμος; Hdt.; ins, pap, LXX, En, EpArist, Philo, Joseph., Test12Patr) impf. ᾠκοδόμουν; fut. οἰκοδομήσω; 1 aor. ᾠκοδόμησα also without augment οἰκοδόμησα (ApcMos 40; on the augment s. W-S. §12, 5a; Mlt-H. 191); pf. ᾠκοδόμηκα LXX; plpf. 3 sg. ᾠκοδομήκει (Just., D. 127, 3). Pass.: impf. 3 sg. ᾠκοδομεῖτο; 1 fut. οἰκοδομηθήσομαι; 1 aor. ᾠκοδομήθην (v.l.) or οἰκοδομήθην (other edd., J 2:20); perf. inf. ᾠκοδομῆσθαι (οἰ-Lk 6:48b); ptc. οἰκοδομημένος (Ox 1 recto, 15f [GTh 32]); ᾠκοδομημένος Hv 3, 2, 6; plpf. 3 sg. ᾠκοδόμητο.

① to construct a building, build

ⓐ w. obj. acc. build, erect (oft. pap [Mayser II/2 p. 315, 30ff]; Jos., Ant. 15, 403 al.; Did., Gen 29, 7) οἰκίαν (Diod S 14, 116, 8; Lucian, Charon 17) Lk 6:48a. τὰς οἰκοδομάς GJs 9:3; pass. (Sb 5104, 2 [163 B.C.] οἰκία ᾠκοδομημένη; PAmh 51, 11; 23) Lk 6:48b. πύργον (Is 5:2) Mt 21:33; Mk 12:1; Lk 14:28; Hs 9, 3, 1; 4; 9, 12, 6; pass. Hv 3, 2, 4ff; 3, 3, 3; 3, 5, 5; 3, 8, 9; Hs 9, 3, 2; 9, 5, 2; 9, 9, 7; cp. 9, 9, 4. ναόν Mk 14:58; 16:3 (Is 49:17); pass. J 2:20 (Heliodorus Periegeta of Athens [II B.C.]: 373 Fgm. 1 Jac. says of the Acropolis: ἐν ἔτεσι ε̄ παντελῶς ἐξεποιήθη; Orig., C. Cels. 5, 33, 13); 16:6 (cp. below; the ‘scripture’ pass. is interpreted spiritually). ἀποθήκας Lk 12:18 (opp. καθαιρεῖν; s. this 2aα). τοὺς τάφους τῶν προφητῶν the tombs of the prophets Mt 23:29 (s. EKlosterman² ad loc.). τὰ μνημεῖα τῶν προφητῶν the monuments for the prophets Lk 11:47 (μνημεῖον 1).—οἰκ. τινί τι build someth. for someone (Gen 8:20; Ex 1:11; Ezk 16:24) συναγωγὴν οἰκ. τινί Lk 7:5. οἰκ. τινὶ οἶκον Ac 7:47, 49; 16:2 (the last two Is 66:1).—W. the obj. acc. and foll. by ἐπί w. acc. or w. gen: τὴν οἰκίαν ἐπὶ τὴν πέτραν build the house on the rock Mt 7:24. ἐπὶ τὴν ἄμμον on the sand vs. 26 (proverbial: Plut. VII p. 463, 10 Bern. εἰς ψάμμον οἰκοδομεῖς). πόλις ἐπὶ τ. ὄρους Lk 4:29 (cp. Jos., Ant. 8, 97). ἐπὶ τὴν γῆν 6:49. πόλις οἰκοδομημένη ἐπʼ ἄκρον ὄρους ὑψηλοῦ a city that is built on the top of a high mountain Ox 1 recto, 15f (GTh 32). πύργος ἐπὶ ὑδάτων Hv 3, 3, 5; ἐπὶ τὴν πέτραν Hs 9, 14, 4 (opp. χαμαὶ οὐκ ᾠκοδόμηται).

ⓑ abs.

α. when the obj. can be supplied fr. the context (Did., Gen. 33, 27) Lk 11:48; 14:30.—Cp. Hv 3, 1, 7; 3, 4, 1a; 3, 10, 1; Hs 9, 4, 1.

β. but also entirely without an obj. (Theoph. Ant. 2, 13 [p. 132, 4f]) ᾠκοδόμουν they erected buildings Lk 17:28. οἱ οἰκοδομοῦντες the builders, the masons (after Ps 117:22) Mt 21:42; Mk 12:10; Lk 20:17; Ac 4:11 v.l.; 1 Pt 2:7; 6:4. Also with no ref. to the Ps passage: Hs 9, 4, 4; 9, 6, 6.

γ. οἱ λίθοι οἱ ἤδη ᾠκοδομημένοι the stones already used in the building Hv 3, 5, 2; cp. Hs 9, 6, 3.

ⓒ build up again, restore, a sense that οἰκ. can receive fr. the context (Josh 6:26; Ps 50:20; 68:36) Mt 26:61; 27:40; Mk 15:29; 16:3 (Is 49:17).—S. also 2.

② to construct in a transcendent sense (as in Hermas passages given under 1, where the tower is a symbol of the church) build: of the building up of the Christian congregation/church (cp. Ruth 4:11; θεμελιώσαντες καὶ οἰκοδομήσαντες οἱ μακάριοι ἀπόστολοι τὴν ἐκκλησίαν Iren. 3, 3, 3 [Harv. II 10, 1]) ἐπὶ ταύτῃ τῇ πέτρᾳ οἰκοδομήσω μου τὴν ἐκκλησίαν on this rock I will build my congregation/church Mt 16:18. ὡς λίθοι ζῶντες οἰκοδομεῖσθε οἶκος πνευματικός like living stones let yourselves be built up (pass.) or build yourselves up (mid., so Goodsp., Probs. 194f) into a spiritual house 1 Pt 2:5. Paul refers to missionary work where another Christian has begun activities as ἐπʼ ἀλλότριον θεμέλιον οἰκ. building on another’s foundation Ro 15:20. He also refers to his negative view of law in relation to the Christ-event as a building, and speaks of its refutation as a tearing down (καταλύειν), and of returning to it as a rebuilding (s. 1c above) Gal 2:18. This is prob. where 11:1 belongs, where (followed by citations of Scripture) it is said of the Israelites that they do not accept the baptism that removes sin, but ἑαυτοῖς οἰκοδομήσουσιν will build up someth. for themselves. In another pass. B calls the believer a πνευματικὸς ναὸς οἰκοδομούμενος τῷ κυρίῳ a spiritual temple built for the Lord 16:10; cp. vs. 6f.—Hermas’ temple-building discourse mentions angels entrusted by God with οἰκοδομεῖν building up or completion of his whole creation Hv 3, 4, 1b.—(In this connection cp. Orig., C. Cels. 4, 38, 16 γυνὴ οἰκοδομηθεῖσα ὑπὸ τοῦ θεοῦ [of Eve]).

③ to help improve ability to function in living responsibly and effectively, strengthen, build up, make more able. οἰκ. is thus used in a nonliteral sense and oft. without consciousness of its basic mng. (Straub p. 27), somewhat like edify in our moral parlance (this extended use is found as early as X., Cyr. 8, 7, 15 and in LXX: Ps 27:5; Jer 40:7. Also TestBenj 8:3.—JWeiss on 1 Cor 8:1). Of the Lord, who is able to strengthen the believers Ac 20:32. Of the congregation, which was being built up 9:31.—Esp. in Paul: ἡ ἀγάπη οἰκοδομεῖ love builds up (in contrast to γνῶσις, which ‘puffs up’) 1 Cor 8:1 (=Dg 12:5). πάντα ἔξεστιν, ἀλλʼ οὐ πάντα οἰκοδομεῖ everything is permitted, but not everything is beneficial 10:23. ὁ λαλῶν γλώσσῃ ἑαυτὸν οἰκοδομεῖ• ὁ δὲ προφητεύων ἐκκλησίαν οἰκοδομεῖ 14:4; cp. vs. 17. οἰκοδομεῖτε εἷς τὸν ἕνα strengthen one another 1 Th 5:11. In 1 Cor 8:10 the apostle is prob. speaking ironically, w. ref. to the ‘strong’ party at Corinth, who declare that by their example they are benefiting the ‘weak’: οὐχὶ ἡ συνείδησις αὐτοῦ οἰκοδομηθήσεται εἰς τὸ τὰ εἰδωλόθυτα ἐσθίειν; will not his conscience be ‘strengthened’ so that he will eat meat offered to idols? (difft. MargaretThrall, TU 102, ’68, 468–72).—Of Paul’s letters, by which δυνηθήσεσθε οἰκοδομεῖσθαι εἰς τὴν δοθεῖσαν ὑμῖν πίστιν you will be able to build yourselves up in the faith that has been given you Pol 3:2.—HCremer, Über den bibl. Begriff der Erbauung 1863; HScott, The Place of οἰκοδομή in the NT: PT 2, 1904, 402–24; HBassermann, Über den Begriff ‘Erbauung’: Zeitschr. für prakt. Theol. 4 1882, 1–22; CTrossen, Erbauen: ThGl 6, 1914, 804ff; PVielhauer, Oikodome (d. Bild vom Bau vom NT bis Clem. Alex.), diss. Hdlbg. ’39; PBonnard, Jésus-Christ édifiant son Église ’48.—B. 590. DELG s.v. δέμω. M-M. TW. Sv.

Ελληνικά-Αγγλικά παλαιοχριστιανική Λογοτεχνία > οἰκοδομέω
13 παραβολή

παραβολή, ῆς, ἡ (παραβάλλω; Pla., Isocr.+; ins, pap, LXX; En; TestSol 20:4; Just.; Mel., P.—JWackernagel, Parabola: IndogF 31, 1912/13, 262–67)

① someth. that serves as a model or example pointing beyond itself for later realization, type, figure παραβολὴ εἰς τὸν καιρὸν τὸν ἐνεστηκότα a symbol (pointing) to the present age Hb 9:9. ἐν παραβολῇ as a type (of the violent death and of the resurrection of Christ) 11:19. λέγει ὁ προφήτης παραβολὴν κυρίου B 6:10, where the mng. may be the prophet is uttering a parable of the Lord (Goodsp.), or the prophet speaks of the Lord in figurative language (Kleist), or the prophet speaks in figurative language given him by the Lord. W. αἴνιγμα PtK 4 p. 15, 31. The things of the present or future cannot be understood by the ordinary Christian διὰ τὸ ἐν παραβολαῖς κεῖσθαι because they are expressed in figures B 17:2.

② a narrative or saying of varying length, designed to illustrate a truth especially through comparison or simile, comparison, illustration, parable, proverb, maxim.

ⓐ in the synoptics the word refers to a variety of illustrative formulations in the teaching of Jesus (in Mt 17 times, in Mk 13 times, in Lk 18 times; cp. Euclides [400 B.C.] who, acc. to Diog. L. 2, 107, rejected ὁ διὰ παραβολῆς λόγος; Aristot., Rhet. 2, 20, 2ff; Περὶ ὕψους 37; Vi. Aesopi II p. 307, 15 Eb.; Biogr. p. 87 Ὁμήρου παραβολαί; Philo, Conf. Lingu. 99; Jos., Ant. 8, 44. The Gk. OT also used παραβολή for various words and expressions that involve comparison, including riddles [s. Jülicher below: I² 32–40].—En 1:2; 3. Cp. π. κυριακαί Iren. 1, 8, 1 [Harv I 67, 1]). For prob. OT influence on the use of comparison in narrative s. Ezk 17. λέγειν, εἰπεῖν παραβολήν: Lk 13:6; 16:19 D; 19:11 (begins the longest ‘parable’ in the synoptics: 17 verses). τινί to someone 4:23 (the briefest ‘parable’: 3 words; here and in the next passage π.=proverb, quoted by Jesus); 6:39; 18:1; 21:29. πρός τινα to someone 5:36; 12:16, 41; 14:7; 15:3; 18:9; 20:9; with reference to someone Mk 12:12; Lk 20:19. παραβολὴν λαλεῖν τινι Mt 13:33. παραβολὴν παρατιθέναι τινί put a parable before someone vss. 24, 31. τελεῖν τὰς παραβολάς finish the parables vs. 53. διασαφεῖν (v.l. φράζειν) τινι τὴν παραβολήν vs. 36. φράζειν τινὶ τὴν παρ. explain the parable 15:15. ἀκούειν Mt 13:18; 21:33, 45. γνῶναι and εἰδέναι understand Mk 4:13b et al. μαθεῖν τὴν παρ. ἀπό τινος learn the parable from someth. Mt 24:32; Mk 13:28. (ἐπ)ἐρωτᾶν τινα τὴν παρ. ask someone the mng. of the parable Mk 7:17 (in ref. to vs. 15); cp. 4:10. Also ἐπερωτᾶν τινα περὶ τῆς παρ. 7:17 v.l.; ἐπηρώτων αὐτὸν τίς εἴη ἡ παρ. they asked him what the parable meant Lk 8:9; the answer to it: ἔστιν δὲ αὕτη ἡ παρ. but the parable means this vs. 11.—παραβολαῖς λαλεῖν τινί τι Mk 4:33. W. the gen. of that which forms the subj. of the parable ἡ παρ. τοῦ σπείραντος Mt 13:18. τῶν ζιζανίων vs. 36 (cp. ἡ περὶ τοῦ … τελώνου παρ. Orig., C. Cels. 3, 64, 11).—W. a prep.: εἶπεν διὰ παραβολῆς Lk 8:4 (Orig., C. Cels. 1, 5, 11).—χωρὶς παραβολῆς οὐδὲν ἐλάλει αὐτοῖς Mt 13:34b; Mk 4:34.—Mostly ἐν: τιθέναι τὴν βασιλείαν τοῦ θεοῦ ἐν παραβολῇ present the Reign of God in a parable vs. 30. ἐν παραβολαῖς λαλεῖν τινι Mt 13:10, 13; Mk 12:1. ἐν παραβολαῖς λέγειν τινί Mt 22:1; Mk 3:23. λαλεῖν τινί τι ἐν παραβολαῖς Mt 13:3, 34a. διδάσκειν τινά τι ἐν παραβολαῖς Mk 4:2. ἀνοίξω ἐν παραβολαῖς τὸ στόμα μου Mt 13:35 (Ps 77:2). γίνεταί τινί τι ἐν παραβολαῖς someth. comes to someone in the form of parables Mk 4:11; cp. Lk 8:10. According to Eus. (3, 39, 11), Papias presented some unusual parables of the Savior, i.e. ascribed to Jesus: Papias (2:11).—AJülicher, Die Gleichnisreden Jesu I² 1899; II 1899 [the older lit. is given here I 203–322]; GHeinrici, RE VI 688–703, XXIII 561f; CBugge, Die Hauptparabeln Jesu 1903; PFiebig, Altjüdische Gleichnisse und d. Gleichnisse Jesu 1904, D. Gleichnisse Jesu im Lichte der rabb. Gleich. 1912, D. Erzählungsstil der Ev. 1925; LFonck, Die Parabeln des Herrn³ 1909 (w. much lit. on the individual parables), The Parables of the Gospel³ 1918; JKögel, BFCT XIX 6, 1915; MMeinertz, Die Gleichnisse Jesu 1916; 4th ed. ’48; HWeinel, Die Gleichnisse Jesu⁵ 1929; RBultmann, D. Geschichte der synoptischen Tradition² ’31, 179–222; MDibelius, D. Formgeschichte des Ev.² 33; EBuonaiuti, Le parabole di Gesù: Religio 10–13, ’34–37; WOesterly, The Gospel Parables in the Light of Their Jewish Background ’36; EWechssler, Hellas im Ev. ’36, 267–85; CDodd, The Parables of the Kgdm.³ ’36; BSmith, The Par. of the Syn. Gosp. ’37; WMichaelis, Es ging e. Sämann aus. zu säen ’38; OPiper, The Understanding of the Syn. Par.: EvQ 14, ’42, 42–53; CMasson, Les Paraboles de Marc IV ’45; JJeremias, D. Gleichn. Jesu⁴ ’56 (Eng. tr. ’55); ELinnemann, Jesus of the Parables, tr. JSturdy, ’66; AWeiser, D. Knechtsgleichnisse der synopt. Evv. ’71; JKingsbury, The Parables of Jesus in Mt 13, ’69; FDanker, Fresh Persp. on Mt, CTM 41, ’70, 478–90; JKingsbury, ibid. 42, ’71, 579–96; TManson, The Teaching of Jesus, ’55, 57–86; JSider, Biblica 62, ’81, 453–70 (synoptists); ECuvillier, Le concept de ΠΑΡΑΒΟΛΗ dans le second évangile ’93.

ⓑ Apart fr. the Syn. gospels, παρ. is found in our lit. freq. in Hermas (as heading: Hs 1:1; 2:1; 3:1; 4:1; 5:1; [6:1; 7:1; 8:1]) but not independently of the synoptic tradition. Hermas uses παρ. only once to designate a real illustrative (double) parable, in m 11:18. Elsewh παρ. is for Hermas an enigmatic presentation that is somet. seen in a vision, somet. expressed in words, but in any case is in need of detailed interpretation: w. gen. of content (s. a above) τοῦ πύργου about the tower Hv 3, 3, 2. τοῦ ἀγροῦ about the field Hs 5, 4, 1. τῶν ὀρέων 9, 29, 4. δηλοῦν τὴν παραβολήν 5, 4, 1a. παρ. ἐστιν ταῦτα 5, 4, 1b. ἀκούειν τὴν παραβολήν v 3, 3, 2; 3, 12, 1; Hs 5, 2, 1. παραβολὰς λαλεῖν τινι 5, 4, 2a. τὰ ῥήματα τὰ λεγόμενα διὰ παραβολῶν 5, 4, 3b; γράφειν τὰς παρ. v 5:5f; Hs 9, 1, 1; συνιέναι τὰς παρ. m 10, 1, 3. γινώσκειν Hs 5, 3, 1a; 9, 5, 5. νοεῖν m 10, 1, 4; Hs 5, 3, 1b. ἐπιλύειν τινὶ παρ. 5, 3, 1c; 5, 4, 2b; 3a. συντελεῖν 9, 29, 4. ἡ ἐπίλυσις τῆς παρ. explanation, interpretation of the parable 5, 6, 8; αἱ ἐπιλύσεις τῶν παρ. 5, 5, 1. ὁ υἱὸς τοῦ θεοῦ εἰς δούλου τρόπον κεῖται ἐν τῇ παρ. the Son of God appears in the parable as a slave 5, 5, 5. ἡ παρ. εἰς τοὺς δούλους τοῦ θεοῦ κεῖται the par. refers to the slaves of God 2:4.—S. also the headings to the various parts of the third division of Hermas (the Parables) and on Hermas gener. s. Jülicher, op. cit. I 204–209.—εἰ δὲ δεῖ ἡμᾶς καὶ ἀπὸ τῶν σπερμάτων μὴ ποιεῖσθαι τὴν παρ. but if we are not to draw our comparison from the (action of) the seeds AcPlCor 2:28.—BScott, Profiles of Jesus, Parables: The Fourth R 10, ’97, 3–14.—B. 1262. DELG s.v. βάλλω. M-M. EDNT. TW. Sv.

Ελληνικά-Αγγλικά παλαιοχριστιανική Λογοτεχνία > παραβολή
14 πνεῦμα

πνεῦμα, ατος, τό (πνέω; Aeschyl., Pre-Socr., Hdt.+. On the history of the word s. Rtzst., Mysterienrel.³ 308ff).

① air in movement, blowing, breathing (even the glowing exhalations of a volcanic crater: Diod S 5, 7, 3)

ⓐ wind (Aeschyl. et al.; LXX, EpArist, Philo; Jos., Ant. 2, 343; 349; SibOr 8, 297) in wordplay τὸ πνεῦμα πνεῖ the wind blows J 3:8a (EpJer 60 πνεῦμα ἐν πάσῃ χώρᾳ πνεῖ. But s. TDonn, ET 66, ’54f, 32; JThomas, Restoration Qtrly 24, ’81, 219–24). ὀθόνη πλοίου ὑπὸ πνεύματος πληρουμένη MPol 15:2. Of God ὁ ποιῶν τοὺς ἀγγέλους αὐτοῦ πνεύματα who makes his angels winds Hb 1:7; 1 Cl 36:3 (both Ps 103:4).

ⓑ the breathing out of air, blowing, breath (Aeschyl. et al.; Pla., Tim. 79b; LXX) ὁ ἄνομος, ὅν ὁ κύριος Ἰησοῦς ἀνελεῖ τῷ πνεύματι τοῦ στόματος αὐτοῦ 2 Th 2:8 (cp. Is 11:4; Ps 32:6).

② that which animates or gives life to the body, breath, (life-)spirit (Aeschyl. et al.; Phoenix of Colophon 1, 16 [Coll. Alex. p. 231] πν.=a breathing entity [in contrast to becoming earth in death]; Polyb. 31, 10, 4; Ps.-Aristot., De Mundo 4 p. 394b, 8ff; PHib 5, 54 [III B.C.]; PGM 4, 538; 658; 2499; LXX; TestAbr A 17 p. 98, 19 [Stone p. 44] al.; JosAs 19:3; SibOr 4, 46; Tat. 4:2) ἀφιέναι τὸ πνεῦμα give up one’s spirit, breathe one’s last (Eur., Hec. 571; Porphyr., Vi. Plotini 2) Mt 27:50. J says for this παραδιδόναι τὸ πν. 19:3 (cp. ApcMos 31 ἀποδῶ τὸ πν.; Just., D. 105, 5). Of the return of the (life-)spirit of a deceased person into her dead body ἐπέστρεψεν τὸ πν. αὐτῆς Lk 8:55 (cp. Jdg 15:19). εἰς χεῖράς σου παρατίθεμαι τὸ πν. μου into your hands I entrust my spirit 23:46 (Ps 30:6; for alleged focus on ἐλπίζειν s. EBons, BZ 38, ’94, 93–101). κύριε Ἰησοῦ, δέξαι τὸ πνεῦμά μου Ac 7:59; composite of both passages AcPl Ha 10, 23 (cp. ApcMos 42). τὸ πν. μου ὁ δεσπότης δέξεται GJs 23:3 (on the pneuma flying upward after death cp. Epicharm. in Vorsokrat. 23 [=13, 4th ed.], B 9 and 22; Eur., Suppl. 533 πνεῦμα μὲν πρὸς αἰθέρα, τὸ σῶμα δʼ ἐς γῆν; PGM 1, 177ff τελευτήσαντός σου τὸ σῶμα περιστελεῖ, σοῦ δὲ τὸ πνεῦμα … εἰς ἀέρα ἄξει σὺν αὑτῷ ‘when you are dead [the angel] will wrap your body … and take your spirit with him into the sky’). τὸ σῶμα χωρὶς πν. νεκρόν ἐστιν Js 2:26. πν. ζωῆς ἐκ τ. θεοῦ εἰσῆλθεν ἐν αὐτοῖς (i.e. the prophet-witnesses who have been martyred) Rv 11:11 (cp. Ezk 37:10 v.l. εἰσῆλθεν εἰς αὐτοὺς πνεῦμα ζωῆς; vs. 5). Of the spirit that animated the image of a beast, and enabled it to speak and to have Christians put to death 13:15.—After a person’s death, the πν. lives on as an independent being, in heaven πνεύματα δικαὶων τετελειωμένων Hb 12:23 (cp. Da 3:86 εὐλογεῖτε, πνεύματα καὶ ψυχαὶ δικαίων, τὸν κύριον). According to non-biblical sources, the πν. are in the netherworld (cp. En 22:3–13; Sib Or 7, 127) or in the air (PGM 1, 178), where evil spirits can prevent them from ascending higher (s. ἀήρ2b). τοῖς ἐν φυλακῇ πνεύμασιν πορευθεὶς ἐκήρυξεν 1 Pt 3:19 belongs here if it refers to Jesus’ preaching to the spirits of the dead confined in Hades (so Usteri et al.; s. also JMcCulloch, The Harrowing of Hell, 1930), whether it be when he descended into Hades, or when he returned to heaven (so RBultmann, Bekenntnis u. Liedfragmente im 1 Pt: ConNeot11, ’47, 1–14).—CClemen, Niedergefahren zu den Toten 1900; JTurmel, La Descente du Christ aux enfers 1905; JMonnier, La Descente aux enfers 1906; HHoltzmann, ARW 11, 1908, 285–97; KGschwind, Die Niederfahrt Christi in die Unterwelt 1911; DPlooij, De Descensus in 1 Pt 3:19 en 4:6: TT 47, 1913, 145–62; JBernard, The Descent into Hades a Christian Baptism (on 1 Pt 3:19ff): Exp. 8th ser., 11, 1916, 241–74; CSchmidt, Gespräche Jesu mit seinen Jüngern: TU 43, 1919, 452ff; JFrings, BZ 17, 1926, 75–88; JKroll, Gott u. Hölle ’32; RGanschinietz, Katabasis: Pauly-W. X/2, 1919, 2359–449; Clemen² 89–96; WBieder, Die Vorstellung v. d. Höllenfahrt Jesu Chr. ’49; SJohnson, JBL 79, ’60, 48–51; WDalton, Christ’s Proclamation to the Spirits ’65. S. also the lit. in Windisch, Hdb.² 1930, exc. on 1 Pt 3:20; ESelwyn, The First Ep. of St. Peter ’46 and 4c below.—This is prob. also the place for θανατωθεὶς μὲν σαρκὶ ζωοποιηθεὶς δὲ πνεύματι• ἐν ᾧ καὶ … 1 Pt 3:18f (some mss. read πνεύματι instead of πνεύμασιν in vs. 19, evidently in ref. to the manner of Jesus’ movement; πνεῦμα is that part of Christ which, in contrast to σάρξ, did not pass away in death, but survived as an individual entity after death; s. ἐν 7). Likew. the contrast κατὰ σάρκα … κατὰ πνεῦμα Ro 1:3f. Cp. 1 Ti 3:16.

③ a part of human personality, spirit

ⓐ when used with σάρξ, the flesh, it denotes the immaterial part 2 Cor 7:1; Col 2:5. Flesh and spirit=the whole personality, in its outer and inner aspects, oft. in Ign.: IMg 1:2; 13:1a; ITr ins; 12:1; IRo ins; ISm 1:1; IPol 5:1; AcPl Ant 13, 18 (=Aa I 237, 3).—In the same sense beside σῶμα, the body (Simplicius, In Epict. p. 50, 1; Ps.-Phoc. 106f; PGM 1, 178) 1 Cor 5:3–5; 7:34.—The inner life of humans is divided into ψυχὴ καὶ πνεῦμα (cp. Ps.-Pla., Axioch. 10 p. 370c τὶ θεῖον ὄντως ἐνῆν πνεῦμα τῇ ψυχῇ=a divine spirit was actually in the soul; Wsd 15:11; Jos., Ant. 1, 34; Tat. 13, 2; 15, 1 et al.; Ath. 27, 1. S. also Herm. Wr. 10, 13; 16f; PGM 4, 627; 630. ἐκ τριῶν συνεστάναι λέγουσι τὸν ἄνθρωπον ἐκ ψυχῆς καὶ σώματος καὶ πνεύματος Did., Gen. 55, 14) Hb 4:12. Cp. Phil 1:27. τὸ πνεῦμα καὶ ἡ ψυχὴ καὶ τὸ σῶμα 1 Th 5:23 (s. GMilligan, Thess. 1908, 78f; EvDobschütz in Meyer X⁷ 1909, 230ff; EBurton, Spirit, Soul, and Flesh 1918; AFestugière, La Trichotomie des 1 Th 5:23 et la Philos. gr.: RSR 20, 1930, 385–415; CMasson, RTP 33, ’45, 97–102; FGrant, An Introd. to NT Thought ’50, 161–66). σαρκί, ψυχῇ, πνεύματι IPhld 11:2.

ⓑ as the source and seat of insight, feeling, and will, gener. as the representative part of human inner life (cp. PGM 4, 627; 3 Km 20:5; Sir 9:9 al.; Just., D. 30, 1; Did., Gen. 232, 5) ἐπιγνοὺς ὁ Ἰησοῦς τῷ πν. αὐτοῦ Mk 2:8. ἀναστενάξας τῷ πν. αὐτοῦ λέγει 8:12 (s. ἀναστενάζω). ἠγαλλίασεν τὸ πν. μου Lk 1:47 (in parallelism w. ψυχή vs. 46, as Sir 9:9). ἠγαλλιάσατο τῷ πν. 10:21 v.l., Ἰησοῦς ἐνεβριμήσατο τῷ πν. J 11:33 (s. ἐμβριμάομαι 3); Ἰης. ἐταράχθη τῷ πν. 13:21. παρωξύνετο τὸ πν. αὐτοῦ ἐν αὐτῷ Ac 17:16; ζέων τῷ πν. with spirit-fervor 18:25 (s. ζέω). τὸ παιδίον ἐκραταιοῦτο πνεύματι Lk 1:80; 2:40 v.l.; ἔθετο ὁ Παῦλος ἐν τῷ πν. Paul made up his mind Ac 19:21 (some would put this pass. in 6c, but cp. Lk 1:66 and analogous formulations Hom. et al. in L-S-J-M s.v. τίθημι A6). προσκυνήσουσιν τῷ πατρὶ ἐν πνεύματι of the spiritual, i.e. the pure, inner worship of God, that has nothing to do w. holy times, places, appurtenances, or ceremonies J 4:23; cp. vs. 24b. πν. συντετριμμένον (Ps 50:19) 1 Cl 18:17; 52:4.—2 Cl 20:4; Hv 3, 12, 2; 3, 13, 2.—This usage is also found in Paul. His conviction (s. 5 below) that the Christian possesses the (divine) πνεῦμα and thus is different fr. all other people, leads him to choose this word in preference to others, in order to characterize a believer’s inner being gener. ᾧ λατρεύω ἐν τῷ πν. μου Ro 1:9. οὐκ ἔσχηκα ἄνεσιν τῷ πν. μου 2 Cor 2:13. Cp. 7:13. As a matter of fact, it can mean simply a person’s very self or ego: τὸ πνεῦμα συμμαρτυρεῖ τῷ πνεύματι ἡμῶν the Spirit (of God) bears witness to our very self Ro 8:16 (cp. PGM 12, 327 ἠκούσθη μου τὸ πνεῦμα ὑπὸ πνεύματος οὐρανοῦ). ἀνέπαυσαν τὸ ἐμὸν πν. καὶ τὸ ὑμῶν they have refreshed both me and you 1 Cor 16:18. ἡ χάρις τοῦ κυρίου ἡμῶν Ἰ. Χρ. μετά τοῦ πν. (ὑμῶν) Gal 6:18; Phil 4:23; Phlm 25. Cp. 2 Ti 4:22. Likew. in Ign. τὸ ἐμὸν πν. my (unworthy) self IEph 18:1; IRo 9:3; cp. 1 Cor 2:11a—On the relation of the divine Spirit to the believer’s spiritual self, s. SWollenweider, Der Geist Gottes als Selbst der Glaubenden: ZTK 93, ’96, 163–92.—Only a part of the inner life, i.e. that which concerns the will, is meant in τὸ μὲν πνεῦμα πρόθυμον, ἡ δὲ σὰρξ ἀσθενής Mt 26:41; Mk 14:38; Pol 7:2. That which is inferior, anxiety, fear of suffering, etc. is attributed to the σάρξ.—The mng. of the expr. οἱ πτωχοὶ τῷ πνεύματι Mt 5:3 is difficult to determine w. certainty (cp. Pla., Ep. 7, 335a πένης ἀνὴρ τὴν ψυχήν. The dat. as τῇ ψυχῇ M. Ant. 6, 52; 8, 51). The sense is prob. those who are poor in their inner life, because they do not have a misdirected pride in their own spiritual riches (s. AKlöpper, Über den Sinn u. die ursprgl. Form der ersten Seligpreisung der Bergpredigt bei Mt: ZWT 37, 1894, 175–91; RKabisch, Die erste Seligpreisung: StKr 69, 1896, 195–215; KKöhler, Die ursprgl. Form der Seligpreisungen: StKr 91, 1918, 157–92; JBoehmer, De Schatkamer 17, 1923, 11–16, TT [Copenhagen] 4, 1924, 195–207, JBL 45, 1926, 298–304; WMacgregor, ET 39, 1928, 293–97; VMacchioro, JR 12, ’32, 40–49; EEvans, Theology 47, ’44, 55–60; HLeisegang, Pneuma Hagion 1922, 134ff; Betz, SM 116 n. 178 for Qumran reff.).

ⓒ spiritual state, state of mind, disposition ἐν ἀγάπῃ πνεύματί τε πραΰτητος with love and a gentle spirit 1 Cor 4:21; cp. Gal 6:1. τὸ πν. τοῦ νοὸς ὑμῶν Eph 4:23 (s. νοῦς 2a). ἐν τῷ ἀφθάρτῳ τοῦ ἡσυχίου πνεύματος with the imperishable (gift) of a quiet disposition 1 Pt 3:4.

④ an independent noncorporeal being, in contrast to a being that can be perceived by the physical senses, spirit (ELangton, Good and Evil Spirits ’42).

ⓐ God personally: πνεῦμα ὁ θεός J 4:24a (Ath. 16, 2; on God as a spirit, esp. in the Stoa, s. MPohlenz, D. Stoa ’48/49. Hdb. ad loc. Also Celsus 6, 71 [Stoic]; Herm. Wr. 18, 3 ἀκάματον μέν ἐστι πνεῦμα ὁ θεός).

ⓑ good, or at least not expressly evil spirits or spirit-beings (cp. CIG III, 5858b δαίμονες καὶ πνεύματα; Proclus on Pla., Cratyl. p. 69, 6; 12 Pasqu.; En 15:4; 6; 8; 10; TestAbr A 4 p. 81, 15f [Stone p. 10, 15f] πάντα τὰ ἐπουράνια πνεύματα; TestAbr B 13 p. 117, 26 [Stone p. 82] ὑψηλὸν πν.; PGM 3, 8 ἐπικαλοῦμαί σε, ἱερὸν πνεῦμα; 4, 1448; 3080; 12, 249) πνεῦμα w. ἄγγελος (cp. Jos., Ant. 4, 108; Ps.-Clem., Hom. 3, 33; 8, 12) Ac 23:8f. God is ὁ παντὸς πνεύματος κτίστης καὶ ἐπίσκοπος 1 Cl 59:3b.—Pl., God the μόνος εὐεργέτης πνεύματων 1 Cl 59:3a. Cp. 64 (s. on this Num 16:22; 27:16. Prayers for vengeance fr. Rheneia [Dssm., LO 351–55=LAE 423ff=SIG 1181, 2] τὸν θεὸν τὸν κύριον τῶν πνευμάτων; PGM 5, 467 θεὸς θεῶν, ὁ κύριος τῶν πν.; sim. the magic pap PWarr 21, 24; 26 [III A.D.]); the πατὴρ τῶν πνευμάτων Hb 12:9. Intermediary beings (in polytheistic terminology: δαίμονες) that serve God are called λειτουργικὰ πνεύματα Hb 1:14. In Rv we read of the ἑπτὰ πνεύματα (τοῦ θεοῦ) 1:4; 3:1; 4:5; 5:6; s. ASkrinjar, Biblica 16, ’35, 1–24; 113–40.— Ghost Lk 24:37, 39.

ⓒ evil spirits (PGM 13, 798; 36, 160; TestJob 27, 2; ApcSed [both Satan]; AscIs 3:28; Just., D. 39, 6 al.; Ath. 25, 3), esp. in accounts of healing in the Synoptics: (τὸ) πνεῦμα (τὸ) ἀκάθαρτον (Just., D. 82, 3) Mt 12:43; Mk 1:23, 26; 3:30; 5:2, 8; 7:25; 9:25a; Lk 8:29; 9:42; 11:24; Rv 18:2. Pl. (TestBenj 5:2) Mt 10:1; Mk 1:27; 3:11; 5:13; 6:7; Lk 4:36; 6:18; Ac 5:16; 8:7; Rv 16:13; ending of Mk in the Freer ms.—τὸ πν. τὸ πονηρόν Ac 19:15f. Pl. (En 99:7; TestSim 4:9; 6:6, TestJud 16:1; Just., D. 76, 6) Lk 7:21; 8:2; Ac 19:12f.—πν. ἄλαλον Mk 9:17; cp. vs. 25b (s. ἄλαλος). πν. πύθων Ac 16:16 (s. πύθων). πν. ἀσθενείας Lk 13:11. Cp. 1 Ti 4:1b. πνεῦμα δαιμονίου ἀκαθάρτου (s. δαιμόνιον 2) Lk 4:33. πνεύματα δαιμονίων Rv 16:14 (in effect = personified ‘exhalations’ of evil powers; for the combination of πν. and δαιμ. cp. the love spell Sb 4324, 16f τὰ πνεύματα τῶν δαιμόνων τούτων).—Abs. of a harmful spirit Mk 9:20; Lk 9:39; Ac 16:18. Pl. Mt 8:16; 12:45; Lk 10:20; 11:26.—1 Pt 3:19 (s. 2 above) belongs here if the πνεύματα refer to hostile spirit-powers, evil spirits, fallen angels (so FSpitta, Christi Predigt an die Geister 1890; HGunkel, Zum religionsgesch. Verständnis des NT 1903, 72f; WBousset, ZNW 19, 1920, 50–66; Rtzst., Herr der Grösse 1919, 25ff; Knopf, Windisch, FHauck ad loc.; BReicke, The Disobedient Spirits and Christian Baptism ’46, esp. 54–56, 69).—Hermas also has the concept of evil spirits that lead an independent existence, and live and reign within the inner life of a pers.; the Holy Spirit, who also lives or would like to live there, is forced out by them (cp. TestDan 4) Hm 5, 1, 2–4; 5, 2, 5–8; 10, 1, 2. τὸ πν. τὸ ἅγιον … ἕτερον πονηρὸν πν. 5, 1, 2. These πνεύματα are ὀξυχολία 5, 1, 3; 5, 2, 8 (τὸ πονηρότατον πν.); 10, 1, 2; διψυχία 9:11 (ἐπίγειον πν. ἐστι παρὰ τοῦ διαβόλου); 10, 1, 2; λύπη 10, 1, 2 (πάντων τῶν πνευμάτων πονηροτέρα) and other vices. On the complicated pneuma-concept of the Mandates of Hermas s. MDibelius, Hdb. exc. on Hm 5, 2, 7; cp. Leutzsch, Hermas 453f n. 133.

⑤ God’s being as controlling influence, with focus on association with humans, Spirit, spirit as that which differentiates God fr. everything that is not God, as the divine power that produces all divine existence, as the divine element in which all divine life is carried on, as the bearer of every application of the divine will. All those who belong to God possess or receive this spirit and hence have a share in God’s life. This spirit also serves to distinguish Christians fr. all unbelievers (cp. PGM 4, 1121ff, where the spirit is greeted as one who enters devotees and, in accordance w. God’s will, separates them fr. themselves, i.e. fr. the purely human part of their nature); for this latter aspect s. esp. 6 below.

ⓐ the Spirit of God, of the Lord (=God) etc. (LXX; TestSim 4:4; JosAs 8:11; ApcSed 14:6; 15:6; ApcMos 43; SibOr 3, 701; Ps.-Phoc. 106; Philo; Joseph. [s. c below]; apolog. Cp. Plut., Numa 4, 6 πνεῦμα θεοῦ, capable of begetting children; s. παρθένος a) τὸ πν. τοῦ θεοῦ 1 Cor 2:11b, 14; 3:16; 6:11; 1J 4:2a (Just., D. 49, 3; Tat. 13, 3; Ath. 22, 3). τὸ τοῦ θεοῦ πν. 1 Pt 4:14 (Just., A I, 60, 6). τὸ πν. τὸ ἐκ τοῦ θεοῦ 1 Cor 2:12b. τὸ πν. κυρίου Ac 5:9; B 6:14; B 9:2 (cp. Mel., P. 32, 222). τὸ πνεῦμά μου or αὐτοῦ: Mt 12:18 (Is 42:1); Ac 2:17f (Jo 3:1f.—Cp. 1QS 4:21); 1 Cor 2:10a v.l.; Eph 3:16; 1 Th 4:8 (where τὸ ἅγιον is added); 1J 4:13.—τὸ πν. τοῦ πατρὸς ὑμῶν Mt 10:20. τὸ πν. τοῦ ἐγείραντος τὸν Ἰησοῦν Ro 8:11a.—Without the art. πν. θεοῦ (JosAs 4:9; Tat. 15:3; Theoph. Ant. 1, 5 [p. 66, 18]) the Spirit of God Mt 3:16; 12:28; Ro 8:9b, 14, 19; 1 Cor 7:40; 12:3a; 2 Cor 3:3 (πν. θεοῦ ζῶντος); Phil 3:3. πν. κυρίου Lk 4:18 (Is 61:1); Ac 8:39 (like J 3:8; 20:22; Ac 2:4, this pass. belongs on the borderline betw. the mngs. ‘wind’ and ‘spirit’; cp. Diod S 3, 60, 3 Ἕσπερον ἐξαίφνης ὑπὸ πνευμάτων συναρπαγέντα μεγάλων ἄφαντον γενέσθαι ‘Hesperus [a son of Atlas] was suddenly snatched by strong winds and vanished fr. sight’. S. HLeisegang, Der Hl. Geist I 1, 1919, 19ff; OCullmann, TZ. 4, ’48, 364); 1 Cl 21:2.

ⓑ the Spirit of Christ, of the Lord (=Christ) etc. τὸ πν. Ἰησοῦ Ac 16:7. τὸ πν. Χριστοῦ AcPlCor 2:32. τὸ ἐν αὐτοῖς πν. Χριστοῦ 1 Pt 1:11. πν. Χριστοῦ Ro 8:9c. πν. τοῦ Χριστοῦ AcPl Ha 8, 18. ἀπὸ τοῦ πν. τοῦ χριστοῦ AcPlCor 2:10. τὸ πν. Ἰης. Χριστοῦ Phil 1:19. τὸ πν. κυρίου 2 Cor 3:17b (JHermann, Kyrios und Pneuma, ’61). τὸ πν. τοῦ υἱοῦ αὐτοῦ (=θεοῦ) Gal 4:6. As possessor of the divine Spirit, and at the same time controlling its distribution among humans, Christ is called κύριος πνεύματος Lord of the Spirit 2 Cor 3:18 (s. Windisch ad loc.); but many prefer to transl. from the Lord who is the Spirit.—CMoule, OCullmann Festschr., ’72, 231–37.

ⓒ Because of its heavenly origin and nature this Spirit is called (the) Holy Spirit (cp. PGM 4, 510 ἵνα πνεύσῃ ἐν ἐμοὶ τὸ ἱερὸν πνεῦμα.—Neither Philo nor Josephus called the Spirit πν. ἅγιον; the former used θεῖον or θεοῦ πν., the latter πν. θεῖον: Ant. 4, 118; 8, 408; 10, 239; but ἅγιον πνεῦμα Orig. C. Cels 1, 40, 16).

α. w. the art. τὸ πνεῦμα τὸ ἅγιον (Is 63:10f; Ps 50:13; 142:10 v.l.; cp. Sus 45 Theod.; TestAbr A 4 p. 81, 10 [Stone p. 10]; JosAs 8:11 [codd. ADE]; AscIs 3, 15, 26; Just., D. 36, 6 al.) Mt 12:32 = Mk 3:29 = Lk 12:10 (τὸ ἅγιον πνεῦμα; on the ‘sin against the Holy Spirit’ s. HLeisegang, Pneuma Hagion 1922, 96–112; AFridrichsen, Le péché contre le Saint-Esprit: RHPR 3, 1923, 367–72). Mk 12:36; 13:11; Lk 2:26; 3:22; 10:21; J 14:26; Ac 1:16; 2:33; 5:3, 32; 7:51; 8:18 v.l.; 10:44, 47; 11:15; 13:2; 15:8, 28; 19:6; 20:23, 28; 21:11; 28:25; Eph 1:13 (τὸ πν. τῆς ἐπαγγελίας τὸ ἅγιον); 4:30 (τὸ πν. τὸ ἅγιον τοῦ θεοῦ); Hb 3:7; 9:8; 10:15; 1 Cl 13:1; 16:2; 18:11 (Ps 50:13); 22:1; IEph 9:1; Hs 5, 5, 2; 5, 6, 5–7 (on the relationship of the Holy Spirit to the Son in Hermas s. ALink, Christi Person u. Werk im Hirten des Hermas 1886; JvWalter, ZNW 14, 1913, 133–44; MDibelius, Hdb. exc. following Hs 5, 6, 8 p. 572–76).—τὸ ἅγιον πνεῦμα (Wsd 9:17; OdeSol 11:2; TestJob 51:2; ApcEsdr 7:16; Just. D. 25, 1 al.) Mt 28:19; Lk 12:10 (s. above), 12; Ac 1:8; 2:38 (epexegetic gen.); 4:31; 9:31; 10:45; 13:4; 16:6; 1 Cor 6:19; 2 Cor 13:13; 1J 5:7 v.l. (on the Comma Johanneum s. λόγο 3); GJs 24:4 (s. χρηματίζω 1bα). As the mother of Jesus GHb 20, 61 (HLeisegang, Pneuma Hagion 1922, 64ff; SHirsch, D. Vorstellg. v. e. weibl. πνεῦμα ἅγ. im NT u. in d. ältesten christl. Lit. 1927. Also WBousset, Hauptprobleme der Gnosis 1907, 9ff).

β. without the art. (s. B-D-F §257, 2; Rob. 761; 795) πνεῦμα ἅγιον (PGM 3, 289; Da 5:12 LXX; PsSol 17:37; AssMos Fgm. b; Just., D. 4, 1 al.; Ath. 24, 1. S. also Da Theod. 4:8, 9, 18 θεοῦ πνεῦμα ἅγιον or πνεῦμα θεοῦ ἅγιον) Mk 1:8; Lk 1:15, 35, 41, 67; 2:25; 4:1; 11:13; J 20:22 (Cassien, La pentecôte johannique [J 20:19–23] ’39.—See also 1QS 4:20f); Ac 2:4a; 4:8; 7:55; 8:15, 17, 19; 9:17; 10:38; 11:24; 13:9; 19:2ab; Hb 2:4; 6:4; 1 Pt 1:12 v.l.; 1 Cl 2:2; AcPl 6:18; 9:4 (restored after Aa I 110, 11); AcPlCor 2:5.—So oft. in combination w. a prep.: διὰ πνεύματος ἁγίου Ac 1:2; 4:25; Ro 5:5; 2 Ti 1:14; 1 Cl 8:1 (cp. διὰ πν. αἰωνίου Hb 9:14). διὰ φωνῆς πν. ἁγίου AcPl Ha 11, 6. ἐκ πνεύματος ἁγίου (Eus., PE 3, 12, 3 of the Egyptians: ἐκ τ. πνεύματος οἴονται συλλαμβάνειν τὸν γῦπα. Here πνεῦμα= ‘wind’; s. Horapollo 1, 11 p. 14f. The same of other birds since Aristot.—On the neut. πνεῦμα as a masc. principle cp. Aristoxenus, Fgm. 13 of the two original principles: πατέρα μὲν φῶς, μητέρα δὲ σκότος) Mt 1:18, 20; IEph 18:2; GJs 14:2; 19:1 (pap). ἐν πνεύματι ἁγίῳ (PsSol 17:37; ApcZeph; Ar. 15, 1) Mt 3:11; Mk 1:8 v.l.; Lk 3:16; J 1:33b; Ac 1:5 (cp. 1QS 3:7f); 11:16; Ro 9:1; 14:17; 15:16; 1 Cor 12:3b; 2 Cor 6:6; 1 Th 1:5; 1 Pt 1:12 (without ἐν v.l.); Jd 20. ὑπὸ πνεύματος ἁγίου 2 Pt 1:21. Cp. ἐν δυνάμει πνεύματος ἁγίου Ro 15:13, 19 v.l. (for πνεύματος θεοῦ). μετὰ χαρᾶς πνεύματος ἁγίου 1 Th 1:6. διὰ ἀνακαινώσεως πνεύματος ἁγίου Tit 3:5.

ⓓ abs.

α. w. the art. τὸ πνεῦμα. In this connection the art. is perh. used anaphorically at times, w. the second mention of a word (s. B-D-F §252; Rob. 762); perh. Mt 12:31 (looking back to vs. 28 πν. θεοῦ); Mk 1:10, 12 (cp. vs. 8 πν. ἅγιον); Lk 4:1b, 14 (cp. vs. 1a); Ac 2:4b (cp. vs. 4a).—As a rule it is not possible to assume that anaphora is present: Mt 4:1; J 1:32, 33a; 3:6a, 8b (in wordplay), 34; 7:39a; Ac 8:29; 10:19; 11:12, 28; 19:1 D; 20:3 D, 22; 21:4; Ro 8:23 (ἀπαρχή 1bβ; 2), 26a, 27; 12:11; 15:30; 2 Cor 1:22 and 5:5 (KErlemann, ZNW 83, ’92, 202–23, and s. ἀρραβών); 12:18 (τῷ αὐτῷ πν.); Gal 3:2, 5, 14 (ἐπαγγελία 1bβ); Eph 4:3 (gen. of the author); 6:17 (perh. epexegetic gen.); 1 Ti 4:1a; Js 4:5; 1J 3:24; 5:6ab (some mss. add καὶ πνεύματος to the words διʼ ὕδατος κ. αἵματος at the beg. of the verse; this is approved by HvSoden, Moffatt, Vogels, Merk, and w. reservations by CDodd, The Joh. Epistles ’46, TManson, JTS 48, ’47, 25–33), vs. 8; Rv 2:7, 11, 17, 29; 3:6, 13, 22; 14:13; 22:17; B 19:2, B 7= D 4:10 (s. ἐτοιμάζω b). ἐν τῷ πνεύματι (led) by the Spirit Lk 2:27.—Paul links this Spirit of God, known to every Christian, with Christ as liberating agent in contrast to legal constraint ὁ κύριος τὸ πνεῦμα ἐστιν the Lord means Spirit 2 Cor 3:17a (UHolzmeister, 2 Cor 3:17 Dominus autem Spiritus est 1908; JNisius, Zur Erklärung v. 2 Cor 3:16ff: ZKT 40, 1916, 617–75; JKögel, Ὁ κύριος τὸ πνεῦμά ἐστιν: ASchlatter Festschr. 1922, 35–46; C Guignebert, Congr. d’Hist. du Christ. II 1928, 7–22; EFuchs, Christus u. d. Geist b. Pls ’32; HHughes, ET 45, ’34, 235f; CLattey, Verb. Dom. 20, ’40, 187–89; DGriffiths ET 55, ’43, 81–83; HIngo, Kyrios und Pneuma, ’61 [Paul]; JDunn, JTS 21, ’70, 309–20).

β. without the art. πνεῦμα B 1:3. κοινωνία πνεύματος Phil 2:1 (κοινωνία 1 and 2). πνεύματι in the Spirit or through the Spirit Gal 3:3; 5:5, 16, 18; 1 Pt 4:6. εἰ ζῶμεν πνεύματι, πνεύματι καὶ στοιχῶμεν if we live by the Spirit, let us also walk by the Spirit Gal 5:25. Freq. used w. a prep.: διὰ πνεύματος 1 Pt 1:22 v.l. ἐξ (ὕδατος καὶ) πνεύματος J 3:5. ἐν πνεύματι in, by, through the Spirit Mt 22:43; Eph 2:22; 3:5; 5:18; 6:18; Col 1:8 (ἀγάπη ἐν πνεύματι love called forth by the Spirit); B 9:7. κατὰ πνεῦμα Ro 8:4f; Gal 4:29. ἐν ἁγιασμῷ πνεύματος 2 Th 2:13; 1 Pt 1:2 (s. ἁγιασμός).—In neg. expressions: οὔπω ἧν πνεῦμα the Spirit had not yet come J 7:39b. ψυχικοὶ πνεῦμα μὴ ἔχοντες worldly people, who do not have the Spirit Jd 19.—ἓν πνεῦμα one and the same Spirit 1 Cor 12:13; Eph 2:18; 4:4; one (in) Spirit 1 Cor 6:17.

ⓔ The Spirit is more closely defined by a gen. of thing: τὸ πν. τῆς ἀληθείας (TestJud 20:5) J 14:17; 15:26; 16:13 (in these three places the Spirit of Truth is the Paraclete promised by Jesus upon his departure); 1J 4:6 (opp. τὸ πνεῦμα τῆς πλάνης, as TestJud 20:1; PsSol 8:14 πλ. πλανήσεως; Just., D. 7, 3 πλάνου καὶ ἀκαθάρτου πνεύματος; cp. 1QS 4:23); τὸ τῆς δόξης πν. 1 Pt 4:14. τὸ πν. τῆς ζωῆς the Spirit of life Ro 8:2. το πν. τῆς πίστεως 2 Cor 4:13. πν. σοφίας καὶ ἀποκαλύψεως Eph 1:17 (cp. Just., D. 87, 4). πν. υἱοθεσίας Ro 8:15b (opp. πν. δουλείας vs. 15a). πν. δυνάμεως AcPl Ha 8, 25. πν. δυνάμεως καὶ ἀγάπης καὶ σωφρονισμοῦ 2 Ti 1:7 (opp. πν. δειλίας). τὸ πν. τῆς χάριτος (s. TestJud 24:2) Hb 10:29 (Zech 12:10); cp. 1 Cl 46:6.

ⓕ Of Christ ‘it is written’ in Scripture: (ἐγένετο) ὁ ἔσχατος Ἀδὰμ εἰς πνεῦμα ζῳοποιοῦν 1 Cor 15:45. The scripture pass. upon which the first part of this verse is based is Gen 2:7, where Wsd 15:11 also substitutes the words πνεῦμα ζωτικόν for πνοὴν ζωῆς (cp. Just., D. 6, 2). On the other hand, s. Philo, Leg. All. 1, 42 and s. the lit. s.v. Ἀδάμ ad loc.

ⓖ The (divine) Pneuma stands in contrast to everything that characterizes this age or the finite world gener.: οὐ τὸ πν. τοῦ κόσμου ἀλλὰ τὸ πν. τὸ ἐκ τοῦ θεοῦ 1 Cor 2:12; cp. Eph 2:2 and 1 Ti 4:1ab.

α. in contrast to σάρξ, which is more closely connected w. sin than any other earthly material (Just., D. 135, 6): J 3:6; Ro 8:4–6, 9a, 13; Gal 3:3; 5:17ab; 6:8. Cp. B 10:9. πᾶσα ἐπιθυμία κατὰ τοῦ πνεύματος στρατεύεται Pol 5:3.

β. in contrast to σῶμα (=σάρξ) Ro 8:10 and to σάρξ (=σῶμα, as many hold) J 6:63a (for τὸ πν. ἐστιν τὸ ζῳοποιοῦν cp. Philo, Op. Mund. 30; Herm. Wr. in Cyrill., C. Jul. I 556c=542, 24 Sc. the pneuma τὰ πάντα ζῳοποιεῖ καὶ τρέφει. S. also f above). Cp. Ro 8:11b.

γ. in contrast to γράμμα, which is the characteristic quality of God’s older declaration of the divine will in the law: Ro 2:29; 7:6; 2 Cor 3:6ab, 8 (cp. vs. 7).

δ. in contrast to the wisdom of humans 1 Cor 2:13.

⑥ the Spirit of God as exhibited in the character or activity of God’s people or selected agents, Spirit, spirit (s. HPreisker, Geist u. Leben ’33).

ⓐ πνεῦμα is accompanied by another noun, which characterizes the working of the Spirit more definitely: πνεῦμα καὶ δύναμις spirit and power Lk 1:17; 1 Cor 2:4. Cp. Ac 10:38; 1 Th 1:5. πνεῦμα καὶ ζωή J 6:63b. πνεῦμα κ. σοφία Ac 6:3; cp. vs. 10 (cp. TestReub 2:6 πνεῦμα λαλίας). πίστις κ. πνεῦμα ἅγιον 6:5 (cp. Just., D. 135, 6). χαρὰ καὶ πνεῦμα ἅγ. 13:52.

ⓑ Unless frustrated by humans in their natural condition, the Spirit of God produces a spiritual type of conduct Gal 5:16, 25 and produces the καρπὸς τοῦ πνεύματος vs. 22 (s. Vögtle under πλεονεξία).

ⓒ The Spirit inspires certain people of God B 12:2; B 13:5, above all, in their capacity as proclaimers of a divine revelation (Strabo 9, 3, 5 the πνεῦμα ἐνθουσιαστικόν, that inspired the Pythia; Περὶ ὕψους 13, 2; 33, 5 of the divine πν. that impels prophets and poets to express themselves; schol. on Pla. 856e of a μάντις: ἄνωθεν λαμβάνειν τὸ πνεῦμα καὶ πληροῦσθαι τοῦ θεοῦ; Aristobulus in Eus., PE 8, 10, 4 [=Fgm. 2, 4 p. 136 Holladay] τὸ θεῖον πν., καθʼ ὸ̔ καὶ προφήτης ἀνακεκήρυκται ‘[Moses possessed] the Divine Spirit with the result that he was proclaimed a prophet’; AscIs 1:7 τὸ πν. τὸ λαλοῦν ἐν ἐμοί; AssMos Fgm. f εἶδεν πνεύματι ἐπαρθείς; Just., A I, 38, 1 al.; Ath. 10, 3 τὸ προφητικὸν πν. Cp. Marinus, Vi. Procli 23 of Proclus: οὐ γὰρ ἄνευ θείας ἐπινοίας … διαλέγεσθαι; Orig., C. Cels. 3, 28, 23). προφητεία came into being only as ὑπὸ πνεύματος ἁγίου φερόμενοι ἐλάλησαν ἀπὸ θεοῦ ἄνθρωποι 2 Pt 1:21; cp. Ac 15:29 v.l.; cp. 1 Cl 8:1. David Mt 22:43; Mk 12:36; cp. Ac 1:16; 4:25. Isaiah Ac 28:25. Moses B 10:2, B 9; the Spirit was also active in giving the tables of the law to Moses 14:2. Christ himself spoke in the OT διὰ τοῦ πνεύματος τοῦ ἁγίου 1 Cl 22:1. The ἱεραὶ γραφαί are called αἱ διὰ τοῦ πν. τοῦ ἁγίου 45:2.—The Christian prophet Agabus also ἐσήμαινεν διὰ τοῦ πν. Ac 11:28; cp. Ac 21:11. Likew. Ign. IPhld 7:2. In general the Spirit reveals the most profound secrets to those who believe 1 Cor 2:10ab.—1 Cl claims to be written διὰ τοῦ ἁγ. πν. 63:2. On Ac 19:21 s. 3b.

ⓓ The Spirit of God, being one, shows the variety and richness of its life in the different kinds of spiritual gifts which are granted to certain Christians 1 Cor 12:4, 7, 11; cp. vs. 13ab.—Vss. 8–10 enumerate the individual gifts of the Spirit, using various prepositions: διὰ τοὺ πν. vs. 8a; κατὰ τὸ πν. vs. 8b; ἐν τῷ πν. vs. 9ab. τὸ πν. μὴ σβέννυτε do not quench the Spirit 1 Th 5:19 refers to the gift of prophecy, acc. to vs. 20.—The use of the pl. πνεύματα is explained in 1 Cor 14:12 by the varied nature of the Spirit’s working; in vs. 32 by the number of persons who possess the prophetic spirit; on the latter s. Rv 22:6 and 19:10.

ⓔ One special type of spiritual gift is represented by ecstatic speaking. Of those who ‘speak in tongues’ that no earthly person can understand: πνεύματι λαλεῖ μυστήρια expresses secret things in a spiritual way 1 Cor 14:2. Cp. vss. 14–16 and s. νοῦς 1b. τὸ πνεῦμα ὑπερεντυγχάνει στεναγμοῖς ἀλαλήτοις the Spirit pleads in our behalf with groans beyond words Ro 8:26b. Of speech that is ecstatic, but expressed in words that can be understood λαλεῖν ἐν πνεύματι D 11:7, 8; cp. vs. 9 (on the subject-matter 1 Cor 12:3; Jos., Ant. 4, 118f; TestJob 43:2 ἀναλαβὼν Ἐλιφᾶς πν. εἶπεν ὕμνον). Of the state of mind of the seer of the Apocalypse: ἐν πνεύματι Rv 17:3; 21:10; γενέσθαι ἐν πν. 1:10; 4:2 (s. γίνομαι 5c, ἐν 4c and EMoering, StKr 92, 1920, 148–54; RJeske, NTS 31, ’85, 452–66); AcPl Ha 6, 27. On the Spirit at Pentecost Ac 2:4 s. KLake: Beginn. I 5, ’33, 111–21. κατασταλέντος τοῦ πν. τοῦ ἐν Μύρτῃ when the Spirit (of prophecy) that was in Myrta ceased speaking AcPl Ha 7, 9.

ⓕ The Spirit leads and directs Christian missionaries in their journeys (Aelian, NA 11, 16 the young women are led blindfolded to the cave of the holy serpent; they are guided by a πνεῦμα θεῖον) Ac 16:6, 7 (by dreams, among other methods; cp. vs. 9f and s. Marinus, Vi. Procli 27: Proclus ἔφασκεν προθυμηθῆναι μὲν πολλάκις γράψαι, κωλυθῆναι δὲ ἐναργῶς ἔκ τινων ἐνυπνίων). In Ac 16:6–7 τὸ ἅγιον πν. and τὸ πν. Ἰησοῦ are distinguished.

⑦ an activating spirit that is not fr. God, spirit: πν. ἔτερον a different (kind of) spirit 2 Cor 11:4. Cp. 2 Th 2:2; 1J 4:1–3. Because there are persons activated by such spirits, it is necessary to test the var. kinds of spirits (the same problem Artem. 3, 20 περὶ διαφορᾶς μάντεων, οἷς δεῖ προσέχειν καὶ οἷς μή) 1 Cor 12:10; 1J 4:1b. ὁ διάβολος πληροῖ αὐτὸν αὐτοῦ πν. Hm 11:3. Also οὐκ οἴδατε ποίου πνεύματός ἐστε Lk 9:55 v.l. distinguishes betw. the spirit shown by Jesus’ disciples, and another kind of spirit.—Even more rarely a spirit divinely given that is not God’s own; so (in a quot. fr. Is 29:10) a πνεῦμα κατανύξεως Ro 11:8.

⑧ an independent transcendent personality, the Spirit, which appears in formulas that became more and more fixed and distinct (cp. Ath. 12, 2; Hippol., Ref. 7, 26, 2.—Ps.-Lucian, Philopatr. 12 θεόν, υἱόν πατρός, πνεῦμα ἐκ πατρὸς ἐκπορευόμενον ἓν ἐκ τριῶν καὶ ἐξ ἑνὸς τρία, ταῦτα νόμιζε Ζῆνα, τόνδʼ ἡγοῦ θεόν=‘God, son of the father, spirit proceeding from the father, one from three and three from one, consider these as Zeus, think of this one as God’. The entire context bears a Christian impress.—As Aion in gnostic speculation Iren. 1, 2, 5 [Harv. I 21, 2]): βαπτίζοντες αὐτοὺς εἰς τὸ ὄνομα τοῦ πατρὸς καὶ τοῦ υἱοῦ καὶ τοῦ ἁγίου πνεύματος Mt 28:19 (on the text s. βαπτίζω 2c; on the subject-matter GWalther, Die Entstehung des Taufsymbols aus dem Taufritus: StKr 95, 1924, 256ff); D 7:1, 3. Cp. 2 Cor 13:13; 1 Cl 58:2; IEph 9:1; IMg 13:1b, 2; MPol 14:3; 22:1, 3; Epil Mosq 5. On this s. HUsener, Dreiheit: RhM 58, 1903, 1ff; 161ff; 321ff; esp. 36ff; EvDobschütz, Zwei-u. dreigliedrige Formeln: JBL 50, ’31, 116–47 (also Heinrici Festschr. 1914, 92–100); Norden, Agn. Th. 228ff; JMainz, Die Bed. der Dreizahl im Judentum 1922; Clemen² 125–28; NSöderblom, Vater, Sohn u. Geist 1909; DNielsen, Der dreieinige Gott I 1922; GKrüger, Das Dogma v. der Dreieinigkeit 1905, 46ff; AHarnack, Entstehung u. Entwicklung der Kirchenverfassung 1910, 187ff; JHaussleiter, Trinitarischer Glaube u. Christusbekenntnis in der alten Kirche: BFCT XXV 4, 1920; JLebreton, Histoire du dogme de la Trinité I: Les origines⁶ 1927; RBlümel, Pls u. d. dreieinige Gott 1929.—On the whole word FRüsche, D. Seelenpneuma ’33; HLeisegang, Der Hl. Geist I 1, 1919; EBurton, ICC Gal 1921, 486–95; PVolz, Der Geist Gottes u. d. verwandten Erscheinungen im AT 1910; JHehn, Zum Problem des Geistes im alten Orient u. im AT: ZAW n.s. 2, 1925, 210–25; SLinder, Studier till Gamla Testamentets föreställningar om anden 1926; AMarmorstein, Der Hl. Geist in der rabb. Legende: ARW 28, 1930, 286–303; NSnaith, The Distinctive Ideas of the OT ’46, 229–37; FDillistone, Bibl. Doctrine of the Holy Spirit: Theology Today 3, ’46/47, 486–97; TNicklin, Gospel Gleanings ’50, 341–46; ESchweizer, CDodd Festschr., ’56, 482–508; DLys, Rûach, Le Souffle dans l’AT, ’62; DHill, Gk. Words and Hebr. Mngs. ’67, 202–93.—HGunkel, Die Wirkungen des Hl. Geistes² 1899; HWeinel, Die Wirkungen des Geistes u. der Geister im nachap. Zeitalter 1899; EWinstanley, The Spirit in the NT 1908; HSwete, The Holy Spirit in the NT 1909, The Holy Spirit in the Ancient Church 1912; EScott, The Spirit in the NT 1923; FBüchsel, Der Geist Gottes im NT 1926; EvDobschütz, Der Geistbesitz des Christen im Urchristentum: Monatsschr. für Pastoral-theol. 20, 1924, 228ff; FBadcock, ‘The Spirit’ and Spirit in the NT: ET 45, ’34, 218–21; RBultmann, Theologie des NT ’48, 151–62 (Eng. tr. KGrobel, ’51, I 153–64); ESchweizer, Geist u. Gemeinde im NT ’52, Int 6, ’52, 259–78.—WTosetti, Der Hl. Geist als göttliche Pers. in den Evangelien 1918; HLeisegang, Pneuma Hagion. Der Ursprung des Geistbegriffs der Syn. Ev. aus der griech. Mystik 1922; AFrövig, Das Sendungsbewusstsein Jesu u. der Geist 1924; HWindisch, Jes. u. d. Geist nach Syn. Überl.: Studies in Early Christianity, presented to FCPorter and BWBacon 1928, 209–36; FSynge, The Holy Spirit in the Gospels and Acts: CQR 120, ’35, 205–17; CBarrett, The Holy Spirit and the Gospel Trad. ’47.—ESokolowski, Die Begriffe Geist u. Leben bei Pls 1903; KDeissner, Auferstehungshoffnung u. Pneumagedanke bei Pls 1912; GVos, The Eschatological Aspect of the Pauline Conception of the Spirit: Bibl. and Theol. Studies by the Faculty of Princeton Theol. Sem. 1912, 209–59; HBertrams, Das Wesen des Geistes nach d. Anschauung des Ap. Pls 1913; WReinhard, Das Wirken des Hl. Geistes im Menschen nach den Briefen des Ap. Pls 1918; HHoyle, The Holy Spirit in St. Paul 1928; PGächter, Z. Pneumabegriff des hl. Pls: ZKT 53, 1929, 345–408; ASchweitzer, D. Mystik des Ap. Pls 1930, 159–74 al. [Mysticism of Paul the Apostle, tr. WMontgomery ’31, 160–76 al.]; E-BAllo, RB 43, ’34, 321–46 [1 Cor]; Ltzm., Hdb. exc. after Ro 8:11; Synge [s. above], CQR 119, ’35, 79–93 [Pauline epp.]; NWaaning, Onderzoek naar het gebruik van πνεῦμα bij Pls, diss. Amsterd. ’39; RJewett, Paul’s Anthropological Terms, ’71, 167–200.—HvBaer, Der Hl. Geist in den Lukasschriften 1926; MGoguel, La Notion joh. de l’Esprit 1902; JSimpson, The Holy Spirit in the Fourth Gospel: Exp., 9th ser., 4, 1925, 292–99; HWindisch, Jes. u. d. Geist im J.: Amicitiae Corolla (RHarris Festschr.) ’33, 303–18; WLofthouse, The Holy Spirit in Ac and J: ET 52, ’40/41, 334–36; CBarrett, The Holy Spirit in the Fourth Gospel: JTS 1 n.s., ’50, 1–15; FCrump, Pneuma in the Gospels, diss. Catholic Univ. of America, ’54; GLampe, Studies in the Gospels (RHLightfoot memorial vol.) ’55, 159–200; NHamilton, The Holy Spirit and Eschatology in Paul, ’57; WDavies, Paul and the Dead Sea Scrolls, Flesh and Spirit: The Scrolls and the NT, ed. KStendahl, ’57, 157–82.—GJohnston, ‘Spirit’ and ‘Holy Spirit’ in the Qumran Lit.: NT Sidelights (ACPurdy Festschr.) ’60, 27–42; JPryke, ‘Spirit’ and ‘Flesh’ in Qumran and NT, RevQ 5, ’65, 346–60; HBraun, Qumran und d. NT II, ’66, 150–64; DHill, Greek Words and Hebrew Meanings, ’67, 202–93; WBieder, Pneumatolog. Aspekte im Hb, OCullmann Festschr. ’72, 251–59; KEasley, The Pauline Usage of πνεύματι as a Reference to the Spirit of God: JETS 27, ’84, 299–313 (statistics).—B. 260; 1087. Pauly-W. XIV 387–412. BHHW I 534–37. Schmidt, Syn. II 218–50. New Docs 4, 38f. DELG s.v. πνέω. M-M. Dict. de la Bible XI 126–398. EDNT. TW. Sv.

Ελληνικά-Αγγλικά παλαιοχριστιανική Λογοτεχνία > πνεῦμα
15 πολυμερῶς

πολυμερῶς (μέρος) adv. (Diod S 5, 37, 2; Plut., Mor. 537d; several times in Vett. Val. [index III]; Jos., Ant. 12, 54) of πολυμερής, ές (Aristot.; Plut., Mor. 427b; 757d; PGM 13, 304; Wsd 7:22; Ar. 13, 5 body consists of ‘of many parts’; Tat. 15, 1 the soul is composite; s. also Porph., Sent. 34) of prophetic writing, in various parts w. πολυτρόπως=‘in various ways’ (the two words together also Maximus Tyr. 1, 2b; 11, 7a) Hb 1:1 (on the alliteration cp. the beginning of Philo, περὶ μετανοίας; for extreme fondness of π sounds s. e.g. Gorgias 11, 11). Many render in many ways (L-S-J-M cite Plut., Mor. 537d in support, but this pass. refers to the numerous aspects of Thersites’ deformed body, whose various parts are described in Il. 2, 217–19) so NRSV: ‘in many and various ways’. If ‘many ways’ in such rendering refers to a variety of Scripture passages, the translators have the support of the Vulgate: multifariam. But to avoid a suggestion of banality, it is best to render along the line suggested above. Also, the rhetorical structure of Hb requires some preparation in the prol. for the numerous reff. to the OT.—DELG s.v. μείρομαι II. M-M.

Ελληνικά-Αγγλικά παλαιοχριστιανική Λογοτεχνία > πολυμερῶς
16 σάρξ

σάρξ, σαρκός, ἡ (Hom.+; ‘flesh’).

① the material that covers the bones of a human or animal body, flesh lit. 1 Cor 15:39abcd; Hv 3, 10, 4; 3, 12, 1. The pl. (which denotes flesh in the mass [Lucian, Dial. Mort. 10, 5], whereas the sing. rather denotes the substance.—Herodas 4, 61; Gen 40:19; 1 Km 17:44; 4 Km 9:36; PsSol 4:19; TestJob 13:5; Philo; Jos., Ant. 12, 211; Just., A I, 26, 7; Mel., P. 52, 383; Ath. 34, 2) Lk 24:39 v.l.; Rv 19:18, 21 (4 [6] Esdr [POxy 1010, 16] cannibalism out of hunger, sim. Mel., P. 52, 383; Quint. Smyrn. 11, 245: the σάρκες of the slain are food for the birds) B 10:4; metaph. Rv 17:16. It decays 1 Cl 25:3; cp. Ac 2:31 (cp. 2a below). Normally gives forth an evil odor when burned MPol 15:2. W. bones (s. ὀστέον) 1 Cl 6:3 (Gen 2:23); Lk 24:39; Eph 5:30 v.l. (metaph.). Paul speaks of his illness as a σκόλοψ τῇ σαρκί (s. σκόλοψ) 2 Cor 12:7. ἡ ἐν σαρκὶ περιτομή the physical circumcision (cp. Just., D. 10, 1 al.) Ro 2:28; cp. Eph 2:11b; Col 2:13 (ἀκροβυστία 2); Gal 6:13 (ἡ σάρξ=the flesh that is circumcised); B 9:4. Metaph.: the corrosion on the precious metals of the rich φάγεται τὰς σάρκας ὑμῶν ὡς πῦρ Js 5:3.—Ign. describes the elements of the Eucharist as σὰρξ (or αἷμα) Ἰησοῦ Χριστοῦ IRo 7:3; IPhld 4; ISm 7:1. Also J 6:51–56 urges that one must eat the flesh (and drink the blood) of the Human One or Son of Man (Just., A I, 66, 2; s. TPhilips, Die Verheissung der hl. Eucharistie nach Joh. 1922; Bultmann ad loc.; AWikenhauser ’48, 105f).—His anti-Docetic position also leads Ign. to use the concept ‘flesh (and blood) of Christ’ in other contexts as well ITr 8:1; IPhld 5:1.—For Mt 16:17; Gal 1:16; Eph 6:12; and 1 Cor 15:50 s. 3a.

② the physical body as functioning entity, body, physical body

ⓐ as substance and living entity (Aeschyl., Sept. 622: opp. νοῦς; Ex 30:32; 4 Km 6:30; TestAbr A 20 p. 103, 6 [Stone p. 54] πάντα τὰ μέλη τῆς σαρκός μου; w. καρδία or ψυχή Alex. Aphr., An. p. 98, 7–10 Br.; Ps 37:8; 62:2; Eccl 2:3; Ezk 11:19; 44:7 a1.; Jos., Bell. 6, 47, Ant. 19, 325; Ar.15, 7) οὔτε ἡ σὰρξ αὐτοῦ εἶδεν διαφθοράν Ac 2:31 (but s. 1). W. ψυχή 1 Cl 49:6 (Tat. 13:2 al.). W. καρδία Ac 2:26 (Ps 15:9).—Eph 5:29. ἑόρακαν τὸ πρόσωπόν μου ἐν σαρκί they have seen me face to face Col 2:1. ἕως ἂν τὸν χριστὸν ἐν σαρκὶ ἴδῃ before he had seen the Messiah in person GJs 24:4 (cp. Lk 2:26). Opp. πνεῦμα (Ath. 31:3; PGM 5, 460 ἐπικαλοῦμαί σε τὸν κτίσαντα πᾶσαν σάρκα κ. πᾶν πνεῦμα) 1 Cor 5:5; 2 Cor 7:1; Col 2:5; 1 Pt 4:6; Hm 3:1; 10, 2, 6; cp. AcPl Ant 13:17 (=Aa, I 237, 2; s. οἶδα); also in relation to Christ (though this is disputed) J 6:63; Hs 5, 6, 5–7; cp. 1 Ti 3:16.—ἀσθένεια τῆς σαρκός bodily ailment Gal 4:13; s. vs. 14. ἀσθενὴς τῇ σαρκί weak in the body Hs 9, 1, 2. ὁ ἀλγῶν σάρκα the one who is ill in body B 8:6. πάσχειν σαρκί 1 Pt 4:1b. Cp. 2 Cor 7:5. ἡ τῆς σαρκὸς καθαρότης the purity of the body Hb 9:13 (opp. καθαρίζειν τὴν συνείδησιν vs. 14). σαρκὸς ἀπόθεσις ῥύπου 1 Pt 3:21 (s. ῥύπος 1). The σάρξ is raised fr. the dead (s. ParJer 6:9; Theoph. Ant. 1, 7 [74, 2]) 1 Cl 26:3; 2 Cl 9:1. ἀνάστασις σαρκός AcPlCor 1:12; 2:24 (σαρκὸς ἀνάστασιν Just., D. 80, 5); cp. ἀναστήσεσθε ἔχοντες ὑγιῆ τὴν σάρκα AcPlCor 2:32. Of the body of Christ during his earthly ministry Eph 2:14 (JHart, The Enmity in His Flesh: Exp. 6th ser., 3, 1901, 135–41); Hb 10:20; 1 Pt 3:18; 4:1a; 1J 4:2; 2J 7; B 5:1, 10f; 6:7, 9; 7:5; 12:10; IEph 7:2; Pol 7:1; AcPlCor 2:6b. Married couples form μία σάρξ (Gen 2:24; s. Ath. 33, 2 τὴν σάρκα πρὸς σάρκα … κοινωνίαν.—GAicher, Mann u. Weib ein Fleisch: BZ 5, 1907, 159–65) Mt 19:5f; Mk 10:8ab; 1 Cor 6:16; Eph 5:31 (on these passages, TBurkill, ZNW 62, ’71, 115–20). δικαιώματα σαρκός behind ‘all sorts of ceremonial washings’ there are regulations that concern the physical body Hb 9:10.—On ὑποτάγητε τῷ ἐπισκόπῳ ὡς ὁ Χριστὸς τῷ πατρὶ κατὰ σάρκα IMg 13:2 s. Hdb. ad loc. and MRackl, Die Christologie des hl. Ignatius v. Ant. 1914, 228.—πνεῦμα δυνάμεως … ὁ θεὸς … κατέπεμψεν εἰς σάρκα τουτέστιν εἰς τὴν Μαρίαν God sent a powerful spirit (prob. a ref. to the kind of divine breath that brought the first human being to life [Gen 2:7]) into flesh, that is, into Mary AcPl Ha 8, 26=BMM recto 34; s. AcPlCor 1:14.

ⓑ as someth. with physical limitations, life here on earth (ApcEsdr 4:4 p. 28, 3 Tdf. σάρκα ἀνθρωπίνην φορῶ) θλῖψιν τῇ σαρκὶ ἕξουσιν 1 Cor 7:28. Cp. 2 Cor 4:11; Col 1:24. Of Christ τὸ σῶμα τῆς σαρκὸς αὐτοῦ his body with its physical limitations Col 1:22; cp. 2:11 and s. cα below (cp. En 102:5 τὸ σῶμα τῆς σαρκὸς ὑμῶν; 1QpHab 9:2; Orig., C. Cels. 6, 29, 25).—Of human life: ἀποδημεῖν τῆς σαρκός MPol 2:2 (s. ἀποδημέω). ἐπιμένειν ἐν τῇ σαρκί Phil 1:24. ζῆν ἐν σαρκί vs. 22; Gal 2:20. ἐν ς. περιπατεῖν 2 Cor 10:3a. ἐν ς. τυγχάνειν Dg 5:8a. ὄντος ἔτι ἐν ς. σου AcPlCor 1:6. τὸν ἐπίλοιπον ἐν ς. χρόνον 1 Pt 4:2. ἡ ἐπιδημία τῆς σαρκὸς ταύτης our sojourn in life 2 Cl 5:5. ἐν τῇ σαρκί in our earthly life 8:2.

ⓒ as instrument of various actions or expressions.

α. In Paul’s thought esp., all parts of the body constitute a totality known as ς. or flesh, which is dominated by sin to such a degree that wherever flesh is, all forms of sin are likew. present, and no good thing can live in the σάρξ Ro 7:18 (cp. Philo, Gig. 29 αἴτιον δὲ τῆς ἀνεπιστημοσύνης μέγιστον ἡ σὰρξ καὶ ἡ πρὸς σάρκα οἰκείωσις; Sextus 317 ἀγαθὸν ἐν σαρκὶ μὴ ἐπιζήτει. The OT lays no stress on a necessary relationship betw. flesh as a substance, and sin. But for Epicurus the σάρξ is the bearer of sinful feelings and desires as well as the means of sensual enjoyment: Ep. in Plut., Mor. 135c; 1087bf; 1089e; 1096c αἱ τῆς σαρκὸς ἐπιθυμίαι. Also Diog. L. 10, 145. Likew. Plut. himself: Mor. 101b ταῖς τῆς σαρκὸς ἡδοναῖς; 672e; 688d; 734a; Ps.-Plut., Mor. 107f σαρκὶ καὶ τοῖς πάθεσι ταύτης; Maximus Tyr. 33, 7a. Cp. 4 Macc 7:18 τὰ τῆς σαρκὸς πάθη; Philo, Deus Imm. 143 σαρκὸς ἡδονή, Gig. 29; TestJud 19:4; TestZeb 9:7; ApcMos 25 [p. 14, 2 Tdf.] εἰς τὴν ἁμαρτίαν τῆς σαρκός); Ro 6:19; 7:25 (opp. νοῦς); 8:3a, 4–9 (cp. Persius 2, 63 scelerata pulpa, which contaminates devotion to deity), 12f; Gal 5:13, 24; Col 2:23; Jd 23; AcPlCor 2:11, 15; Dg 6:5 (opp. ψυχή, as Plut., Mor. 101b). Opp. τὸ πνεῦμα Ro 8:4, 5, 6, 9, 13; Gal 3:3; 5:16, 17ab; 6:8ab; J 3:6; B 10:9. τὸ μὲν πνεῦμα πρόθυμον, ἡ δὲ σὰρξ ἀσθενής (cp. Orig., C. Cels. 2, 25, 8) Mt 26:41; Mk 14:38; Pol 7:2. σὰρξ ἁμαρτίας sinful flesh Ro 8:3b. ἐπιθυμία (τῆς) σαρκός (cp. Maximus Tyr. 20, 9f σαρκῶν … ἐπιθυμίας) Gal 5:16; 1J 2:16; B 10:9. Pl. Eph 2:3a, cp. b; 2 Pt 2:18; cp. Ro 13:14. τὰ ἔργα τῆς σαρκός Gal 5:19 (s. Vögtle at πλεονεξία). τὰ θελήματα τῆς σαρκός Eph 2:3b. ὁ νοῦς τῆς σαρκός Col 2:18. τὸ σῶμα τῆς σαρκός the body of (sinful) flesh 2:11; cp. 1:22 and s. b above (cp. Sir 23:17 σῶμα σαρκὸς αὐτοῦ; En 102:5 τῷ σώματι τῆς σαρκὸς ὑμῶν). τὰ τῆς σαρκός what pertains to (sinful) flesh Ro 8:5b. ἐν (τῇ) σαρκὶ εἶναι be in an unregenerate (and sinful) state Ro 7:5; 8:8f. τὰ ἔθνη ἐν σαρκί Eph 2:11a. κατὰ σάρκα εἶναι Ro 8:5a; ζῆν vs. 12b; 13; Dg 5:8b; περιπατεῖν Ro 8:4; 2 Cor 10:2; βουλεύεσθαι 1:17; στρατεύεσθαι 10:3b; cp. IRo 8:3 (opp. κατὰ γνώμην θεοῦ).

β. source of the sexual urge. The σάρξ is the source of the sexual urge, without any suggestion of sinfulness connected w. it ἐκ θελήματος σαρκὸς ἐγεννήθησαν J 1:13.

ⓓ as someth. attractive 2 Pt 2:10 (a Hebraism, cp. Judg 2:12; 3 Km 11:10; Sir 46:10). S. also 3b.

③ one who is or becomes a physical being, living being with flesh

ⓐ of humans person, human being: πᾶσα σάρξ every person, everyone (LXX; TestAbr B 7 p. 112, 3 [Stone p. 72]; GrBar 4:10; ApcEsdr 7:7; ApcMos 13 [p. 7, 1 Tdf.]; Mel., P. 55, 400: for כָּל-בָּשָׂר; s. πᾶς 1aα) Lk 3:6 (Is 40:5); J 17:2; Ac 2:17 (Jo 3:1); 1 Pt 1:24 (Is 40:6); 1 Cl 59:3; 64; 2 Cl 7:6; 17:5 (the last two Is 66:24); AcPlCor 2:6a. οὐ πᾶσα σάρξ no person, nobody (En 14:21 end.—W-S. §26, 10a; B-D-F §275, 4; 302, 1; Rob. 752) Mt 24:22; Mk 13:20; Ro 3:20 (cp. Ps 142:2 πᾶς ζῶν); 1 Cor 1:29 (μή); Gal 2:16.—Though ς. in the foll. passages refers to body in its physical aspect, it cannot be divorced from its conjunction with αἷμα, and the unit σὰρξ καὶ αἷμα (cp. Sir 17:31; TestAbr B 13 p. 117, 26 [Stone p. 82]; Philo, Quis Div. Rer. Her. 57; Just., D. 135, 6) refers to a human being in contrast to God and other transcendent beings Mt 16:17; Gal 1:16; Eph 6:12 (here vice versa, αἷ. καὶ ς.). τὰ παιδία κεκοινώνηκεν αἵματος καὶ σαρκός the children share mortal nature Hb 2:14, but with suggestion of its frailty, as indicated by the context with its ref. to death. Because they are the opposites of the divine nature σὰρξ καὶ αἷμα βασιλείαν θεοῦ κληρονομῆσαι οὐ δύναται 1 Cor 15:50 (JJeremias, NTS 2, ’56, 151–59). For Jd 7 s. b next. Cp. AcPl Ant 13, 17 (=Aa I 237, 2) σαρκί personally (s. οἶδα 2).

ⓑ of transcendent entities ὁ λόγος σὰρξ ἐγένετο J 1:14 (RSeeberg, Festgabe AvHarnack dargebracht 1921, 263–81.—Artem. 2, 35 p. 132, 27 ἐὰν σάρκινοι οἱ θεοὶ φαίνωνται; Synes., Dio 6 p. 45b).—Of flesh other than human: ὀπίσω σαρκὸς ἑτέρας after another kind of flesh (cp. Judg 2:12 ὀπίσω θεῶν ἑτέρων) i.e. of divine messengers who take on ς. when they appear to humans (so Windisch et al.; difft. Frame et al. of same-sex activity) Jd 7.

④ human/ancestral connection, human/mortal nature, earthly descent (Did., Gen. 144, 25) Ἀβραὰμ τὸν προπάτορα ἡμῶν κατὰ σάρκα Ro 4:1 (Just., D. 43, 7 al.). οἱ συγγενεῖς μου κατὰ σάρκα 9:3. τοὺς τῆς σαρκὸς ἡμῶν πατέρας Hb 12:9. τὸν Ἰσραὴλ κατὰ σάρκα the earthly Israel 1 Cor 10:18 (opp. τὸν Ἰσραὴλ τοῦ θεοῦ Gal 6:16). Of natural descent τὰ τέκνα τῆς σαρκός children by natural descent Ro 9:8 (opp. τὰ τέκνα τῆς ἐπαγγελίας). ὁ μὲν ἐκ τῆς παιδίσκης κατὰ σάρκα γεγέννηται Gal 4:23; cp. vs. 29. μου τὴν σάρκα my compatriots Ro 11:14 (s. Gen 37:27).—Of Christ’s physical nature Ro 8:3c; Hb 5:7. Christ is descended fr. the patriarchs and fr. David (τὸ) κατὰ σάρκα according to the human side of his nature, as far as his physical descent is concerned Ro 1:3 (JDunn, Jesus: Flesh and Spirit [Ro 1:3f], JTS 24, ’73, 40–68); 9:5; 1 Cl 32:2; IEph 20:2. The context of 2 Cor 11:18 includes ancestry as a reason for boasting, but ς. in this pass. applies as well to other aspects of Paul’s career and therefore belongs more properly in 5.

⑤ the outward side of life as determined by normal perspectives or standards, a transf. sense of 1 and 2. Usually w. κατά indicating norm or standard σοφοὶ κατὰ σάρκα wise (people) according to human standards 1 Cor 1:26. καυχᾶσθαι κατὰ (τὴν) σάρκα boast of one’s outward circumstances, i.e. descent, manner of life, etc. (cp. 11:22) 2 Cor 11:18. κατὰ σάρκα Χριστόν Christ (the Messiah) from a human point of view or as far as externals are concerned 5:16b, cp. a (κατά B5bβ and 7a; also VWeber, BZ 2, 1904, 178–88; HWindisch, exc. ad loc.; Rtzst., Mysterienrel.³, 374–76; FPorter, Does Paul Claim to Have Known the Historical Jesus [2 Cor 5:16]?: JBL 47, 1928, 257–75; RMoxon, CQR 108, 1929, 320–28). οἱ κατὰ σάρκα κύριοι those who, according to human standards, are masters Eph 6:5; Col 3:22. ὑμεῖς κατὰ τὴν ς. κρίνετε you judge by outward things, by externals J 8:15. Of the route taken in one’s earthly life ἡ ὁδὸς ἡ κατὰ σάρκα IRo 9:3.—ἐν σαρκὶ πεποιθέναι place one’s trust in earthly things or physical advantages Phil 3:3f. εὐπροσωπῆσαι ἐν σαρκί Gal 6:12. Onesimus is a beloved brother to Philemon καὶ ἐν σαρκὶ καὶ ἐν κυρίῳ both as a human being (=personally, in the external relationship betw. master and slave) and as a Christian Phlm 16. ὑμῶν δὲ ἐν σαρκὶ ἐπισκόπῳ IEph 1:3 (cp. IMg 3:2).—HWindisch, Taufe u. Sünde 1908; EBurton, ICC Gal. 1920, 492–95; WSchauf, Sarx 1924; WBieder, Auferstehung des Fleisches od. des Leibes?: TZ 1, ’45, 105–20. W. special ref. to Paul: Ltzm., Hdb. exc. on Ro 7:14 and 8:11; Lohmeyer (ἁμαρτία 3a); EKäsemann, Leib u. Leib Christi ’33; RGrant, ATR 22, ’40, 199–203; RBultmann, Theologie des NTs ’48, 228–49 (Engl. tr. by KGrobel, ’51 I, 227–59); LMarshall, Challenge of NT Ethics ’47, 267–70; E Schweizer, Die hellenist. Komponente im NT sarx-Begriff: ZNW 48, ’57, 237–53; two in KStendahl, The Scrolls and the NT, ’57: KKuhn, 94–113 and WDavies, 157–82; JPryke, ‘Spirit’ and ‘Flesh’ in Qumran and NT: RevQ 5, ’65, 346–60; DLys, La chair dans l’AT ’67; ASand, D. Begriff ‘Fleisch’ ’67 (Paul); RJewett, Paul’s Anthropological Terms ’71, 49–166. On Ign.: CRichardson, The Christianity of Ign. of Ant. ’35, esp. 49 and 61. S. also the lit. s.v. πνεῦμα, end.—B. 202. DELG. M-M. EDNT. TW. Spicq. Sv.

Ελληνικά-Αγγλικά παλαιοχριστιανική Λογοτεχνία > σάρξ
17 συνεργός

συνεργός, όν (Pind., Thu. et al.; ins, pap; 2 Macc 8:7; Mel., P. 54, 396 [ἡ τοῦ θανάτου συνεργός, in ref. to ἁμαρτία]) pert. to working together with, helping, as subst. and always so in our lit. helper, fellow-worker (Philo; Jos., Bell. 2, 102, Ant. 7, 346; Orig., C. Cels. 5, 58, 17; Polyb. 31, 24, 10). Paul refers to those who helped him in spreading the gospel as his fellow-workers (subjective gen.) Ro 16:3, 9, 21; Phil 2:25; 4:3; 1 Th 3:2 v.l.; Phlm 1; 24. Instead of the gen. there may be an indication of the field in which the cooperation took place εἰς in (Alex. Aphr., An. Mant. p. 167, 9 Br.) συνεργοὶ εἰς τὴν βασιλείαν τοῦ θεοῦ co-workers in the Kingdom of God Col 4:11. εἰς ὑμᾶς συνεργός fellow-worker among you 2 Cor 8:23. συνεργὸς τοῦ θεοῦ ἐν τῷ εὐαγγελίῳ God’s helper in the gospel 1 Th 3:2. συνεργοί ἐσμεν τῆς χαρᾶς ὑμῶν we are working with you to bring you joy 2 Cor 1:24 (on the gen. cp. X., Cyr. 2, 4, 10; 3, 3, 10 συνεργοὺς τοῦ κοινοῦ ἀγαθοῦ). W. the dat. of that which is assisted (Eur., Thu. et al.) ἵνα συνεργοὶ γινώμεθα τῇ ἀληθείᾳ that we may prove to be helpers of the truth 3J 8 (ς. γίνεσθαί τινι as UPZ 146, 3 [II B.C.]). In θεοῦ ἐσμεν συνεργοί 1 Cor 3:9 the συν-refers either to communion w. God we are fellow-workers with God or to the community of teachers at Corinth we are fellow-laborers in the service of God (so VFurnish, JBL 80, ’61, 364–70).—New Docs 3, 154; DELG s.v. ἔργον. M-M. EDNT. TW.

Ελληνικά-Αγγλικά παλαιοχριστιανική Λογοτεχνία > συνεργός
18 χολή

χολή, ῆς, ἡ (χόλος ‘gall, bile’; since Archilochus [VII B.C.], Fgm. 96; PGM 36, 284; LXX; TestSol 5:9; 13; TestJob 43:8; Test12Patr, ApcEsdr, Philo; Jos., Ant. 17, 173; Mel., P. 79, 574; loanw. in rabb. The equivalent χόλος Hom. et al. is used in both the lit. sense of ‘gall, bile’ and the fig. ‘bitter anger’.)

① lit. a substance w. an unpleasant taste, someth. bitter, gall (PSI 1180, 103 [II A.D.], bile of a hyena; the LXX uses χολή to transl. (a) מְרֵרָה=gall Job 16:13; (b) מְרֹרָה=poison Job 20:14; (c) לַעֲנָה=wormwood Pr 5:4; La 3:15; (d) רֹאשׁ=poison Dt 29:17 [of an unspecified poisonous plant]; Ps 68:22) ἔδωκαν αὐτῷ πιεῖν οἶνον μετὰ χολῆς μεμιγμένον they gave him a drink of wine mixed with bitters (so Moffatt) Mt 27:34 (fr. Ps 68:22 [?]; cp. Mk 15:23 wine laced w. myrrh).—B 7:3, 5; GPt 5:16 (s. ὄξος).—Zohary, Plants 186.

② fig. ext. of 1: the Semitic idiom χολὴ πικρίας gall of bitterness, bitter gall Ac 8:23 (πικρία 1) in ref. to Simon Magus prob.= bitter poison and refers to his predicament in a state of sin (cp. Dt 29:17 ἐν χολῇ καὶ πικρίᾳ; on the theme 1QS 2:11–17), not to an emotional condition. (Sometimes cited in this connection, but of a difft. order is Biogr. p. 153 the tragedian Philocles ἐπεκαλεῖτο Χολὴ διὰ τό πικρόν.)—PKatz conjectures ἐν χολῇ for ἐνοχλῇ (s. ἐνοχλέω) Hb 12:15 (ZNW 49, ’58, 213–23) on the basis of Dt 29:17 (cp. P⁴⁶ ἐνχ[.]λη). In such case χολή refers to an emotional condition: wrath.—B. 1134. DELG s.v. χόλος. M-M.

Ελληνικά-Αγγλικά παλαιοχριστιανική Λογοτεχνία > χολή
19 ἀπόστολος

ἀπόστολος, ου, ὁ (s. ἀποστέλλω). In older Gk. (Lysias, Demosth.) and later (e.g. Posidon.: 87 Fgm. 53 p. 257, 21 Jac. [Strabo 3, 5, 5]) ὁ ἀ. is a naval expedition, prob. also its commander (Anecd. Gr. 217, 26). τὸ ἀπόστολον with (Pla., Ep. 7, 346a) or without (Vi. Hom. 19) πλοῖον means a ship ready for departure. In its single occurrence in Jos. (Ant. 17, 300; it is not found elsewh. in Jewish-Gk. lit.) it prob. means ‘sending out’; in pap mostly ‘bill of lading’ (s. Preisigke, Fachwörter 1915), less freq. ‘certificate of clearance (at a port)’ (BGU V §64 [II A.D.]=Gnomon des Idios Logos). It can also be ‘letter of authorization (relating to shipping)’: Mitt-Wilck. I/2, 443, 10 (15 A.D.); PHerm 6, 11f (cp. Dig. 49, 6, 1 litteras dimissorias sive apostolos). In contrast, in isolated cases it refers to persons who are dispatched for a specific purpose, and the context determines the status or function expressed in such Eng. terms as ‘ambassador, delegate, messenger’ (Hdt. 1, 21; 5, 38; Synesius, Providence 2, 3 p. 122a ἀπόστολοι of ordinary messengers; Sb 7241, 48; BGU 1741, 6 [64 B.C.]; 3 Km 14:6A; Is 18:2 Sym.). Cp. KLake, The Word Ἀ.: Beginn. I 5, ’33, 46–52. It is this isolated usage that is preferred in the NT w. nuances peculiar to its lit. But the extensive use of ἀποστέλλω in documents relating to pers. of merit engaged in administrative service prob. encouraged NT use of the noun, thus in effect disavowing assoc. w. the type of itinerant philosophers that evoked the kind of pejorative term applied by Paul’s audience Ac 17:18.

① of messengers without extraordinary status delegate, envoy, messenger (opp. ὁ πέμψας) J 13:16. Of Epaphroditus, messenger of the Philippians Phil 2:25.—2 Cor 8:23.

② of messengers with extraordinary status, esp. of God’s messenger, envoy (cp. Epict. 3, 22, 23 of Cynic wise men: ἄγγελος ἀπὸ τ. Διὸς ἀπέσταλται).

ⓐ of prophets Lk 11:49; Rv 18:20; cp. 2:2; Eph 3:5.

ⓑ of Christ (w. ἀρχιερεύς) Hb 3:1 (cp. ApcEsdr 2:1 p. 25, 29 T.; Just., A I, 12, 9; the extra-Christian firman Sb 7240, 4f οὐκ ἔστιν θεὸς εἰ μὴ ὁ θεὸς μόνος. Μααμετ ἀπόστολος θεοῦ). GWetter, ‘D. Sohn Gottes’ 1916, 26ff.

ⓒ but predominately in the NT (of the apologists, only Just.) of a group of highly honored believers w. a special function as God’s envoys. Also Judaism had a figure known as apostle (שָׁלִיחַ; Schürer III 124f w. sources and lit.; Billerb. III 1926, 2–4; JTruron, Theology 51, ’48, 166–70; 341–43; GDix, ibid. 249–56; 385f; JBühner, art. ἄ. in EDNT I 142–46). In Christian circles, at first ἀ. denoted one who proclaimed the gospel, and was not strictly limited: Paul freq. calls himself an ἀ.: Ro 1:1; 11:13; 1 Cor 1:1; 9:1f; 15:9; 2 Cor 1:1; Gal 1:1; Eph 1:1; Col 1:1; 1 Ti 1:1; 2:7; 2 Ti 1:1; Tit 1:1.—1 Cl 47:1. Of Barnabas Ac 14:14; 15:2. Of Andronicus and Junia (less prob. Junias, s. Ἰουνία) Ro 16:7. Of James, the Lord’s brother Gal 1:19. Of Peter 1 Pt 1:1; 2 Pt 1:1. Then esp. of the 12 apostles οἱ δώδεκα ἀ. (cp. ParJer 9:20; AscIs 3:21; 4:3) Mt 10:2; Mk 3:14; Lk 22:14 (v.l. οἱ δώδεκα); cp. 6:13; 9:10; 17:5; Ac 1:26 (P-HMenoud, RHPR 37 ’57, 71–80); Rv 21:14; PtK 3 p. 15, 18. Peter and the apostles Ac 2:37; 5:29. Paul and apostles Pol 9:1 (cp. AcPlTh Aa I, 235 app. of Thecla). Gener. the apostles Mk 6:30; Lk 24:10; 1 Cor 4:9; 9:5; 15:7; 2 Cor 11:13; 1 Th 2:7; Ac 1:2; 2:42f; 4:33, 35, 37; 5:2, 12, 18, 34 v.l., 40; 6:6; 8:1, 14, 18; 9:27; 11:1; 14:4; 2 Pt 3:2; Jd 17; IEph 11:2; IMg 7:1; 13:2; ITr 2:2; 3:1; 7:1; IPhld 5:1; ISm 8:1; D ins; 11:3, 6. As a governing board, w. the elders Ac 15:2, 4, 6, 22f; 16:4. As possessors of the most important spiritual gift 1 Cor 12:28f. Proclaimers of the gospel 1 Cl 42:1f; B 5:9; Hs 9, 17, 1. Prophesying strife 1 Cl 44:1. Working miracles 2 Cor 12:12. W. overseers, teachers and attendants Hv 3, 5, 1; Hs 9, 15, 4; w. teachers Hs 9, 25, 2; w. teachers, preaching to those who had fallen asleep Hs 9, 16, 5; w. var. Christian officials IMg 6:1; w. prophets Eph 2:20; D 11:3; Pol 6:3. Christ and the apostles as the foundation of the church IMg 13:1; ITr 12; 2; cp. Eph 2:20. οἱ ἀ. and ἡ ἐκκλησία w. the three patriarchs and the prophets IPhld 9:1. The Holy Scriptures named w. the ap. 2 Cl 14:2 (sim. ApcSed 14:10 p. 136, 17 Ja.). Paul ironically refers to his opponents (or the original apostles; s. s.v. ὑπερλίαν) as οἱ ὑπερλίαν ἀ. the super-apostles 2 Cor 11:5; 12:11. The orig. apostles he calls οἱ πρὸ ἐμοῦ ἀ. Gal 1:17; AcPlCor 2:4.—Harnack, Mission⁴ I 1923, 332ff (Eng. tr. I 319–31). WSeufert, D. Urspr. u. d. Bed. d. Apostolates 1887; EHaupt, Z. Verständnis d. Apostolates im NT 1896; EMonnier, La notion de l’Apostolat des origines à Irénée 1903; PBatiffol, RB n.s. 3, 1906, 520–32; Wlh., Einleitung², 1911, 138–47; EBurton, AJT 16, 1912, 561–88, Gal comm. 1921, 363–84; RSchütz, Apostel u. Jünger 1921; EMeyer I 265ff; III 255ff. HVogelstein, Development of the Apostolate in Judaism, etc.: HUCA 2, 1925, 99–123; JWagenmann, D. Stellg. d. Ap. Pls neben den Zwölf 1926; WMundle, D. Apostelbild der AG: ZNW 27, 1928, 36–54; KRengstorf, TW I 406–46 (s. critique by HConzelmann, The Theol. of St. Luke ’60, 216, n. 1), Apost. u. Predigtamt ’34; J-LLeuba, Rech. exégét. rel. à l’apostolat dans le NT, diss. Neuchâtel ’36; PSaintyves, Deux mythes évangéliques, Les 12 apôtres et les 72 disciples ’38; GSass, Apostelamt u. Kirche … paulin. Apostelbegr. ’39; EKäsemann, ZNW 40, ’41, 33–71; RLiechtenhan, D. urchr. Mission ’46; ESchweizer, D. Leben d. Herrn in d. Gemeinde u. ihren Diensten ’46; AFridrichsen, The Apostle and His Message ’47; HvCampenhausen, D. urchristl. Apostelbegr.: StTh 1, ’47, 96–130; HMosbech, ibid. 2, ’48, 166–200; ELohse, Ursprung u. Prägung des christl. Apostolates: TZ 9, ’53, 259–75; GKlein, Die 12 Apostel, ’60; FHahn, Mission in the NT, tr. FClarke, ’65; WSchmithals, The Office of the Apostle, tr. JSteely, ’69; KKertelge, Das Apostelamt des Paulus, BZ 14, ’70, 161–81. S. also ἐκκλησία end, esp. Holl and Kattenbusch; also HBetz, Hermeneia: Gal ’79, 74f (w. additional lit.); FAgnew, On the Origin of the Term ἀπόστολος: CBQ 38, ’76, 49–53 (survey of debate); KHaacker, NovT 30, ’88, 9–38 (Acts). Ins evidence (s. e.g. SIG index) relating to the verb ἀποστέλλω is almost gener. ignored in debate about the meaning of the noun.—DELG s.v. στέλλω A. EDNT. M-M. TW. Spicq.

Ελληνικά-Αγγλικά παλαιοχριστιανική Λογοτεχνία > ἀπόστολος
20 ἀσύνετος

ἀσύνετος, ον (s. συνετός; Hdt. et al.; POxy 471, 89; LXX; TestSol 16:5; TestLevi 7:2; GrBar 16:2; Jos., Bell. 6, 170, Ant. 1, 117; Ar. 12:6; Just.) the noun σύνεσις (fr. συνίημι) refers to bringing together of things or persons (juncture of two rivers Hom., Od. 10, 515), then to inward organization (‘understanding’); one who lacks σύνεσις is void of understanding, senseless, foolish, implying also a lack of high moral quality (Kaibel 225, 3; Sir 15:7; TestLevi 7:2).

ⓐ of pers. (as Job 13:2) Mt 15:16; Mk 7:18; B 2:9; Hv 3, 10, 9; m 10, 1, 2f; ἀ. ἄνθρωπος Hv 3, 8, 9; ἔθνος ἀ. Ro 10:19 (Dt 32:21); ἀσύνετόν τινα ποιεῖν Hv 3, 10, 9. In a play on words σύνιε ἀσύνετε understand, you fool Hs 9, 12, 1 and ἀσυνέτους ἀσυνθέτους senseless, faithless Ro 1:31; in the latter pass. ἀσύνετος prob. refers to gross lack of understanding respecting one’s obligations in society (ἀ. in a list of vices also Dio Chrys. 2, 75. W. ἀσύνθετος [and ἄφρων] PCairMasp 97 verso D, 84). W. ἄφρων Hs 9, 14, 4 (cp. Ps 91:7). ἀ. εἰς τὰ μέλλοντα without understanding of the future B 5:3. W. μωρός Hv 3, 6, 5; Hs 9, 22, 4. W. ἄφρων, μωρός and other characteristics 1 Cl 39:1. W. ἄφρων, δίψυχος Hm 12, 4, 2.

ⓑ used w. an impers. noun (Aristoph., Av. 456 φρὴν ἀ.) καρδία Ro 1:21; 1 Cl 51:5 (cp. Ps 75:6); ἡ ἀ. καὶ ἐσκοτωμένη διάνοια the foolish and darkened mind 1 Cl 36:2; (w. πονηρός) διψυχία Hm 9:9.—DELG s.v. ἵημι. M-M. TW.

Ελληνικά-Αγγλικά παλαιοχριστιανική Λογοτεχνία > ἀσύνετος

Страницы

См. также в других словарях:

refers — reference … Philosophy dictionary
refers — reÂ·fer || rÉª fÉœr / fÉœË v. send, direct; ascribe to, relate to; pertain to, apply to; call attention to, allude to … English contemporary dictionary
refers — present third singular of refer … Useful english dictionary
production design — refers to a film s overall design, continuity, visual look and composition (colors, sets, costumes, scenery, props, locations, etc.) that are the responsibility of the production designer; the art department refers to the people in various… … Glossary of cinematic terms
Plamo — refers to the hobby of plastic modeling, and to the products of this hobby. In the West, the term is most often used in reference to fantasy, anime, or manga related objects and characters, as this type of modelling has had a proportionately… … Wikipedia
Failure to thrive (FTT) — Refers to a child whose physical growth is significantly less than that of peers. There is no official consensus on what constitutes failure to thrive (FTT). It usually refers to a child whose growth is below the 3rd or 5th percentiles for their… … Medical dictionary
Thrive, failure to (FTT) — Refers to a child whose physical growth is significantly less than that of peers. There is no official consensus on what constitutes FTT. It usually refers to a child whose growth is below the 3rd or 5th percentiles for their age or whose growth… … Medical dictionary
Bottom Line — Refers to a company s net earnings, net income or earnings per share (EPS). Bottom line also refers to any actions that may increase/decrease net earnings or a company s overall profit. A company that is growing its net earnings or reducing its… … Investment dictionary
ability to pay — Refers to the borrower s ability to make interest and principal payments on debts. Bloomberg Financial Dictionary See: fixed charge coverage ratio. Bloomberg Financial Dictionary In context of municipal bonds, refers to the issuer s present and… … Financial and business terms
acquisition cost — Refers to the price (including the closing costs) to purchase another company or property. Bloomberg Financial Dictionary In the context of investments, refers to price plus brokerage commissions, of a security, or the sales charge applied to… … Financial and business terms
dovish — Refers to the tone of language used to describe a situation and the associated implications for actions. For example, if the Federal Reserve bank refers to inflation in a dovish tone, it is unlikely that they would take aggressive actions.… … Financial and business terms

Словари и энциклопедии на Академике

Перевод: с греческого на английский

refers

См. также в других словарях:

Поделиться ссылкой на выделенное

Словари и энциклопедии на Академике

Перевод: с греческого на английский

refers

См. также в других словарях:

Поделиться ссылкой на выделенное

Прямая ссылка: